يي
سدسم Sa
ا 0
CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME
OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT
FUND GIVEN IN 1891 BY
HENRY WILLIAMS SAGE
| wy
١ #1 1924 100 ieee
Some 81
Library
The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924100477425
PORTA
LINGUARUM ORTENTALIUM
INCHOAVIT
J. H. PETERMANN
CONTINUAVIT
HERM. L. STRACK.
ELEMENTA LINGUARUM
Hebraicae, Phoeniciae, Biblico-Aramaicae,
Samaritanae, Targumicae, Syriacae, Arabicae,
Aethiopicae, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacae, Copticae,
Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum
studiis academicis accommodaverunt
J. H. Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Praetorius,
A. Merz, Aug. Mueller, Friedr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann,
Ad. Erman, V. Shukovski, Th. Noeldeke,
G. Steindorff, R. Bruennow, Dav. H. Mueller, G. Jacob, aiii.
PARS IV.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
BY
A. SOCIN.
SECOND EDITION.
BERLIN,
REUTHER & REICHARD
LONDON NEW YORK
WILLIAMS & NORGATE B. WESTERMANN & Co.
14, HENRIETTA STREET 812, BROADWAY.
1895.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
PARADIGMS, LITERATURE, EXERCISES
AND
GLOSSARY
BY,
Dr. A. SOCIN
PROFESSOR ORDINARIUS IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG.
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION
TRANSLATED FROM THE THIRD GERMAN EDITION
BY THE
Rev. ARCH. R. 8. KENNEDY D.D.
PROFESSOR OF HEBREW ETC, IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH.
NEW YORK, BERLIN,
B. WESTERMANN & Co.. REUTHER & REICHARD
1895.
Fr
PI
6307
361
0
7
1 ١ كسا وا 9 > جا
All rights reserved,
including that of translation into other languages.
PREFACE
TO THE
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION.
The aim of the following pages is to furnish intend-
ing students of classical Arabic with the most import-
ant rules both of the Accidence and of the Syntax
in the briefest possible form. The present edition, the
second in English, is a translation of the third German
edition of 1894, to which, save for a few corrections
and additions, it in all respects corresponds. Its
German counterpart has been considerably altered
compared with the second edition because of the
publishers’ intention to issue a separate chrestomathy
of Arabic prose. Professor R. Bruennow, a scholar
of approved ability, was entrusted with the prepara-
tion of this work which appeared in the year 1894.
The connected narratives which formerly composed
the chrestomathy of the grammar were, according to
arrangement, incorporated in Bruennow’s work, and
consequently had to be dropped from the new edition
VI PREFACE.
of the grammar. On the other hand the latter was
now extended, more particularly in the part dealing
with the syntax, with the result that it will now be
found, with few exceptions, to be sufficient for the
understanding of the new chrestomathy. At the same
time, the fact must again be emphasised that the
present work does not pretend to take the place of
any of the larger treatises; the English student who
wishes to advance beyond the elements of Arabic must
have recourse to the latest edition (the third) of
Wright’s excellent grammar. For this reason the
author has deemed it his duty to adhere to his former
view and to decline, in a book intended for beginners,
to enter into the technical terminology of the Arab
gsrammarians—which may safely be left to the larger
grammars; still the Arabic specialist will easily dis-
cover that their views have been taken into account
even in the present elementary work. The best intro-
duction to this department of study will be found to
be the reading of the Agrumiye, which Bruennow has
printed in his Chrestomathy.
In. order to lighten the first lessons in grammar,
the exercises consisting of short sentences and anec-
dotes have been increased by the addition of a few
short stories, by means of which a sort of stepping
stone is provided to the prose chrestomathy.
PREFACE. VII
The passages for translation into Arabic have been
retained unchanged along with the appropriate
glossary. Experience has shown that this part of the
chrestomathy has unquestionably been of service; and
although I am strongly of opinion that this class of
exercises is of real value in such systematic instruction
as is necessary at first, I am in no wise blind to the
difficulties which the correction of such exercises entails
even on the teacher of Arabic. In order to meet such
difficulties, I have selected single sentences and anec-
dotes from Arabic authors, and have so arranged both
notes and glossary that the student, who in any case
will have to make diligent use of grammar and dic-
tionary, is so to say compelled to reproduce exactly
the Arabic original. From what has just been said,
it is clear that this part of the book, at least, presup-
poses a teacher, for J am convinced that the grammar
of Arabic as a whole, and the syntax in particular,
can only be mastered with extreme difficulty by self-
instruction. I would add, however, that translation
from English should be taken at first in the smallest
possible doses, and even in this way only after the
student has read a part of the Arabic texts,
The synopsis of Arabic literature has also been
extended. Strictly speaking, this section is out of
ش place in an elementary work; still it may afford a
VOL PREFACE,
stimulus to a beginner here and there, and supply an ,,,,,
occasional hint to those pursuing the study of Arabic
by themselves, or at a distance from the larger seats
of learning.
The present English edition is an entirely new
translation. This difficult and tedious work has been
undertaken by Professor Archd. R. 5. KENNEDY of
Edinburgh University. To him and to his late assistant,
Mr. W. B. STEVENSON B. D., Vans Dunlop Scholar in
Semitic Languages of the same University, who has
rendered us great assistance in the reading of the
proofs, I cannot omit to express here my warmest
thanks for their co-operation.
A. Socrn.
NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR.
I have only to add to the foregoing, that my
responsibility as translator does not extend to the
English-Arabic exercises and the relative glossary.
A few verbal changes excepted—chiefly where the
“violence done to the Queen’s English” (p. 57*) was
greater than seemed absolutely necessary—these
have been reprinted from the first edition. I have
also inserted an additional reference here and there,
and in the bibliographical section I am responsible
for one or two additional entries.
I wish also to express my personal indebtedness
to Mr.Stevenson, without whose generous co-operation,
owing to my absence in the East, the book would
not have been ready in time for this winter’s work.
20th September 1895.
A. BR. 8. K.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
GRAMMAR.
I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY (§§ 1—11)..
Page
§ 1. Consonants . . sb ara Wee ee) ce ee? Ren وذ" 1
§ 2. Long Vowels + ics HOSE ao Goat of: tet 6
§ 38. Short Vowels, Nunation, 8 ody Val ap eR 8
5 4 Hamza ee ee 9
§ نوك 10680301 dco es cee ek, ee OR ae Rp os 8 11
S563. Widslay- 6% ao ge) ces أت وي وود Sen “bo was en os 12
5 GaMedda- جد 2 ا @ @ Y @ oe ww oe «© ws 15
§ 8 The Syllable. . . . . . 3 ee. Se ae 16
5١ 9 ناتلا TOG: <a, wir leh) apes Se HORE ee. a أ 17
§ 10. Pause : abe : 18
5 11. The Arabic و san Contenctione د dae NS: eSB 18
Il. ACCIDENCE (§8§ 12—96).
Chap. I. The Pronoun (§§ 12—15).
§ 12. Personal Pronouns fie ce VAD ib al يو Yo 19
§ 13. Demonstrative Pronouns . oe SR عضخ ال 21
§ 14. Relative Pronouns . . . . ......~. 23
5 15. Interrogative Pronouns . . a o who 24
Chap. II. The Verb 3 16—54).
5 16. Groundform . . . 5 So Ge ا 24
§ 17. Conspectus of the derived Siem SO ee A ee 24
§18.I.Stm ........ A Bish e ge ee 088
§ 19. 11. Stem . . ae اليه احهدا 18 ele قر عه و ارو 26
5 20. TIL Stem . ee ee ee ون عجو ارق اب لوو مولا 26
$21, TV Stem) oe اا a & امو وا ww Se اا م و
48
49
49
50
50
50
51
53
ConTENTS.
§ 22. V. Stem
§ 23. VI. Stem . ee
§ 24. VII. Stem 97 & .
5 25. VIIL Stem 5
§ 26. IX. and XI. Stems
§ 27. X. Stem . . . ba Ge
§ 28. The Stems of the auaiidtiterl 3
§ 29. The Passive . Re ee و
8 80. The Tenses . . . . . . .اما
§ 31. The Moods . .. . :
8 32. Imperative . . . .امام
5 33. Inflexion for Person and Number .
§§ 34—36. Verbs mediae geminatae .
§§ 37—38. Verba hamzata : iy ana 4
§ 39. Weak Verbs - ايه م Gee فاع
§ 40. Verba primae 9 et ce a ee
§§ 41-44. Verba mediae و eb كى . . .
§§ 45-48, Verba ultimae 9 et ى . . . .
§ 49. Doubly weak Verbs . . . bon 4
§ 50. The Verb 3.25 eer
§ 51. Verbs of Praise and Blame
§ 52. Forms of Admiration . . Rn
§ 53. The Verb with Pronominal Suffixes . 00
5 54. Sign of the Accusative . . . . .
Chap. 111. The Noun (§§ 55—90).
a. Formation of Nouns.
§ 55. Primitive and derived Nouns. . . ٠.
§ 56. Summary of the simple Nouns
§ 57. Nouns with Preformatives . . » . .
§ 58. Nouns with Afformatives . . . . . .-
§ 59. Quadriliteral Nouns ae ee ee ee ee
§ 60. Participles . 2. . 2. - + + ee
§ 61. Infinitives 2. 2. 2. 2. 2 ee et ee
§ 62. Verbal Adjectives . . . ». + « «= +
٠.
XII ConTENTS.
§ 63. Intensive Forms ie ries sian <A
§ 64. Nomina loci, instrumenti, speciei
§ 65. Nomina relativa a ا
§ 66. Nomina deminutiva. .
§ 67. Nouns from Stems mediae weminatas
§ 68. Nouns from Stems with Hamza
§ 69. Nouns from Stems primae 9 .
§ 70. Nouns from Stems med. 9 and ى
§ 71. Nouns from Stems ultimae 9 and ى
b. Gender of Nouns.
§ 72. Masculine and Feminine Gender
55 73—74. Formation of the Feminine
c. Inflexion of Nouns.
§ 75. Number and Case
§ 76. Formation of the Dual and Pinral .
§ 77. Case-endings of Singular. Triptote and Diptote Nouns
§ 78. Diptotes . . .
§ 79. Inflection of the Tielaaninel enn : 3
§ 80. Shortening of Dual and Plural in the Construct State
5 81. Inflection of Nouns in im and an from ult. 9 and ى
§ 82. The Noun with the Pronominal Suffixes
§ 83. Vowel Changes in the Pluralis Sanus .
§ 84. Proper Names compounded with أبن
٠.
§ 85. Vocative
§ 86. Collective Nouns . 3
§ 87. Broken Plurals . . . .
§ 88. List of the principal varieties of ‘the Broken Plural .
§ 89. Broken Plurals from Quadriliteral Nouns
٠. .
§ 90. Nouns of irregular Formation
Chap. IV. The Numerals (§§ 91—93).
§ 91. The Cardinal Numbers
§ 92, The Connection of the numeral with the thing numbered
§ 93. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions .
ConTENTS. XIII
Page
Chap. V. Particles (§§ 94—96).
§ 94, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions . . . . . 88
§ 95. Inseparable Particles Spee! SP cet eh GR خ١ 88
§ 96. Prepositions and Particles with Suffixes. . . . 89
III. SYNTAX (§§ 97—160).
١
Chap. 1. Tenses and Moods (§§ 97—104).
§ 97. Perfect and Imperfect . . . . . . .. 90
§ 98. Use of the Perfect . . . 1. 1. اعد we ee 91
5 99. Use of the Imperfect . do Ano ين دو CO Shots 92
§ 100. Subjunctive . . . . ae ee ا 94
§ 101. Modus 22060221118 . م er a ae 95
§ 102. Modus energicus . . . . . ...... 95
5 TOS, SPASSIVE: م ee ey Oe me OR RY ne لو نم 96
§ 104. Participles. 2. ©. 2. 2. 1 1. 1 we ew we we 96
Chap. IT. Government of the Verb (§§ 105—117).
§ 105. The Verb and its yee ae ee. le tee 97
5 106. Accusative. . . See fat Semi ta بذك xs 0K 97
§ 107. Accusative after veibe of deine G&G 2 6 a ف 97
§ 108. Verbs with two Accusatives . . . . ... 97
§ 109. The Absolute Object . ©. . . 2. ءامد we 98
§ 110. The Accusative as Predicate . . . . . . . 99
ةق 111. Accusative with VY... . te: gp Geis 100
§ 112. Accusative with 9 of Pounamitance a a ae 101
§ 113. Accusative of nearer Definition . . . .. . 101
5 114* Accusative in Exclamations . . .. .. - 102
§§ 114-116. The Verb with Prepositions . . . . . 1038
5 115 Jin Dates ال لا اعد عد . . ده 104
Chap. III. Government of the Noun (§§ 118—134).
5 118. The Noun with the Article (Determination) . . 105
5 119. Apposition. . . . oe ey ee هد اق 106
§§ 120—122. Qualifying Adjundts را عو ho te Ga Seo Gore 107
§§ 123-130. The Genitive Relation . . . . .اماما 109
136
139
144
144
145
XIV ConTENTS.
§ 181. The Construction of the Infinitive
§ 132. The Participle and its Object .
§ 133. The Nomen Regens undetermined
§ 134. Improper Annexation . . . . . . .ل
Chap. IV. The Simple Sentence (§§ 135—151).
§ 135. Distinction bet. Nominal and Verbal Sentences
§ 136. The Verb in the Verbal Sentence
55 137—138. Indefinite Subject ١ الات 8
§ 139. The Predicate in the Nominal Sentence a ee aes
§§ 140—146. Connection bet. Subject and Predicate
§ 147. The Particles inna and ‘anna... ...
5 148. Subordinate Sentences . . . . . . 2. .
5 149. More than one Predicate . . ......
5 150. Negative Sentences . . . . . .
§ 151. The Particle of Exception .
Chap. V. Compound Sentences (§§ 152—161).
§ 152. Co-ordinate Sentences ٠.
§§ 153—156. The Relative Clause. . . . . .
§ 157. The Circumstantial Clause. . . . . .
§ 158. The Temporal Clause . . gnc 4
§ 159. The Conditional Clause with the Perfect ie th
§ 160. The Conditional Clause with the Apoc. Impf.
§ 161. The Particle ف in the Apodosis . .
APPENDIX.
Computation of Time (Names of the Days of the Week, the
Months &c.) so Ss a re :
LITERATURE.
A. Bibliography . . . eo gp Se a se و اول
B. Introduction and general.
C. Chrestomathies
D. Grammars
ConTENTs. XV
Page
© ا ع ل اك . . E. Lexicography
F. Koran, Islam, Life of Ahemnned, Bible &e. s w = 350
G. Jurisprudence . . . . ww ee 1B
H. Philosophy . . . se # & Bo» we & 154
I. Natural Sciences and Medicine eos ١ ب او Saw Be
K. History, Biographies . . see) 157
L. Cosmography, Geography, Hihnoseaphy, marvel » « 168
M. Poetry . . . . Ce ee eee » » » 466
N. Belles Lettres, Ethics, 000 8 2 & د ع عد حون 069
PARADIGMS.
I. Suffixes and Prefixes for the Conjugation of the Verb 3*
11. Strong triliteral Verb Act. I. . . 2. 1... 4
111. Strong triliteral Verb Pass. 1... . . 2. . . 6*
IV. Quadriliteral Verb, derived Stems. . . . .. 7*
V. Strong triliteral Verb, derived Stems. . . . . 8*
VI. Verbum mediae geminatae Act. I. ey ew «210%
VII. Verbum mediae geminatae Pass. I. . . . . . 11*
VIII. Verbum mediae ue derived Stems . . . 12*
IX. Verba hamzata . . tr i> ow. abn B®
X. Verbum primae ‘gaia و ot ee woe: ap. Sa
XI. Verbum mediae radicalis 9 ما لامك . . . . . 15%
XII. Verbum mediae radicalis ى Act. 1. . ©. . . . 16%
XID. Verbum mediae radicalis 5 vel 6 Pass). . . . 17%
XIV. Verbum med. radicalis 9 et رى derived Stems . . 18*
XV. Verbum tertiae radicalis و (53) Act. I... . 19%
XVI. Verbum tertiae radicalis ى ( 453) Act. LD... 20*
XVIL. Verbum tertiae radicalis و vel ى ( 58) Act. I. 21*
XVIII. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 vel ى Pass. 1. . . . 24%
XIX. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 vel رى derived Stems . 22*
XX. Nomen generis masculini . . . . . . . . 25*
XXI. Nomen generis feminini. . . . «© . «. «© « 26%
XXII. Nouns in “in” and “an”. . 3 اا ريه 127
28*
XXIII. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 3
ooo
XVI ConTENTS.
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
1. Exercises on the Grammar
A. For practice in Reading
B. Exercises on the Accidence. . .
C. Exercises on the Syntax. . . .
II. Connected Extracts. . . . .
111. For Translation into Arabic . . . .
GLOSSARIES.
A. English-Arabic . . . . . ,
B. Arabic-English . . . . . ,
PART I.
GRAMMAR
AND
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
, Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
0
of
GRAMMAR.
I. THE ARABIC CHARACTERS. PHONOLOGY
(§§ 1—11).
The Consonants. The Arabs at first used the Syriac
characters and the Syriac alphabet, in which the order
of the characters is the same as in Hebrew. A relic
of this earlier order is still preserved, in the employ-
ment—afterwards seldom resorted to—of the letters
of the alphabet as cyphers (cf. pages 4—5). At an
early period, however, the Arabs distinguished by
means of diacritical points a number of sounds which
were not so distinguished in the older alphabet.
By ه process of curtailment, moreover, a number of
characters became so like each other that they had
to be distinguished by similar diacritical signs. The
next step was to group together in the alphabet the
characters which in this way had come to resemble
each other. Hence the Arabic alphabet now consists
of twenty-eight consonantal signs, the usual order and
1*
4 TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
1 Form | Value
قو اق افع a} 4
Names 3 ns 3 8 ®S 2 أ
5 8 P| Bm 6 o Pronunciation 8 Pet
8 33 مع SE a se
5 43/85/88 اع 5
مم 8 58 8
E P
1/ cas} Alif* ff} fy ] جاح ا ef. §§ 2 and 4 1
2 als Ba ed ae | ه اع ‘b b 2
3| als 5 wos |e | ين ١ t 400,
~- 5 : 5 English hard th as i 500 |
4| 35 Tha |} ea} 4) 5 | in thing a |e
9 orig. g hard; later
5 جيم Jim الكت > | } ginItaliangiorno; 3 3
3 © 6 | English j
os \ strong h with fric-| h 8
6 Hha C عومصوة أ != الك حم larynx asif
Jj wheezing h | 600
1 ِ = Kha rd a Si) & | ch in Scotch loch a 4
8! SO Dal a |
| ل ادن ذال d a) 700
9 5 Dhal ‘ \ | — | —||soft th, as in thi
0 ل أن 50 as in this r| 200:
10! sf Ra —|—ijr
a eid 2 as in zeal; soft 5| Z 7
Hel, Za" | te عد 3 80
زاى ) 7 | as in rose
12 سين Sin سس | Us| اعم aw hard 8 5 60,
13 شين 532 | | GR) طواش اش S| 300
* The termination 5 i.e. un (see § 3b) is neglected in the tran:
tion, as in the modern Arabic pronunciation,
| Hebrew.
K
Numerical
Value.
1000
100
Transcription.
Form | Value
Sa) ma} ou |
S| 38) m8 |
8 wo | & to 8 to are
8 | 2ه Pronunciation
اك
82 | 18م دق
5م 98 8
اهن «2 | wo |/emphatic 8
1 emphatic d(tongue
4] ض اذ pressed against the
gum)
طاطاط emphatic t
| b b emphatic Z
\ produced by a tight-
4 ening of the vio-
=
fen compressed
5 ||deep emphatic k
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
™
“Oe
١0
glottis
é& x | & |/guttural r
ا فى 2) 3 If
Si 8
Oem ams ik
الى 11
م + a” |}m
إن + 3 iin
x|/ <<) طاه
ao — || W
gol4l aly
Not joined.
rr & كه
GEC Om 7 60 بيس
No
40
Names
اق تخت عمد
6 2, THE VOWELS, HOW INDICATED.
forms of which are exhibited on pp. 4—5. These
signs are written and read from right to left. Some
are joined, to the letters preceding or following, others
are not, as indicated in the table referred to.
When x (No. 26), at the end of a word, indicates
the feminine termination (§ 73), two dots are placed
over it to show that it must be pronounced as ¢ (Nr.
3); thus: &.
Very frequently, especially at the beginning of
words, certain letters, instead of being written along-
side of each other, are placed one above the other
Ecce
(Nos. 5—7), e. g. © for sis (Nos. 2 and 6), = (Nos.
5 and 6) for s\>, sf (Nos. 15 and 5) for se &c.
Instead of لا (Nos. 23 and 1) the Arabs write لا or Y
(the Lam in the latter form beginning at the left
of Alif).
this is particularly the case with the letters
The vowels, how indicated. In the earliest times
٠ the Arabs indicated only the long vowels 2, 7, 7, and
the diphthongs au, ai (whose second element they
regarded as a consonant); this was done by employing
the sign | (No. 1) for 2, (No. 27) for w and (with a)
ay بى (No. 28) for 7 and (with @) ai. In cases where 3
and ,< indicate the sounds auand a/, which we pronounce
as diphthongs, Sukun (see § 3c) is ordinarily placed-
2, THE VOWEL SIGNS. 1
over these letters, to denote that they have no vowel
of their own. Examples: قال 4ala, سير Sird, سوق
sukun, بيع batun, نوم naumun.
In the oldest writing, the long @ was not uniformly
“represented by |, but was occasionally left unrepre-
sented. This omission has continued to be observed
in a series of very common words; in such cases,
however, an upright stroke is usually placed over the
consonant that is to be pronounced with the long 4,
.ع .ه Ide (for (هاذا hada, اله ‘ilahun (God), رحين
rahmanu. Frequently, however, in our printed editions,
we find this long @ represented by a simple رح thus:
|e hada.
In a few words a , after an a does not indicate
the pronounciation au but along 2, originally no doubt
an obscure a; in this case, too, the upright stroke is
t
the usual sign, 6. g. حيوة (alongside of (حياة 7
life (but | with Suffixes: حباته haydtuhu his life).
At the end of many 70105 ى is likewise employed
to represent a long 2: in such cases (like the و in ¢)
it does not receive the Sukun (§ 3c), ©. g. رمى (or
!
) rama (he has thrown); in the middle of a word,
on the other hand, أ takes the place of this 5; thus
-with a suffix sly ramahu he has thrown it.
8 3. THE SHORT VOWELS.
Nore a. In a few rare cases, in the Heddle of a word, we
find 6 denoted by 4, as in the foreign word &4 تورية tauratun Torah.
Nore b. Should yg“ be preceded by a 4, J is written for the
former in order to prevent two ys coming 5000-6 eg. Wo
dunya& world fir yo (§ 744).
Occasionally an أ is added to a final 2 or au, but
it is entirely left out of account in the pronunciation;
ramau (§§ 33 and 53). رموا 0 كتبوأ .ع .©
The short vowels were originally, as a rule, left
* unrepresented’; afterwards the following signs were
employed to represent the short vowels, and (in con-
junction with the signs discussed in § 2) the long’
vowels as well: P
9
1) فكة Fatha? (also 2x5 Fath) < for م (in
certain cases to be pronounced like e in men, also
like م ا 39 Manner), e. g. ACE katala, $B kala.
2) s eee Kenia (also pos Kesr) _ for, e.g. ad
gagiba, 0 3 yabi'u.
Ss
5
pd Damm) ث for uw, e. g.
ese) yaktubu; ee yafutu. 5
When these signs for the short vowels are written
3) m5 3 Dainma (also
1 Many books, particularly those printed in the East, are
printed without these vowel signs.
St
2 The terminations 8“, تق are here represented in the trans-
literation by ره as in modern Arabic.
>
4. HAMZA, 9
twice at the end of a word, they are to be pronounced
with a final 5 (called by the Arabs mace Tanwin,
by us frequently Nunation, from the letter nin), e. g.
Used Samsin, dds ragulun. The Nunation an receives
as an additional indication the letter |, but the pro-
nunciation remains unaffected, ©. مالا .ع malan. This
{ is omitted only when the Nunation accompanies the
feminine termination § (see above § 15), e. مركوية .ع
markubatan, or in cases where the word already has
2
a final |, or in its place a s quiescing in a, e. g. رجا
riban, (Sa hudan (§ 2d). The same holds good in
most cases after Hamza (§ 4). The vowel of the Nu-
nation is always short.
When a consonant has no vowel of its own, this
is indicated by the sign >“ ye Gezma, (also called
oes Sukiin [Rest]) e. .ع Gly safurtu, Canin ma-
Saita (cf. § 2). On the omission of this sign see § 5.
A consonant which is thus pronounced without a
vowel following is said to be “resting”.
Hamza. In order to distinguish the cases in which
‘was employed to denote 2 (§ 2), from those in which
had (as originally in Hebrew) its proper force as
١ consonant, the Arabs gave it the additional sign
10 4. HAMZA,
oe Hamza ع (in form a modified ع ‘Ain). ا accord-
ingly denotes the closure of the larynx by which the
breath, engaged in voice production, is turned on or
off, according as the Hamza precedes or follows a
vowel. It is best heard in English before the second
of such pairs of words as “‘sea eagle”, ‘‘mine eyes”,
Its effect may also be noted by comparing the two
following pronunciations of Kuran, viz: Ku-ran and
Kur-an (the latter with Hamza). In the translitera-
tion we indicate | by ° except at the beginning of a
word where no indication is required. The sign ء is
placed دبي the {, when followed by an i-sound.
Examples s yal 017714 ١ J ibilun, wat -umamun; ie
Bes
s@ala, va ra-sun; Isl ik-ra’. In the last two exam-
ples Hamza closes the syllable.
Before or after an i- or u-sound, the signs و and
is are generally employed instead of ١ as the bearers of
the Hamza, in which case is is written without the two
و2 مو Bo بدو مكاي
D@usa, pr yw taru, lye ywataru; يوس dots: e. g.
0111100 يبَارى Gus 7710, he swiba,
After a long vowel, and in most cases after Sukan,
Hamza as a rule has no bearer, but is written on or
ay ae on Boss 1 :5
‘ird@un, #5 (or §\3) إرضاء above the line, thus:
bar'un, After a vowelless consonant in the middle of
5. TESDID. 11
a word, Hamza with its vowel is placed over the
connecting stroke (except, of course, when no such
connection i is possible, as after و in ده mamlivatun),
thus: ans hati’atun; in the same way hare: §ai’an;
On the other hand, in cases like إمضاء 07300 ” 11 no
Alif is written at the end, cf. § 30.
Tesdid. That a consonant is to be sounded twice
is indicated by the sign of doubling ~, named تَشدِيل
1080304 or X& Sedd (from the initial ش of this word
the sign * has been derived), e. سن .ع sabba, de<5
tarahhulun, This doubling of a consonant is either due
—as in the examples just given—to the essential
nature of the form, nominal or verbal (as for example
the verbal forms corresponding to the Hebrew 20*67
§ 19), or is the result of assimilation.
When one consonant is assimilated to another, the
assimilation is further graphically represented by the
removal of the Sukin from the assimilated consonant.
This applies to the 7 of the article Jf, when the latter
precedes one of the following consonants: رت w, رد
رط رضن رصن دش دس مدر رذ b, ول 5 (that is, dentals,
sibilants andr, i,n). Examples: التاجر hl eal
attalgu, الشيسش asSamsu, (the sun), but 44st alkamaru
(the moon). From the fact that the two last examples
12 6. WASLA.
are stereotyped those consonants that may be assimi-
lated are technically called solar letters, those that
do not admit of assimilation, lunar letters.
Norse a The word a ilahun, God, when joined to the article:
drops the first syllable and becomes الله (5 oy allahu.
Nore b. The words من min, Be “an, gr an (and إن ’in), when
followed by a few words beginning with » m or J / are usually
combined with them into one word, the final ى ” being at the
same time assimilated to the following consonant, e. g. Ge mimma
from le مخ min md, ألا alla from لآ 3 “an la.
Wasia >. A word beginning with two consonants
٠ receives in Arabic either a full helping-vowel prece-
ot cae
ded by Hamza in accordance with § 4a (e. أفلاطون .ع
Plato), or merely a vowel which is heard only when
the word is standing alone, but which must be given
up when the word in question comes to stand after
another word in the sentence. Thus in the latter
هد ه ?90 ه
case we find أقثل uktul instead of cis ktul. The |
which is prefixed in this and similar cases is, however,
still written although the helping vowel accompanying
it is given HPs and it then receives over it the sign
is; wasla e. g. yl wee bintulwaziri. The two
ae thus united together are also to be pronounced -
as if they formed a single word. Suchan lif Waslatum
or Wasla-bearing Alif is called a connective Alif in
6, WASLA. 13
contradistinction to a disjunctive Alif, that is, an Alif
hamzatum or Hamza-bearing Alif (cf. § 4).
Notre. The sign ~ is a modification of yo; wasla or sila deno-
tes “close connection”.
When a connective Alif has to be employed at
the beginning of a sentence, a full vowel must be
pronounced, but, as written, only the proper vowel
sign may قرع the Alif, never a Hamza. Thus
we have الْوَسُولٌ arrasiilu, oo! ubrug but ol JG
pronounce kalahrug.
In the last example the division of the syllables
is now kda-lah-rug. If the vowel preceding a connec-
tive Alif is long, it must now be pronounced as a
short vowel, since it stands in a shut syllable (see
§ 8). Thus القلك & properly /7- Ufulki, has now the
following syllables fil-/ul-ki; so too رضى الله rida-lahi
(§ 2d) = ri-dal-la- “hi, 3591 1,225 (§ 2e) da-ba-hul-~imazza.
If the word before a connective Alif ends in a
consonant which has no vowel of its own, the conso-
nant receives a helping-vowel. The most natural
vowel in such a case is 2, e. g. dual wipe darabati-
labda (for ز(ضوبت 50 A (eto istikbalun with the ar-
ticle Jt: الاستقبَال alistikbdlu, in syllables thus: a-lis-
tik-ba-lu. In certain cases original final vowels that
14 6. WASLA.
&
have been dropped ساسم before the connec-
tive Alif, e. g. هم الْكَافِرونَ hu-mul-ka-fi-rii-na. The»
first word is otherwise uniformly هم hum (§ 124). ع
The Nunation (§ 30) is also treated as if it ended in
a consonant; the favourite vowel in this case is 7, ©. g.
8 9207
أسمة
dey pronounced as if written seat wd ragu-
lunismuhu, in syllables: ra-gu-lu-nis-mu-hu.
Note. Before a connective alif the preposition Be “away
from” becomes ws the preposition رمن “from” becomes wr but
before the article oe:
The same rule applies to a word ending in a so-
called diphthong (cf. § 2); the consonant (5 or زى
forming the second part of the diphthong must receive
a helping vowel before a connective Alif, which vowel
is uw or : according as the consonant in question is و
oF .ى Thus we have مصطفر الله mus-ta-fa-wul-la-hi
in place of الله jalan, sen رجي rig-la-yil-ba-ka-ra-
ti for nl AS): (So, too, with the termination sae
§ 22).
v= -
Norz. The particles 5! “or” and 5! “would that!” take i as
helping vowel.
The connective Alif is altogether omitted in the
following cases: .
7, MEDDA. 15
1) In the article Jt, when it receives as prefixes
_the particles J Zi or J la; e.g. Gad, lil-hak-ki for
on
eet IN, للوكد كل lal-mag-du for ma ¥,
7
2) In. أبن son, in apposition to the proper name
of the son oe followed in ue genitive by the name
of the father; e. g. مسلم بن الولية mus-li-mub-nul-
wa-h-di Muslim, the son of al-Walid. At the beginn-
ing of a line, however, even in this case we must write
ai
3) In the word mal ismun, name, after the prepo-
sition ب bi in the oft recurring formula x} يسم bis-
mil-ld-hi, in the name of God.
Medda. Inasmuch as the Arabic orthography
cannot tolerate two Alifs side by side, in such a case
only a single Alif is written, over which is placed a
ae Medda or Medd (a sign derived from x). At
the beginning of a word or syllable the Medda carriés
with it the force of a Hamza; the vowel ston Fath is then
also ا & g. أكل 6-14-7101 for اكل 1 os kur-a-
nun for otis : ه pl ”6]-1720-110 for ool since the -
Hamza of the me Alif disappears as explained
§ 38a.
16 ١ 8, THE SYLLABLE.
Norte. aj ra’a@ may be taken as an example of the rule just:
given. With suffixes it ought to appear, according to § 2d, as
0 which, however, is written 07 in syllables ra-’a-hit.
Since a ~ after a long @ دا is written on the line
(§ 4c) without receiving an Alif as bearer, the أ pre-
ceding the Hamza in such cases likewise receives
Medda, as a rule, although the latter has no effect on
ike سين of the word, e. .ع sla yaa (for
iS), Ide L485 ta-fa-a-lii; and the eas WETS Or ى
appears as the bearer of Hamza 3 tel a- ue ba-u-
hu, jG ka~i-lun.
Nore. Arabic orthography has also an objection to two Waws
appearing side by side, if the first has a Damma (even though
the inst Pa be only the bearer of a RES as expained in § 4c).
6 ts
Thus ووس rwuésun is often written .روس
The Syllable. An open syllable ends in a vowel
short or long; a shut syllable ends in a consonant.
Every syllable begins with a single consonant, not
with two or more (cf. § 6). A short syllable consists
of a consonant with a short vowel, as in the second
syllable of مات ma-té (with two open syllables); a
long syllable consists either 1) of a consonant with a
long vowel, like the open syllable 72 in the above
example, or 2) of a consonant, a short vowel and acon-
sonant (shut syllable) e. g. both the syllables of
9. THE TONE, 17
Ais hat-lun (so too موت mau-tun § 2a) Ne Sar-ran,
or 3) of a shut syllable with a long vowel. This last
variety, however, is only found (exclusive of pausal
effects § 10) when the following consonant has been
doubled (§ 5) and is preceded by a long 4, as in B15
dab-ba-tun (rarely after ai as in xa350 du-waib-ba-tun
which is derived according to § 66 from dabbatun).
Such a syllable may be described as doubly long.
Other syllables of this sort are shortened as jee yakul
as a Oye
from يقول yakul; رمت ramat from رمات rama.
Nore. A word consisting of but one short syllable, if it stands
alone, either receives an addition at the end (see 5 49ab), or is
joined to the following word. The latter method is adopted in a
series of particles (see § 94), which notwithstanding the connec-
tion are still regarded as more or less independent words. The
principal stress, however, rests on the words with which the par-
ticles are connected.
The Accent or Tone. The accent in Arabicis thrown
backwards towards the beginning of the word till it
meets a long syllable, or if there is no such syllable,
till it reaches the first syllable of the word. A simple
long syllable at the end of a word, however, does not
receive the accent. Examples of words with a final
short syllable: Gyles إستشكر ل isténkara; with
a final long syllable: besees tamdmtumé, 535 fardun,
be mdmlakatun, lope darabi, pos lidatun.
Socin, Arabie Grammar.” 2
1
18 10. PAUSE. 11. NUMERICAL SIGNS, ABBREVIATIONS,
Exceptions: A syllable with a connective Alif (§ 6),
as in Just (see § 6a), cannot receive the accent; the
pronunciation is therefore ust. In the same way
monosyllabic inseparable particles, like 5 and ف (cf.
§ 94), prefixed to words, do not affect the accentuation
of the latter; e. g. eid famasa.
In pause final short vowels are dropped. Also
the Nunation un and in; the Nunation an is changed
to 2, the feminine termination x to ته (with theh
sounded): thus sox naziliin for تاريخ ndzilina;
JSS ragul for Cy ragulun; sy marhaba for مرحمًا
marhaban; قاطية Fatimah for قاطية
Numerical Signs and Abbreviations. The usual Arabic °
cyphers are the following:
oy وأ Py Py 8, رلا وك وه Ay 4
0, 1, 2, 8, 4 و5 6, 7, 8, 9.
The tens, hundreds &c., are written to the left of
the units &c. as $4 19, fade 1895.
The following are a few of the most frequently
oachinning abbreviations:
ao = عليه ه آلسَلام -عم ‘alaihi- ssulammleacebeupanhim|
صلعم = ws الله عليه de salla-Udahu ‘alaihi
wasailama God bless him and give him peace (said of
Mohammed).
10.
11.
12, THE PRONOUN. 19
11. ETYMOLOGY (§§ 12—96).
Chapter I. The Pronoun. (§§ 12—15.)
The personal pronouns are either independent or 12
suffixed. The independent or separate personal pro- 9
nouns have the following forms:
Sing. Plur. Dual
I. Pers 5 تكن
f : أت 1 | ce } 3
rae ee ا
| fem. انتن أن |
( 4 وو 5 7 }
III. Pers oe (هم) ع 0 Us
| fem. Ss 3
Nore 1. The second syllable of the pronoun of the first pers.
singular, although written with J, is short. — The forms in pa-
rentheses (2"4 and 8324 pers. plural) are used particularly before
Wasla (§ 6d); these final vowels are originally long.
Nore 2. When joined to 5 and 3 (see § 95) the pronouns of
ام
.4 ,923 .ع the 358 pers, sing. may lose their first vowel e.
The suffixed personal pronouns, which joined to a 6.
noun indicate the genitive, joined to a verb, the ac-
cusative, are the following:
Q*
20 12, THE PRONOUN.
Sing. Plur. Dual
1 Pars, { with nouns Coon م
1 with verbs فى
526 = للك s— ;
I. ra) A
ers. | em. = ae us
( on
masc. s— هم
III. Pers. | - هبًا | و
fem. ها 0522
1 we |
6 Before a connective Alif (§ 6 2( the suffix pron. of
the 1. pers. singular may receive as helping-vowel the
a which belonged to it originally; thus we may write
or GUT clbsi. After 2, 7 and أَعْطَانِى ألكِنَاتَ
ai the nominal suffix of the 1. pers. sing. has the form
6 ya. Occasionally (in the Kur’an particularly) the
suffix of the 1. pers. sing. is indicated by a simple /,
of which the sign is Kesr _, as 5 my lord! In
the same way the corresponding verbal suffix may
be only ن ni.
d. After an immediately preceding 2 or ai the suffixes |
s, Gs, هن هعم substitute the vowel 2 for u, thus.
assuming the forms رة Ls, aes cps ©. .م alle instead ©
of .ماله Before the connective Alif ae generally 1
becomes rey — The suffixes a and a resume
13, THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 21
their original forms as and لهم before a connective
Alif.
For further information regarding the affixing of
these pronominal forms see § 82 and the table of
paradigms No. XXIII.
The reflexive pronoun, when carrying a certain e.
amount of emphasis with it, is generally expressed
by the word igus eran soul, to which the proper
suffixes are appended. In many cases, however, the
personal pronoun suffices to express the reflexive.
The demonstrative pronouns are the following (with 13.
their inflexion compare § 76a).
The simple pronoun (rare) a.
Masc. Fem.
Sing. ذا 6d, :ذه ie 3G
Nom. é j
Dual | 5 ytd ys
| Gen. acts p29 تين
2 ae
Plur. Jy! (tia) or اولاء (ala?)
bev cs t :
This simple pronoun combines: 3
(1) with the demonstrative particle ls, generally
3-0 ا
2b). The 5 ه or less correctly هه) written defectively
result is the usual demonstrative pronoun to indicate
that which is near at hand (this, these):
22 13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS,
Masc. Fem.
aol 001 re
Sing. (عذى) هذه هذا
i ا -|
Dual i gion i
Gen, Acc. Rae هتين
awed, |
Plur. صولاء
The simple demonstrative combines (2) with a
suffix of the second person. Only in the older Arabic,
particularly that of the Kur’an, however, does the
suffix vary according to the mane of persons ad-
dressed (e. g. plur. as, dual GIS), elsewhere it
appears uniformly as J. There is also a form with
J before J. The result is two forms of the demon-
strative pronoun to indicate that which is more remote
(that, those):
Mase. Fem.
~ =. lt pe) ae as - 5 5
Sing. MHS, (ذلك ,ذالك) ذلك IL, (das) تلك
00 | Nom. st, JIS 3, BG
\ Gen. Acc. 438, Seen قَيِنِكَ SiS
Plur. ISN, (JY,N, rarely أولايك
Among the demonstratives we must also place the
article J {(see § 5p). When the noun, inthecircumstances
14, THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 23
detailed in § 6/1, begins with a J, this letter has a
Tesdid placed over it and the J of the article is drop-
ped. Thus we get raven) for ZL; so too للع for
Paty) (§ 5 note).
The relative pronouns are the following: 14.
sol who, which, that,— originally a compound «.
م with the article as one of its elements
(hence the connective Alif)—declined as follows:
Masc. Fem.
Sing. dil oil
f -Ge a 2
eee gs اللاي get
Gen, Acc. اللتيني اللذين
Plur. الذين ot, اللواقى
(indeclinable) one who, such (a one) as, he 8. من
who, those who.
Le (indeclinable) that which, something which.
Among the relative pronouns may also be included ©
ee fem. xf he who,she who. This word is declinable
in the sing., but the masc. often takes the place of
the fem. It also combines with the prons. in b above
to form ial every one who, whosoever; and ust
whatsoever.
24 15. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 16.17. THE VERB.
The interrogative pronouns are:
cye who?
Le what? Frequently strengthened by the addition
of the demonstrative {3: {@ ما what then?
ع 5
St Sst 5
j, fem. x3) what sort of? which?
o
Nore. Us after prepositions is shortened to م e. g. لم why?
With this interrogative Ue is also connected the interrogative
particle ir how much?
Chapter II. The Verb. (§§ 16—54.)
The great majority of Arabic verbs have three
radical letters; only a small minority have four radi-
cals. The ground-form of verbs, according to which
they are arranged in grammar and dictionary, is the
third person singular of the perfect. The verb sss
(to do) is used as a model paradigm.
Norse. Since all Arabic dictionaries give the verbal and no-
minal derivatives under their respective root-forms, it is necessary,
in order to find the three radicals with ease, to note carefully what
consonants are employed in the formation of verbs and nouns as
prefixes and affixes to, and as infixes in, the stem.
From this ground-form or root, which is named
by grammarians the first stem, other stems are deri-
ved by a series of uniform changes, represented by
15.
16.
17.
18. THE FIRST STEM, 25
modifications of the verb Ass, but usually referred
to by their respective numbers in the series. Thus
we speak of “the eighth stem”, (indicated in the dic-
tionary simply by VIII) not as in Hebrew and Syriac
of the Piel, the Afel &c. The following stems, the
order of which must be carefully noted, are those
most frequently met with:
“Le Lot ee
I das IV est VIL انفعل X استفعل
T ies Vv fas” ov fest xt Sas
.111 كَاعَل wi felis ames)
Note a. Of these No. IX and especially AS XI are of less
crequent ل un more rare are XII ey, XIII J,
XIV Juss, XV wal. Which of these derived stems are formed
from any given verb, snd to what extent the meaning of the ground-
form is modified by them, will be found in the dictionary under
each verb.
Nore 5. In many cases the verb is used to express the idea
that some one wishes to do something or has something done;
thus alas “he killed him” may also signify “he wished to kill him”,
IVF wee
and ضرب عنقة “he cut off his head (prop. neck)” may mean “he
had (curavit) his head cut off.”
The ground-form I, in the majority of verbs, takes 18.
the form ches, e. g. as to kill; there is also—mostly
with intransitive verbs—a form ds (cf. 139), ©. ©
حزن to be sad, hye to do (transitive), and also a
26 19, 20. tae 11. anp 111.
form ches (cf. jp), confined to intransitive verbs, as
. حسن to be beautiful. Sometimes both the transitive
and intransitive forms, ACE and hes or ed, are
found side by side in the same verb. One and the
same verb, again, may have both the forms ee and
Toe
hes.
19. The 11. stem (Aas (corresponding to the Hebrew
Pi*él) usually denotes a greater intensity of the action
expressed by the simple verb. This intensification
may affect the subject, object or qualifying adjunct,
as das to kill many people, to massacre (intensi-
fication of the object). In the majority of verbs,
‘however, the II. stem is causative as pas to know,
whe cause to know, to teach. It is also declarative—
as in Gds to lie, SSF to take one 0 declare one
to be, a liar—and denominative, as in yeas to collect
an army (nae).
20. The 111. stem (els expresses an attempt or effort
to perform the action of the simple verb on some per-
son, to influence some person or thing. Thus das to
kill, but (SL to try to Kill, to fight with; Casto
write, os to correspond with (with accusative of.
21, 22, 5د IV. anp V. 11 27
the person corresponded with). This stem also means
to exercise some abstract quality on a person or thing,
e.g. ay to be soft, gentle, aay to exercise gentleness
on some one, to treat one kindly.
The IV. stem Sasi (the Hebrew Hiphil) ققط
causative signification, as م Le to be in good condi-
tion, 2 re to bring into good condition. Very
frequently we find, with this stem, denominative verbs
which appear to us as intransitive, but to the Arab
as possessing an implicit transitive force, and which
express the idea of action in a certain definite direction,
2 5
as أحسن to do good. Frequently, too, verbs of this
stem convey the idea of going to a place, of entering
upon a certain period or condition; e. g. Sse! to go
--¢9 ka 0
towards the West, أصييم to enter upon the period of
ve
-“-
the morning, to be something in the morning, Syl
to reach the top, to be high; <a (from ols rise up,
stand) to halt, to stay.
The V. stem eas (Hebrew Hithpa‘‘l), a sort of22.
middle voice is formed from the II. stem and has both a
reflexive and a recipr ocal meaning, e. g. ps to make
one’s self great, kas to let one’s self be taught, to
learn. Sometimes a verb in the V. stem conveys the
28 23, 24,25. THE VI., VII. anp VIII. stems.
Egle
idea of giving one’s self out as something, e. g. Las
to give one’s self out for, to conduct one’s self as, a
prophet.
23. The VI. stem ,تَفاعلَ derived from the III. stem, is
the reflexive form of the latter, and has a reflexive or
reciprocal signification, as ple to show one’s self bold;
كَقَاتَلّ to fight one another (usually in the plural).
Another signification is seen, for example, in Sls, VI
form of علا to be high, which means to exalt one’s
self and then simply: to be exalted.
24. The VII. stem eer (the Hebrew Niph‘al with
the connective Alif acc. to § 6a), derived in most cases
from the I. stem, is a middle or reflexive form of the
latter. Its signification may also be described as
quasi-passive, ©. g. pos to break GI, to break or
be broken in pieces.
25. The VIII. stem asl, (with connective Alif § 6a)
is likewise a middle and reflexive form, for the most
part of the I. stem, as used, to oppose one’s self,
object to; sometimes also with reciprocal signification
as mak, to dispute, contend with each other.
Nore. In the case of verbs whose first/radical is ط رض رص
or رظ the & of the VIIL. stem is changed to the emphatic رط and
26,27. مهد IX. anp X. stems, 29
is even assimilated to the first radical, when that letter is a dental
instead of ete! from ee; (pie or pes for Aer a ةك
اثبت .ع e. رث also to a preceding 6 لتضاوقة is sometimes زظلم
2
or اتبت from On properly ees; after ,د 3 and 5 j} ois changed
into the soft رك e. .ع 3133! for sy from درك روات for ,ادترك
The IX. stem ast (as also the XI. stem Sbast, 26.
both with connective Alif) is used of verbs which
denote the possession of inherent qualities such as
colours or bodily defects, e. .ع from the stem
peel to be or become yellow; from the stem أغور: :عور
to be one-eyed; from the stem إحمار : : حمر to be red.
The X. stem heme; (with connective Alif) is27.
- عه
primarily_a reflexive of the IV. أفعل (otherwise a
reflexive, formed on the analogy of the VIII. stem, from
astem سَفْعَلَ with a prefixed s), as from the stem Uses
IV. po! to grieve: X. he yaa! to grieve (one’s
self). Wery frequently the X. stem denotes also to
wish or to beg something for one’s self, e. g. from jal
to pardon, X.: : استغفر to ask for pardon; or to think
that مر is SO, as Ey to be necessary, IV:
oh) to make necessary, X: العتو يجي to consider
something as necessary for one’s self.
30 28. THE QUADRILIT. STEMS. 29, THE PASSIVE, 30, THE TENSES.
28. The guadriliteral stems are denoted, for the verbal
and nominal forms, by the paradigm Mss (that is
by the addition of a fourth radical to a5), and con-
sist for the most part of two stems, of which the first
may be said to correspond to the second stem of the
triliteral verb (for ae is in reality hess), and the
second Axas to the fifth, e. ع kas to overturn,
cast down, as fall down.
er) Bee
Norse. The stems III (x3! and IV (jlxdl (the last corre-
7 = لايع
sponding to the IX. stem of the triliterals) are rare ©. .ع publ, to
be quiet, from a stem yb.
_ 29, In addition to the active, the Arabic verb has a
"passive voice. This passive is formed in the perfect
in such a way that in place of the a-vowels of the
active we have the order u-i-a (¢ with the second, a
with the third radical); thus the act. of stem I. is
كعَل the pass: dus. The additional formative syllables
of the derived stems also receive the vowel uw, ©. بع
pass. V. fads, 211 nisl (with connective Alif).
30. The Arabic verb has two principal tenses, a perfect
4. which, generally speaking, denotes a completed action,
and an imperfect which in general denotes an uncom-
pleted action.
31. THE Moops. 31
The imperfect is formed by adding the prefix 3 ya |b.
for the active of the L, V., VI., VIL, VIL, IX. and
X. stems, and the prefix 3 yu for the active of the
II., III. und IV. stems, and for the passive of all the
stems without exception.
In the case of verbs of which (Axi is the type, the به
second radical, in the impf. act. of stem I., may receive
one or other of the vowels wu, i, a. Which of the three
must be used for a particular verb will be found
indicated in the dictionary under that verb (e. .ع as
impf. wu) and should be taken careful note of. Those
verbs, on the other hand, of which Ate (with i-vowel)
is the type, together with all passives point their second
radical with a only, thus impf. act. I. hence pass. Hes
Those verbs, finally, of which ches (with u-vowel) is the
type, take u with the second radical for the imperfect.
As regards the active imperfect of the derived stems,
the second radical takes i throughout, with the excep-
tion of stems V. and VI. where it takes a; thus impf.
B---
Il. indy but V. dedi.
In the imperfect various Moods are distinguished, 31.
namely the ordinary mood which we call the indicative,
the dependent mood or subjunctive, and a modus apo-
copatus (sometimes called the jussive). These are
32 32. THE IMPERATIVE.
distinguished as follows: in the indicative the last
radical, when final, always takes u, as impf. I ais,
UI. :يفاعلٌ in the subjunctive always a, as bets,
while in the apocopatus the third radical is vowelless.
In addition to the above there is a double modus
energicus, which is formed by appending the syllables
anna or an (in some forms only n) to the impf. as
عد مخ 5
.يفعلن or يفعاين
Notz. As the modus energicus is of comparatively rare
occurrence, it is given in the tables of paradigms only in the case
of the ordinary strong verb. From the examples there given it
may easily be formed for the other verbs.
32. The imperative agrees with the apocopated imper-
fect as regards vocalisation and termination, except
that the prefixes ya or yu are wanting. In the imper.
of the I. stem a helping vowel (therefore with connec-
tive Alif § 6a) is prefixed in all cases where the first
consonant is without a vowel of its own. This vowel
disappears, however, in pronunciation as soon as the
word ceases to stand alone, ©. .ع Att but أخرج JU.
The same applies to stems VII.—X. The imperative
has the same energetic bye-forms as the imperfect.
Note, In the imper. of stem I the prosthetic vowel is u when
the second radical has u, as 53, but 7 when it is pointed with
eo 0
a or i, as J, .اذبن
33. NUMBER, PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. 33
Nore b. In the imper. of the IV. stem the prosthetic j, which
is characteristic of the stem, is retained, although it disappears
after the prefixed 2 of the impf. Hence impf. sue (for jt),
but imper. Jal.
In the perfect, imperfect and imperative, there 33.
are, in addition to the singular and plural, dual forms
for the second and third persons. Verbs are inflected
by the addition of modified and abbreviated forms
of the personal pronouns, and of the dual and plural
terminations of nouns, to the ground-forms dea and
ners (for the terminations dni and dana of the impf.
indic. vid. § 76a). The terminations just named, along
with the ending ina of the 2. pers. fem. sing.,
drop the syllables xi and ma in the subjunctive, the
apocopated imperfect and theimperative. The, which
appears in the paradigm after the final كو in the
perf. and in these shortened forms of the impf. and
imper., has no phonetic value (cf. § 2e).
As to the prefixes of the impf., it is to be noted
that in place of the prefix 3 of the 3. pers. masc., we
have 3 as the prefix of the 2. pers. sing. and plur.,
and of the 3 pers. fem. of the sing., | to indicate the
1. pers. sing., and 3 the 1. pers. plur.
The affixes employed in the inflexion of the verb are given
in paradigm I.
Socin, Arabic Grammar?. 3
34 34, VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE.
Norsz a. In the V. and VI. forms of verbs whose first letter
is a dental or a sibilant, the formative prefix occasionally drops
its vowel and is assimilated to the first radical of the verb, in
which case the perf. and imper. have a helping vowel (§ 6) prefixed
Oo بر
e. g. pel wrap one’s self up, impf. yo.
Note b. In the impf. of these two stems, the prefix 3 may
be treated in such a way that instead of the two syllables 52
eae. sae 22
only 3 remains, e. g. from قثل 2. pers. msc. impf. V. تقتل for Jaan.
Nore c. In the impf. VII. and VIII. stems the tone remains
on the same syllable on which it falls in the perf., contrary to
دس بعر v= و
yankdtilu, yaktdtilu. ينقتل the rule laid down in 5 9; thus i),
For the conjugation of the strong verb with three radicals
see paradigms II, III and V, for that of the quadriliteral verbs
see paradigm IV. In the paradigms the participles and infinitives
are also given, although the discussion of these forms has been
deferred to §§ 60 and 61.
Among the ordinary strong verbs must also be
reckoned the so-called verbs mediae geminatae, i. e.
verbs whose second and third radicals are identical.
A contraction of these last two radicals takes
place in all those cases in which
1) the first, second and third radicals have each
a short vowel; in this case the vowel of the second
radical is always dropped, e. g. 3 (to flee) contracted
from >» (which statement is not to be understood
as implying that a form ye once الم existed in
مم 3. p. 00 pass. I. فر from , yi 3. .م impf.
VIL. pase from ينقرر
BA,
35, 36, VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE, 35
2) When the first two radicals have each a short, d.
and the third a long, vowel, e. g. 3. .م dual mase.
perf. فر from eee
3) Generally also when the first radical has a long بع
3, 6. .ع 3.8.m. perf. of the 111. stem قار contracted from
yk (which is also found), passive ye
When the first radical is vowelless and the second 35.
has a short vowel, then contraction takes place and
the vowel of the second a passes over to the
first. Thus 3. pers. impf. act. 78 for :يفرر 1 Pe ye
9-99
from pte:
When the third radical is vowelless, there is no 36.
contraction in the pets of the word: e.g. 2. pers. sing.
masc. perf. act. :قورت 3. pers. plur. fem. impf. act.
a But when the third radical stands at the end
03
بغرن
of a verbal form with no vowel following, as in various
forms of the apocopated impf. and the 2. pers. sing.
masc. of the imper., we find the full forms yy أغرر
only in the dialects. As a rule contraction takes place
and an additional vowel is assumed at the end in
order to preserve the doubling of the radical; thus
we have ye 5 from 3 imper. dy.
3
36 37. HAMZATE VERBS.
Ie
Nore. In the case of verbs of the forms pe and Je the
vowel of the second radical مره only in the uncontracted form
€. Je to loathe, 1. pers. perf. Sala hence the vowel @ of the
impf. Nee
For the conjugation of verbs mediae geminatae see paradigms
Nos. VI—VIII; model verb 53 to flee.
Those verbs that have a Hamza = as first, second
or third radical are for the aac part regular, as <r to
make an impression, impf. pes is to read, impf. [es
In certain cases we find, according to § 42, ى 07 و
(without points) as bearers of the Hamza, or ع may
stand سنب a bearer, thus 3. 8. m. perf. act. er
to be Seley nae to be brave; 3. s. m. impf. passive of
Zh تر pose 3. sing. masc. perf. act. jars to err, fem.
cab’ ; 3. .ع m. impf. act. of a to ask: pines Oc-
casionally an 1 takes the place of bro Alifs, accor jeding
يلاه e. بع 3. s, m. perf. III. el SH for Ni VI.
of al (bind up a wound &c.) م pais
While in all these cases the - may easily be distin-
guished as the third radical of the verb, there are a
few forms in which the verba hamzata are more diff-
cult to distinguish, inasmuch as the . sometimes
entirely disappears; from this point of view these
verbs ought rather to be reckoned among the weak
37.
38.
38, HAMZATE VERBS. 37
verbs (§ 39 ff.). The most important of such cases
are the following:
ed -?
1) After |, أ | (also after a connective Alif |, {, | >
at the beginning of a sentence) # gives up its power
as a consonant (cf. § 7); hence, in place OF برا wie
simply <2, ’u, 7, e. .ع 3. 8. m. perf. IV. of [1 د for
--E لسر
ra 3. s. m. perf. pass. IV, ae aay is 3 in 0 of
RA So also imper. I. pial for yet.
2) In the amines. of the I. form the verbs nea 4
take, ja eat, Fal order, drop the + altogether: ee
JS مر 3 in the samme way from gl to ask, the impera-
tive is either سال or nen 2
Should 3 or 3 come to stand as inseparable particles .ولط
before one of the imperatives under a, the prosthetic Alif )87 §(
is dropped and the radical Hamza reappears, receiving, as its
oe
bearer, an Alif on account of the preceding Fath, as in pu. The
Fe و
same holds good in the case of two separate words: thus اوتمن
3. 5. m, aor pass. VIII of ol connected with a preceding word
becomes ردق eli elladi-tumina.
3) In the VI. form the ~ of verbs primae = is ¢
sometimes changed to 9 as poly in place of pu
(for pal.
4) In the VIII. form the - of the verb eS] is d
38 39. THE WEAK VERBS. 40. VERBS PRIMAE 9 AND \s-
assimilated to the following 3, the result being 3 as
iat as of an original JBI, impf. Bese but
from مر al, to order, pal.
For the conjugation of the verba hamzata see paradigm IX,
The Weak Verbs.
The weak verbal stems are those having وه or
@ ى as first, second or third radical; under inflection
these semivowels in some cases resolve themselves into
full vowels, in others they are treated as consonants.
The Verbs primae و and ى differ from the strong
verbs in the following points:
1) In the impf. and imper. of the I stem a number
of verbs primae و surrender their first radical and
take the vowel 2 with their second (cf. 5s), as ou}
to bring forth, impf. ods, imper. .لل
2) Under the influence of a guttural a few verbs
take a in place of i with their second radical, drop-
ping a » لت like the others, as وضع to lay,
impf. «a3; 0 وفع to fall, وهب to give and others
(see the dictionaries).
3) In verbs primae (6, 3 شد is changed to 7, e. g.
the mp IV of bs to be awake, properly care be-
comes 3,2.
39.
40.
41, 42, VERBS MEDIAE و AND «ى 39
4) In the VIII. stem the first radical of verbs d.
primae و and ى is assimilated to the following رت
6. g. from Ae, to promise, ast for 255! (cf. § 38d).
Notr. A few verbs of the form Je rags give up the first
radical in the imperf. as وَرِثَ to inherit, impf. by (cf. § 18).
For the conjugation of the verbs primae و and ى see para-
digm X where will be found the principal forms of the verbs
J to arrive, ودع to leave, ey to be dirty, وجل to be anxious,
ons to be sleepy, ~~ to bé easy.
Verbs mediae 0 and .ى In the IL, Ill., V., VI. 41.
and IX. stems, 0 and is are treated as consonants,
and the inflexion is the same as that of the strong
verb; thus 3. s. .مد perf. II of Jl& (to say) med. 5
كول 3. s. m. perf. III of سَاو (to travel) med. ذى yale.
In the other stems these verbs are inflected according
to the following rules:
Long 2 takes the place of the middle radical: 42.
in the perf. active of the I., IV., VII., 1111. and a.
ed Ap ا ير 1-2 4120-9
X. stems, as Jl, JI, ,إنقال Jas}, :إستقال
in the impf. passive of the same stems, as JLi3, SLE, b.
Ga, :يستقال ,«يققال
in the impf. active of VII. and 1111.5 des, JES; 3
in the impf. active of the I. stem of verbs of the d.
form hes e. كاف .ع to fear, impf. GIS.
40 43, 44. VERBS MEDIAE و AND (5.
Long 7 takes the place of the middle radical:
in the perf. passive of the I., IV., VIL, VIII. and
X. stems as dads, Sua, jassh, ,فقيل paren:
in the impf. active of IV. und X., as Aves eae
in the impf. active of verbs med. وى as .سير
The corresponding form of verbs med. ,, on the other
hand, takes long w, as .فقول
Nore. The nature of the phonetic changes just detailed will
be more readily understood from the standpoint of the strong
- 8 - - - = - من
pass —2 يو 4——3 ,—» ,4 رساو verb if it be noted that
ee 0 م د -
into 7; g—— into 40. It is not 0 ار — لو وه into
meant by this that the corresponding strong forms were ever
really found, in these verbs, at any period of the language.
The whole of the long vowels mentioned in
§§ 42—43 are shortened (§ 8) in a shut syllable, e. g.:
2. s,m. perf. act. IV. of JS and :ساو vel, and
=e
oe
3. sing. masc. apoc. impf. pass. I يقل ~ (with
the tone on the last syllable as if contravening § 9).
2. pers. masc. sing. imper. I. of Gl& (§ 424):
BS (but plur. (حافوا
2. pers. masc. sing. perf. pass. اقلت
3. pers. sing. masc. apoc. impf. act. IV. ches
وه
2. pers. sing. masc. imper. I: .قل سر
43.
44.
45, 46. VERBS ULTIMAE او AND gs. 41
In the perf. active of I, verbs med. و take % where
وه
we should expect ,ك (cf. mp) as Gls, while verbs
med, ى take 7, as Sys} 7 is also found in verbs of
the form رقعل as هفت from GK (for a theoretical
Gy).
Note a. Instead of the apocop. impf. oes &e. from PAF to be,
we sometimes find the still shorter form .بيك
Nore b. From a few verbs med. و and ى strong forms
are found in stems I, IV., VIII., X.; e. g. IV. aoe compel; X.
إستصوب to find correct, a denominative form from صَوَابٌ correct.
For the conjugation” of these verbs see paradigms XI—XIV.
Verbs ultimae و and ىح Verbs ultimae و pass into 45.
ultimae ى in all the derived stems, and in the perf.
and impf. passive of the 1 stem; thus from غزو we
have 3 s. m. perf. I] spe The same applies to the
active of stem I of the form Axes; thus رضو becomes
is) (to have pleasure in).
If the second radical has ,كه this vowel is changed 46.
in every case into along finald@. In order to distinguish “
the stems ult. .¢ from those ult. 3 this final @ is in the
former case indicated by رى in the latter by | (this
applies only to the 3. s. m. perf. act. I). Thus وى to
throw, Iie carry ona war; but II. a sre &c. Similarly
42 46. VERBS ULTIMAE 9 AND qs.
in the imperfects (cf. § 45), e. g.-indic. and subj. pass. II
52 (in place of a theoretical wy and eye) impf.
see
act. I of :يرضى «رضى impf. act. V. ope
Note. With the same reservation as under 5 436 note, we
would call attention to the fact that the combinations »—, is—,
x - ام
w— all pass into long a. ريسو
In all the cases mentioned in the preceding sub-
section, a diphthong (§ 2) appears before the in-
flectional additions that begin with a consonant. Thus:
2. sing. mase. perf. act. I زوميت from Ie: Sy 58 II
ALM); غزيت &c.
In the case also of the inflectional additions z,
tina, ina (and its shortened form 2), the a of the second
radical, (after the elision of the third radical) unites
with their initial vowel to form a diphthong. Thus:
3. pers. masc. plur. perf. act. I. yy» N52 do. impf.
pass. II. و يرمون subj. Neyo; do. act. I. Grey ¥,
ett 2. pers. fem. sing. of the last erect subj.
se
Before the dual terminations @ and dni the last
radical of this class of verbs is treated as a strong
---
letter, e. بع 3. pers. perf. act. I. Lay, Ie; impf. pass.
Il. يرميان &c. By the addition of the termination at,
47.
4
47. VERBS ULTIMAE 9 AND yg. 43
the 3. pers. fem. sing. of the perfect must originally
have ended in 24: this ending, however, has now become
at in accordance with § 8, as ero; Gee. According
to the analogy of the above is also formed the 3. pers.
fem. of the dual; thus we find Lie), Gye (where we
should expect Lsle), tye),
In the impf. active of stem I, verbs ult. و of the
form ikes take an u, those ult. ى an i, the third
radical quiescing in these vowels. The ending u of the
imperf. is lost, 6. g. spt eons The imperfects active
of the derived forms (with the exception of V and VI)
are formed on the model of the last mentioned forms,
11 we? wd d
as دف and so on.
sty? يعزى 0
Note. With the same reservation as under 5 436 note, it
as و
may be pointed out that عسو passes into 46, Ce into 7.
Affixes beginning with a consonant are appended
in every case to the? or the 1 just mentioned, as 3. pers.
fem. plur. impf. I. Srey ا :يغزون in the
perf, e. .ع 2. sing. 10350. perf. pass. rAd} do. from
he
ded I. رضيت : from فعل I .سروت
If the second radical has / or u, the third radical ©
is dropped and the terminations 10, una, ina added to
the second, 6. .ع 3. plur. masc. perf. pass. رمو (not
44 48. VERBS ULTIMAE 9 AND os. 49, DOUBLY WEAK VENRES.
Ory يمون plur. masc. impf. act. .3 :غزوأ «(رصيوأ
(not (يَغْرْوونَ يرميون 2. pers. fem. sing. impf.
Before the dual endings @ and dni, as also before
the terminations a of the 3. sing. masc. perf., at of
the 3. sing. fem. perf., até of the 3. fem. dual perf,
and a of the subjunctive, the third radical is treated
as astrong letter, if the second hasi or vu. Exx: 3. pers.
masc. perf. act. Sep ori do. pass. es wei 3. pers.
fem. perf. Aes)» سروت : 3. pers. 2356. dual us);
fem. Lindy : 3. pers. subj. act. I ety) :يعزو 3. pers.
me Be
dual impf. ميان lyst:
cogs
In the apocopated impf. and in the imper. every
final 2, 7 and # is shortened, as 3. pers. sing. masc.
of 90 3 2و
0 51 2 0ه .
apoc. impf. :يغز ريرم ,برض 2. imper. Loy); آرم yet
For the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XV—XIX
where various forms are given of the verbs he to carry on war,
ns to throw, رض to be content, to carry out, accomplish.
Of verbs doubly weak the following are the
principal varieties:
Verbs prime 3 and ultime وى as وَقَى 0 take care
of; impf. according to 55 40 and 47 «يقى apoc. be
48.
49.
50, THE VERB po 45
The imper. is properly er for which, السك when
the word stands eee, i. e. in pause, we write x3
The verb st; to see, which in the impf. alae 02
the Hamza, throwing back 2 vowel © to the first
radical. Thus ٠ يرى yard for she yard; 3. pers. pl.
روت imper. ) \ (ace. to a 3) fem. S): The IV. im
in ie a of ‘to oe is سه inflected: 5
for sil, impf. يرى for يرى perf. pass. Sy! for
es and so on.
The verb es to live, د ee impf. US (cf. >
§ 2d note) like a verb ult. 1S or = like a verb mediae
geminatae; perf. 17 cen, ae 2 el or إسككيًا
also contracted أسككى (be ee,
The verb لبس ‘there is not’ (compounded of the 50.
negative ¥ and an obsolete Arabic noun corresponding
to the Hebrew w) is inflected as follows:
Sing. Dual Plural
ليسا
om ليسكا ليست fem. .3
|
j 3 2 5 1
3ه داه 2
لستنى لست fem, .2
46 51. VERBS OF PRAISE AND BLAME. 32. ADMIRATIVES. 53, THE SUFFIXES.
The verbs of praise and blame, es to be good
and - to be bad, which are rarely conjugated, are
written as above.
The Arab grammarians adduce as special forms
the so-called admirative forms, that is, forms expressive
of admiration. These are strictly the 3. s. m. perf.
and 2. pers. imper. of the IV. stem, but have assumed
a special signification; so 135 jail lL properly ‘what
has made Zaid excellent’, on nee تقل prop. ‘make
Zaid excellent’ both mean: how excellent is Zaid! —
The verbs mediz 5 and ى may in these forms take
the inflection of the strong stems (§ 44 note 0) as
el BOE com ٠. .
ما اهو هذا how easy this is!
The addition of the pronominal suffixes (§ 110)
alters the form of the verb only to a slight extent.
The 2. pers. fem, sing. perf. with a suffix receives
a long final vowel as sitar.
The f, Standing after سو u (§ 2e), is dropped as
Sy lis from iis ven the suff. of the 3. pers. sing. mase.
The ending تم of the 2 > pers pl. perf. becomes َي
(cf. § 126, note 1), as كموق from ais with the
suff. of the 1. pers. sing.
Before the suffixes to the 1. pers. sing. and plur.,
52.
53.
a
4
0
d.
54, THE PRONOUN AS OBJECT. 47
the final na of the 2. fem. sing. and 3. ,ما and ذى
and 2. masc. plur. impf. is sometimes dropped (so that
these forms become identical with those at the sub-
junctive and apocopated cat Ex.: gitar di 3 alongside
of the more common تَفْرِبِيِئَئِى thou (fem.) strikest
me; yy alongside of the more common يَضْرِبْوكنَا
they strike us.
When the object of an active verb consists of a 54,
personal pronoun, and this object is, for the sake of %
emphasis, mace to precede the verb, then instead of
the ordinary suffixes appended to the verb the sign
of the accusative GI (ny, Mk) is employed with the
suffixes of me noun, (with the suff. of 1. pers. sing.
eb; e. g. jase JG! to thee we pray.
The Arabic verb may have two suffixes appended 2.
‘at the same time, in which case the pronoun of the
1. person precedes those of the 2. and 3. persons,
and the pronoun of the 2, person that of the third,
as paloet he gave it me; frequently, however, in
plnse of the second suffix—more particularly when both
pronouns are of the third person — we find the above
mentioned periphrasis with GI as lsGl 555 he married
him to her.
48 55, THE NOUN.
Chapter III. The Noun. (§§ 55—90).
a. The Formation of Nouns.
Nouns in the wider sense comprise 1) substantives,
2) adjectives, 3) numerals (§§ 91—93), and 4) pronouns
(§§ 12—14). The noun, in the narrower sense, is
limited to substantives and adjectives.
Primitive substantives is the name given to such
substantives as cannot be derived from a verb. Accord-
ing to the usual arrangement of Arabic dictionaries,
6h
itis true, the primitive noun vl» head (un affix) for
example, is found under the verb 68 but this verb
is in all its significations denominative. On the other
hand, it may fairly be maintained that a noun like
uly goes back to a hypothetical triliteral root, au سس
— In contrast to these primitive nouns, we find a
large number of nouns which are derived either from
verbs or from other nouns, that is, which are either
deverbals or denominatives. All the forms of the noun
are indicated by a from the root ss (cf.
§ 15 ff.) 5 thus we say of tie as of the deverbal in-
finitive Ate killing, that it has the form قل
Nore. The numerous foreign words which have found
their way into Arabic, adapted from Persian and Aramaic, and
indirectly from Greek and Latin, have also, to some extent, been
reduced to Arabic nominal forms.
» 55.
56, 57. THE FORMATION OF THE NOUN. 49
A number of nouns do not show the full ساك 56.
of (three) consonants (see §§ 16 and a as كم blood; i
with the feminine termination (§ 73): zal a slave-girl;
to this group belong also nouns with a prefixed vowel
(connective Alif) as eal name, which accordingly must
be sought for in the dictionary under س٠
Extremely common are the nominal forms with 6.
one short vowel, like Jas, em en e. g. bs, foot,
according to the form das There are also nominal
forms with two short vowels: Aas: dst, Kee jaa
ite jst. e. g. des a man, NF. Jas; كبر age
NE. Nene
Next in order we may put nominal forms with a ©.
long vowel either with the first radical dels or with
the second Js, JG, dee, Jy, does dk chang or
with both JAG
Nominal forms with doubling of the second radical 4.
are such as oaks chick-pea NF. here dla (§ 63a);
Jus.
Nore. By their mode of formation these nouns have been 4
raised to the rank of quadriliterals like those in §§ 57—58.
The preformatives employed in the formation of 57.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.? 4
5
50 58, FORMATION OF NOUNS. 59. QUADRILIT. NOUNS. 60. 2 .لآ 8:11012خ
nouns are the following (whose vowels vary according :
to a a) م ct. SS 60 and 64. b) 3 cf. § 61.
c) ينقور 5 م fugitive NF. Jas from 7s to flee. d) 1
(cf. 55 626: 63), ©. .ع ped story NF. أنغوتة from
the stem wars.
The afformatives or formative additions used in
the formation of nouns are: a) .¢— and ماع (see
§ 74). 5( ore (for substantives) or i قد (often to
form eedgoattres e. g. كفقان palpitation of the heart
as fret BRS | سكران drunk NF. ss from
2 c) وت ca originally Arabic) as cage
kingdom NF. pled, which takes the masc. gend.
in Arabic.
The ae nouns are denoted by the para-
digm jis AS) 28) as wer scorpion NF. ners نك وق
SoU)
box NF. 06 ery: military camp NF. (leas;
كتفساء a species of beetle NF. .تعللاء
From among the rich growth of nominal forms in
Arabic a few deverbals and denominatives may he
singled out for special attention. Such, of the former
class, are the participles and infinitives, whose forms
will be found among the paradigms of the verb.
58.
59.
60.
61. THE INFINITIVE, 51
The participles — the active is generally named a.
nomen agentis, the passive nomen patientis — take
the form dels for the active of the I stem, and for
the passive the form pai. In all the derived stems
the participle is formed by prefixing the syllable
in the ,ة in the active the second radical takes زم
passive a (see below). Asa rule, however, the active
and passive participles of the derived stems take the
vowels of the active and passive imperfs. with the
exception of stems V and VI.
In addition to the participles there is a class of b.
so-called verbal adjectives, which are in part treated
as participles; they might be called quasi-participles,
as ern beautiful, from .حسن
The Arabic participles do not in themselves convey ©.
any suggestion of time; hence dU, for example, may
mean ‘one who has killed’ as well as ‘one who is killing’,
Spite ‘one who ought to be killed’ i. e. interficiendus
as well as interfectus.
The Infinitive (nomen verbi) assumes various forms 61.
in the I stem, and is therefore specially noted in the “
dictionaries under each verb. One of the most common
forms is ,قعل as (iS killing. The infinitives of Asi
4¥
52 61. THE INFINITIVE.
verbs (§ 28), as a rule, take the form a5, e. 8. from
nad, er the being angry. Uys and مَعَال are
also common forms from intransitive verbs, as a
a sitting, from ادم خلس health, from prt
finitives are also found with the prefix ma, as is
or 006 (for the same verb has frequently more than
one form of the infinitive, sometimes with different
meanings) from شل to enter.
8
The infinitive of the II. stem has the form 6
or كد (cf. 5 5" ر(5 the inf.-of the III. stem the form
ee or ممَاعَلَةٌ (which last is identical with the fem.
of 5 passive participle). The infinitives of IV., VIL.,
VIIL, IX. and X. are formed by the insertion of a
long @ before the last radical; before this @ every
short @ of the perf. becomes i, as in the IV. stem Last.
The infinitives of V. and VI. take u after the second
we
radical, as V. Kens
The Arabic infinitives do not contain the idea of
time and may be used both in an active and in a
passive sense. Thus Ate denotes the circumstance
that some one has killed or has been killed, the idea
of killing or of being killed.
62, VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 53
Synopsis of participles and infinitives
Partcp. Act. Partcp. Pass. Infin.
8 Bi Shs
1 مفعول قاعل ef. § 6la
Soe Sg- Se له § 2
8 gf fees ts ks
S و Si. ey وشا صر -
111 فعال مفاعلة مفاعل مفاعل
Ss o> 9 و هر S oo
IV إفعال مفعل مفعل
5 وا على Sge-» S g--
71. تفاغل متقاعل متفاعل
Wi تتقعل del Heat
7111. مُفْتَعِلُ haces Sass
cc ws <= Jost
Quadr 1. Jaks = Minas Jules alles
Il. متفعلل
As regards Verbal Adjectives (cf. § 60c), the follow- 62.
ing forms may be specially noted:
The form desk, which occurs in both an active a.
: eee 8 :
and a passive sense; as huss killed, شهيل a witness,
54 63, THE INTENSIVE FORMS.
one who disputes with another (in the sense خصيم
of mols part. act. of III).
Sy AF (often an intensive form) given .68 ,فعول
to lying.
hea a form denoting oo and physical defects,
ig 281 yellow; eel lames jyat (with , as a strong
letter) one-eyed. ~For the formation of fie feminine,
see § 740.
Arabic has the means of expressing a heightened
or intensive form of the root idea. Of such intensive
forms the following are examples:
nies intensive form of del and other verbal
adjectives, as las (habitually) given to lying. As
a denominative this form is in frequent use to denote
mates or professions (nomina opificum) as : حباز baker
from % ees bread.
Very frequently there is derived from adjectives
the form al in the sense of an elative (generally
so named because including both comparative and
SS) هم عت 5 ae aA > - vt
ايساد as spon beautiful, elative: pounce | more b.
8 9-0 & :
most b.; : pate small, young, elative: peel smaller,
younger; smallest, youngest. The elatives, when stand-
ing in the predicate, do not admit of inflection for
63.
64. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI. 55
gender and number, as allt dst هم they are the
most excellent of men. When used in a comparative
sense, they are mostly undetermined (§ 76bc), and are
followed by the preposition من in the sense of our
“than” (properly ‘at a distance from’, ‘measured from’).
Used as superlatives, on the other hand, they are
generally determined. For the feminine formation
see § 740.
Norse. No special elative is formed from the words hes good
a
and شر bad, which are used as elatives in the form just given.
As a matter of fact, the positive of other لل as well must
sometimes be rendered by our superlative; thus oat eas signifies
the (absolutely) greatest of men.
To the class of deverbal nouns belong further: 64.
Nouns of place and time formed with the prefix a.
ma, as J 5Ke the place where one writes, the school; م
a buryingplace. مقبرة also with the fem. termination as
Note. Nouns of place and time from the derived stems take
oor , قاس
the form of the pass. participle, as. مرج (from the IV. stem of خري
to go out, of which IV. es caus.) the piste to which or the time
at which something is brought out; Use (from V. stem) the
place where the ritual washing is performed,
Nomina instrumenti, formed with the prefix » mi, ١
as ods milk-pail, from Gia to milk; ميفتاح key,
from ee to open.
56 65. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEL.
Nomina speciei of the form glass as kas the
manner of writing, one’s “calligraphy”.
To the class of denominatives belong especially
the nouns of relation and the diminutives.
By means of the termination = (corresponding
to the Hebrew __, fem. سام and بحص there is derived
from nouns a group of other nouns which, following
the example of the Arabic grammarians, we call nomina
(adjectiva) relativa, i. e. sp of وين Thus mA
belonging to the earth (Us) 1 earthly; old belonging
to “Li (i.e. Syria), a Syrian. The feminine termination
is oe when this ending is added, as aX (from
5K) an inhabitant of Mecca; occasionally we meet
with certain changes in the seach of a word, e. g.
ioe an inhabitant of Medina, from Reda Medina;
Ss
oy a Koreishite, one of the tribe te
By the addition of the feminine ending to nouns
of relation there are formed feminines, as ala a
Syrian woman, but more frequently abstract nouns; as
إلاهية divinity from aout divine, (from 33 God);
els heathenism ae ele hepthenigh, (from
dole ignorant).
66.
67.
66. NOM. RELATIVAET DEMINUTIVA. 67, NOUNS FROM STEMS MED.GEM, 57
Nore. It is usual to indicate ~ esas relativa also by
Ga 2
paradigms from J; thus we say that أرضى is a form ,على Eu é
a form ie.
from triliteral nouns take the form زر
dese. as howe a little slave, servulus, from das slave.
8 sor
From quadriliteral nouns is form is Gs, as عقيرب
a little scorpion, from wer (so صويحبٌ diminutive
from اجن companion). From quadriliteral nouns
with a long vowel between the third and fourth radi-
cals the corresponding form is ilies, as نيفين
diminutive from 1 صنت a box. Diminutives are not
unfrequently derived also from proper names, as
aT Que ‘ubaidullahi alongside of alli Ass ‘abdullahi
(Abdallah). ,
The formation of nouns from stems mediae gemi-
natae and from those with a hamza or the 561221-85
presents many irregularities, for a general idea of
which we must refer to the inflection of the corre-
sponding verbal stems. In addition to what is there
given the following particulars deserve attention.
For the formation of deverbal nouns from stems
mediae geminatae (see § 34 ff.) the following points
may be noted:
The second and third radicals are of course con- a
58 68, 69. NOUNS FROM STEMS WITH HAMZA AND PRIM. 9.
tracted when the second is without a vowel of its
So-
own, , as 53 from yy
If the first radical has a, and the second 4 or a,
contraction takes place in the participles and infini-
tives, e. g. part. act, VII of <3: <Zie contracted from
pass. also . yale from py. There i is 20 con- :منقرر
S
traction, however, with nouns of the form cer aS 30
inf. to be hairy.
سا سوه
8 0 to the سد د in § 358, from yy
we get مقر from ر :مفرر ye
d. a act. participle of I is Ne from ye cf. § 8.
6 Contraction does not a place when a long
vowel stands between the last two radicals e. .ع hy
ph yy
68. The orthographical rules which apply to the in-
flection of the verba hamzata (88 37 ff.) hold good
for the مده of nouns, ©. g. ee something asked
for; SN a question, from ic to ask; the part. act. I
of 1, to make an impression, is 531 for 3 spike NF.
nomen instrumenti مفعلة from <i) &e.
69. The primae و stems, which according to § 40 lose
“ their first adic in the impf., lose it also, as a rule,
70, NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. او AND ى 59
in the nomen verbi; as compensation the latter receives
the feminine termination (§ 73), as from oes to pro-
mise nomen verbi Song from ودع to allow: cae
w after the vowel 7 (سو) coalesces with the latter 6.
to form 7, as inf. 1V of م 5: fall: إِيقَاع for ahs ميلان
time of one’s birth NF. مفُعَال for مولان from Os.
eee passes into w# (§ 40c), e. .ع part. IV of bss 23
to be awake: bass for ee
In the infs. of the IV. and X. stems from stems 70.
med. و and ى the middle radical disappears; the “
feminine termination is added as compensation, e. g.
for SIL إكَالة
1 the act. part. of stem I the w of verbs med. :و
معنن y and 3 (yi) is changed into * (5); as Sa
for acne 1 ike for ple (for Medda see § 7).
A characteristic formation from these stemsi is Aete ¢.
thus from the stem ساد med. و we get die master,
lord; from the stem GLb sit (Ss wk good.
Nouns formed 5 the model of Aas contain diph- d
- Sor
thongs (§ 24), as Jos, 5 A
The place of the second radical (see § 42) is taken ء
by a long d in the act. participles of stems VII. and
60 71, NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE 9 AND ig.
VIII. and in the pass. part. of stems IV., VII. VIIL
and X.; e. بع part. pass. IV. alia, part. act. or pass.
0ك 59
ووع GS,
pass. منقوم (from a hypothetical active منقام
9
vi Also in numerous nominal forms, as 315 ) (from
a hypothetical 5 59) house, from دار med. و NF. hake
from قال is A from a hypothetical Jee.
The place of the second radical (see § 43) i is taken by
along 212 nouns of the type of قعل and فِعلة from med.
59
to be gentle; Kime ى and «6 e. g. we from = 2 med. و
mode of death fart med. 4; in the موتة for د 7
form Jad from med. (6, ©. g. بيش for ya white
(plur.) ; ‘lees in the forms from med. (g, e. g. yee
walk fOr سير : in the part. act. of ae IV. ane X. stems
وام د
from verbs mediae , and (6, 6. g.- mi ذ :مستسير
the part. pass. I a med. وى 6. g. مبيع from Pe
S Bes
to sell (mediae (¢) for «مبيوع
The place of the second radical is taken by long
4 5
ذور
u may also arise by contraction from زمار light from
mu in the pass. part. of the I stem of verbs med.
7 in nouns of the type of قعل from med. رو as
GS sor
gy as Soke for .مقوول
In the case of nouns derived from verbs ultimae
f.
0
71, NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE و AND ى 61
0 and ى those forms in which the second radical is
vowelless are treated like forms from strong stems,
عي :0 59 هه
as Dat رمى inf.
If the second radical has رق there results (cf. § 46a) b.
at the end of words a long © (from hypothetical awu,
ayu) which is written L— or (¢— (ace. as last rad.
is و Or (5), ©. g. Laall the stick, for past ey
ie pasture, trata عي to يد for a hypothetical
»-0L9
eel; Al NF. dail for A, elative of كني gener-
ous, liberal (§ 630). The same applies to all the pass.
participles of the derived stems. With the nunation,
oor
these forms appear as Las, sty) مى eye م (pte. pass. 1V)
in which the original long final vowel, ae standing in
a syllable closed by the x of the nunation, must be pro-
nounced short (§ 8): ‘asan, mar‘an, murman. Long @
appears before the feminine termination (cf. 5 70 e) as,
HOE morning for 504; al; death for كي
If the second radical has short 7, from iyw arises نه
a long 2 (cf. § 47a), e. آلْرايى .ع part. act. I in place
of a hypothetical elt; and so in the act. participles
2
of the derived forms. If the nunation is added, the
result is ply, ramin &c., in which the ى is dropped
even in the written form of the word. dywis changed
62 72, NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE 3 AND “ىك
to iyu, and consequently with the nunation it likewise
becomes in; e. g. inf. V. الترمى for ترم م :الترمى for
م In the act. part. of stem I from verbs ult, و
iwun is changed to iyun, and consequently with the
nunation further to in, e. g. لْعَازَى for gu, Salt
with the nunation ji Before 6 and @ (cf. 5 474), on
the other hand, the third radical retains its conso-
nantal value; thus the inf. of stem 11, according to
the form most in use with verbs med. 5 and Se Viz.
whats (§ 61), is: ues, Syd
After d@, yu and wu become ’u; yun, and wun be-
come ‘wz, in each case with the hamza, e. 5 abel
for السراو with the nunation 51 inf. I of ~ to be
noble; slash for con with the nunation إرماء inf.
IV for إرماى
If the second radical has a long w, the forms from
verbs ultimae و are sorte Fegulanly thus the pass.
part. I of IKE is 3 Bes (for 3958) magzuwun. From
verbs ultimae 5 on the other hand, ayun is changed
to iyun, e. g. sr (iron ey) marmiyun, so from
(sn go away inf. مضى for ¢ مضوى NF. das
If the second radical has a long 7, the forms from
ds
72.
73.
72., 73, THE GENDER OF NOUNS. 63
verbs ultimae .¢ are formed regularly, e. g. NF. dies
from ولى : bs saint (for 2 waliyun, From verbs
ultimae رو on the other hand, 7wun is changed into
tyun, as “AG ‘aliyun high from eves
b. The Gender of Nouns.
Arabic has two genders, a masculine and a femin-
ine. A number of words are sometimes masculine
sometimes feminine, in other words are of the common
gender. Words which denote female beings, collectives,
countries, cities, winds, parts of the body occurring
in pairs, and others, are in themselves feminine with-
out requiring the feminine termination. The gender
of such words is in each case noted in the dictionaries.
As an outward and visible sign of the feminine
we find most frequently the ending 1 atun (or ae
atu § 79), قائلة .ع .ه (NF. ,(قاعكة fem. of قال killing;
sae) (NF. ides) queen, from SLUG; راضية fem. of mase.
ual (§ 71c) content, sls (NF. xs) maid, from eit
(§§ 71b and 2d) youth. Many substantives are found
only with the feminine ending, as xis an orchard.
Norse. As a rarity, the feminine ending is found, particu-
ed HS
larly in the Kur’an, written with &, e. g. &U) نعمث the grace of
470,
God (for .(نعمة
64 73. THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
A number of masc, nouns are found with the
feminine ending, as خليقة Caliph, ees Talha (proper
name of a man, see 8, note 2). On the other hand,
there are nouns which, as being essentially feminine,
do not require the feminine termination, as pe barren
(referring to a woman).
3
The feminine ending ة is occasionally appen-
ded to common or class nouns in order to indicate a
single individual (nomen unitatis), as ذهب a gold
piece, from 28 gold; es a dora, from يام
doves (collective). The termination ¥—_ is also used
for the formation of the so-called nomina vicis, i. e.
nouns that express the doing of an action once, as
G+ عون
to sit down. قعل a single sitting down, from قعل ]ا
The feminine termination, again, serves to form
substantives from adjectives, as isl conduit-pipe,
water-channel, from the part. I of igi to water. Con-
nected probably with this is the feminine ending which
forms 12161251568, as علامة avery learned person, from
the adjective nes § 63 a.
Collective nouns are also formed by means of the
feminine eel e.g. from ركاش a courier, coll.
2365; توفي (§ 65a) Sufi (mystic), coll. Lye.
14.
a.
75.
74, TEEMINATION OF THE FEMIN. 75. NUMBER AND CASE. 65
Other feminine terminations are:
The termination ¢_; it goes to form feminines
of the type Asi, e.g. sy fem. of بسكران drunk,
(§ 586); feminines of the een form NE) nes
1 lati 6
ron elatives م 3D), e.g, sy fem. of aol smaller,
J! from Jj 0 the first, and substantives like Use
world (§ 2 note), which is properly a feminine to the
elative ooh that which is nearer at hand; also fem-
inines of the NF. Ax, e.g. from أ one, fem. wast;
subst. مسقم ذكرى
The ending z{__; it goes to form, more especially,
adjectives of the NF. 293 from ney, (§ 62¢), e. g.
صقراء fem. yellow; aR fem. one-eyed, but also
substantives, as hse desert.
c. Inflection of the Noun.
Arabic has three numbers: singular, dual and
plural. Of the last, there are two different kinds;
the one, the ordinary plural, properly so called, also
‘known as the pluralis sanus or the outer plural, which
: originally denoted rather a number of separate persons
and things; the other, the collective plural, also called
the inner or broken plural (see 55 86 ff.), which denotes
5
Socin, Arabic Grammar.*
66 76, DUAL AND PLURAL.
rather a continuous mass, in which the individual
member is not distinguished. At present we shall deal
only with the first-named. Arabic distinguishes three
cases: Nominative, Genitive, and Accusative.
The terminations of the dual and the pluralis
Dual nominative سان (eh § 33)
» genitive and accusative a (eh, oe)
Plural mascul. nominative وق (cf. § 33)
5 5 gen.-accus. ين (cf. or)
7 7 7 و =
3 femin. nominative ات (cf. ms)
1 » gen.-accus, أت
Before these terminations the flectional endings
of the sing. are dropped; the 8 of the feminine ending
is changed to w before the dual termination, (as it is
before the pronominal suffixes appended to the sin-
gular), e. g. BL, dual ysl.
By the addition of 1 terminations exhibited
above is formed the plural of many adjectives, in
particular, and also of a number of substantives. In
the formation of the plural we find substantives with
the feminine ending taking the sign of the masculine
plural (as a year, plur. 5 sn) much more fre-
76.
* sanus are as follows:
77, THE CASE INFLECTION OF THE SINGULAR. 67
quently, however, substantives without the sign of
the feminine in the singular are found forming their
plural by means of the feminine termination, e. g.
حال condition, plur. LE, 2ia heaven, plur. سَماوَات
(with the original waw restored 5 71d), also written
Sao! L
wo دلو
As regards the case inflection of the singular, it 77.
a
is necessary to distinguish between the so-called no-
mina triptota or triptotes, i. ©. nouns which are in-
flected for all three cases, and the so-called nomina
diptota or diptotes, i. e. nouns which cannot be thus
fully inflected. The latter never receive the nunation,
and unless they are determined by the article or by
a following genitive, they are inflected for only two
cases.
The following are the case-endings of the triptote
noun: Nom. sing. un, Gen. sing. —_ in, Acc. sing.
| an. With the feminine termination — only is
written instead of |— as ورجلا but :َمل ينغ 0 ot
and Las (cf. § 30).
The case-endings of the diptote noun are: Nom. 2d.
sing. ل u, Gen. and Accus. Sing. — a.
In the dictionary the triptotes are distinguished
from the diptotes by being always written with the
5*
68 78. NoM. TRIPTOTA ET DIPTOTA. 79, DETERM. AND UNDETERM. NOUNS,
nunation, as dey a a man, while the latter are always
without it, as yaw ا“ black.
Whole classes a nouns are always diptote. Such are
1) all proper names that are either feminine or have
the feminine termination, as fhe wees as names of
women; ed Bea as name of aman. To these must be
added the majority of such proper a as are of
meee origin, e. g. pase ol Abraham, موف Joseph,
ge Moses (but mipnogyllebles like فوح Noah are
mostly triptote).
2) Many so-called broken plurals; cf. § 88 Nos. 18,
19, 20; § 89 Nos, 23 24, 25, 27, 29;
3) adjectives of the form ACH (§ 626: § 63d);
4) adjectives of the form فعلان (§ 588(, which form
their fem. like Ass, 6. dé angry, fem. sree
5) Feminines formed by the terminations دى or
(aa (§ 74). Cf. also the broken plurals referred to under
b, 55 88,19 and 89,29.
The inflection of the singular of all nouns and
of the plural of feminines varies according as a noun
is determined or undetermined.
All proper names are in themselves determined
9 واس a-o &
as Oyse muhammadun Muhammed; Qyst ahmadu
78.
79.
80. SHORTENING OF THE DUAL AND PLURAL TERMINS. 69
Ahmed; such proper names are treated either as trip-
totes or as diptotes according as their form and the
custom of the language may determine; many of them
always take the article, as yi.
Common or class nouns are determined:
1) by the article; as ys a horse, آلْفَوس the horse. d.
2) by the addition of a following genitive, which >.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix, مين
the nomen regens is put in the construct state; as uns
desi the horse of the man, x.w<s his horse.
The case-endings of a noun determined (1) by the
prefixing of the article, or (2) by a genitive following
—and the same applies to proper names with the
article—are distinguished as follows from those of
the undetermined noun:
2 -
Singular nom. —, Gen. __, Acc. —.
-
Plural fem. nom. nae Gen.-Acc,
i. e, the nunation is always dropped. These endings
are assumed not merely by all triptotes, but also by
the diptotes, when determined yy the article or =
genitive semis e. g. New dy a ripe -Acc. Sia:
but Nom. مس Gen. ap, Ace. Set
Before a following genitive (which acc. to 5 796 80.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix) the
70 81, INFLEXION OF NOUNS FROM STEMS ULT. 9 AND qs.
terminations ن of the dual and ¢, of the plural are
dropped, thus:
Dual Nom. of dus: lds, but yl fous the two
slaves of the Vizier.
CP ا
Dual Gen.-Acc. das, but toe عبدى eee) I have
beaten the two slaves of Omar (before a cortnective
Alif thus: el sds, cf. § 6e).
Plural Nom. of Las butcher, executioner وقصا دو
but x SUIT poled the executioners of the king.
Plural Gen.-Acc. Gaga, but SUP ردك كَصَابِى |
have seen the executioners of the king.
For the inflection of the noun see paradigms XX and XXI,
6 3+
where will be found the forms of the masculine triptote ates an
jr
executioner,the masculine diptote ae another, the feminine triptote
د -
hour, and the feminine diptote ie Mayya (name of a woman). ساعة
In the case of nouns derived from stems ultimae
the nunation, acc. to 5 71bc, is taken by this vowel
of the second radical.
Nouns ending in am or 2 are unchangeable for
all three cases; those in in or 7, on the other hand,
take the an of the nunation, as well as the simple a
(§ 47d) as Uva, ely.
81.
ى 820 و* when the second radical has a short vowel
(0
d.
82.
82, THE ADDITION OF THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 71
Before the dual terminations (cf. 5 46 2 the last
radical is treated as a strong letter, as lac, were
lsh.
In the plural the last radical is dropped before
the terminations ina and ina, which, when joined to
an a of the ies radical, oe diphthongs (§ 46c);
- O@-9 - OBL
thus from oy ory Cer if the second radical
has i, the terminations are added immediately to the
-
former (§ 47c), as Osh .رامين
For the inflection of these nouns see paradigm No. XXII,
where will be found the forms of the triptote قاض judge, the
triptote ioe (ult. (ى chosen one (often asa proper name), the
triptote las ia >) a stick, the diptote ses كت remembrance, and
the diptote te world (vgl. § 744).
For the forms of the pronominal suffixes see
§ 12b—d.
Before the pronom. suffix of the 1. pers. sing. the
short case-endings of the construct state are dropped,
as .قَصَابِى The said suffix after a final a, 2 or ai be-
comes ى (ya), as with the nom. dual jGLa3, with
i! sles (§ 2d; 81a); with the gen.-ace. plur. زَقَصَابِيَ
with قاضى (§ 814: esl; with gen.-acc. dual «قَضَابَىَ
72 83, VOWEL CHANGES IN PLUR. SANUS. /
Nors. In the case of words which end in ms ais suffix
may either be attached in the usual way, e. g. from 5 1
5 or appended to the shortened form a e. g. hee from ne
and ى
The final z of the construct state of the plural
masc. is changed to 7 before the appended ©& (ef.
§ 7le), thus poled becomes قَصَابِي and then with
the suffix of the 1. pers. sing. قَصَابِى (no longer to be
distinguished from the genit. and accus. plural). The
same applies to the ending au from stems ult. ى (see
parad. XXII), ©. مصطفو .ع becomes ban, with the
suffix مصطقى (also identical with the genitive-accu-
sative form).
For the union of the noun with the suffixes see paradigm
XXIII. For the change before suff. of final § into & see 5 76a.
In the pluralis sanus of substantives of a masc.
or fem. nominal form with one short vowel (that is,
of any of the following types Wen hea, aise and مَعْلة
(فعلة ا the second radical frequently receives a
complementary vowel which is either ec with
that of the first radical or is نه ad. Thus رض 3 earth,
plur. أَرَضْونَ more rarely ee and رقسات i more
o>
rarely SLs; : ظلية darkness, plur. abet ae
83.
84.
85.
84. .أبن 85. VOCATIVE. 73
of el and eee This is a favourite method in
the case of the plural of the form ial, as xisk
(§ 73c) a single thrust or blow; plur. @Uab several
thrusts or blows.
‘Before ابن ason, a proper name loses its nuna-
tion in the case mentioned § 6/2, and ol is itself
written without the prosthetic |, e. g. مسارم د و بن الولين
Imalidi Muslim, the son of al-Walid. اح
& ?0 9
ye unl O35 zaiduni-bnu bischrin (§ 6e) means, on
the other hand, Zaid is the son of Bishr (nominal
sentence). 2
After G the particle of address, the simple noun
follows in the nominative without the nunation, as
Muhammed, di= يا Ob M.! يا رَجُلْ Oh man!
(by which a definite person is hailed). But should
anything of the nature of a complement (a genitive,
وده 9
for instance) be added to the noun in the vocative,
the name of the person addressed must be put in the
accusative, as الله Gas: ه يا حبك الله Abdallah! (Oh
servant of God!); BUS يا بَنَى Oh Banu Kinda! 2. e.
members of the tribe of Kinda (here ht? cf. § 80 and
90b is the constr. state of Grats): If an Object follows,
the noun stands in the accus. with the nunation, as
74 86. COLLECTIVE NOUNS.
pel) Us يا on thou that ridest the red mare! —
0 particle ba) (before which we may also have 4)
is always followed by a nominative with the article,
as ula gal يا Oh ye people!
Nore. After روا which serves as the expression of pain sae
sorrow, a long @ is appended to the noun; in pause اك as
8G ‘5 Oh mother!
There are, in Arabic, a mass of words which,
though singular in form, have a collective signification,
The following varieties may be singled out under
this head:
Simple collectives (mase. gend.) such as es which
denotes not merely ‘w people’ collectively, but also
‘people’ as individuals; cues Bi army and also the
individual soldiers thereof. From such words broken
plurals may be formed.
Names of the inhabitants of a country, as by gall
the Jews, often coinciding with the name of the country
itself, as Sigil the Hindus; a single Jew or Hindu is
called Spe) sous § 65a.
Class names (masc. gend.) from which are formed
nomina unitatis (§ 73c) as vives doves.
So-called quasi-plurals (masc. gend.), from which
2 . . 5 سرة
no nomen unitatis is formed, as كب a company of
86.
87. —
a.
87. THE BROKEN PLURALS, 75
اج 2
horsemen (a single one 259: pod the domestics
(one of which is po); 5 44> a number of asses (one
ass jie); use slaves 0 Boel
The so-called broken plurals (plurales fracti in the
language of the native grammarians—by German
scholars by preference called ‘inner plurals’ because
due to changes in the body of the word) are also
strictly speaking nothing more than collectives. Hence
they are treated in Arabic as singular nouns of the
feminine gender and construed 0 Thus
و
S 00
different gates, where oN is the broken أَبْوَابٌ متغرقة
plural of SG (on the model of Slash, and the par-
ticiple act. V. of فرق is put in the fem. sing.—These
broken plurals, further, take the same inflection as
the singulars, discussed in § 77 ff.
As a rule the broken plurals are given in the
dictionaries alongside of the singular of their respective
nouns; when this is not so, it is to be presumed that
the word either has no plural or takes a pluralis sanus.
Sometimes we find from one and the same word more
than one plural; in such a case, not unfrequently, a
word varies its plural as its meaning varies. Certain
of the broken plurals are, as a rule, confined to certain
specified singulars.
76 €8, THE BROKEN PLURALS.
From nouns regarded as containing three con-
sonants the following broken plurals may be formed:
ae from Jail (§ 62c) and its fem. Mes
(§ 740), as حمر fom yadt re د ops (cf. § 709)
from Syl black; بيض (for ديفن cf. 5 70/) from
Baal white.
GB 92
2. das from various singulars, as كنب from
was book.
3. Ji from sing. xis, as eos from قطعة piece.
4, Act meee from Sing. les, ad ode from
علب box; al آم عت people; cecsslonnlly from
sles, as aoe es Co acc. to 5 710) from ae place.
5. sled, as ial from ¢! brother.
6. ies esp. from sing. elas as aL from كامل
Ponce but also from ds 5 We, as 2-09 (for
ا from Reet lord.
7. sles (rare) as 5353 from oe monkey.
8. عل from dels ult. وى as قَضَاة (for 3 en
§ 71d) from قَاضٍ judge.
9. تعال very common, from various singulars, as
from arrow. قلا
وذ lst
88.
88, THE BROKEN PLURALS, 77
’
10. Jans nergy common. also ponte te singulars,
as S yid from cote band of soldiers; بكى (for ee
see § 71e) and then (with change of u to #) es from
Jb weeping.
11 xiLas (rare) as 5S خرسم = stone.
12. yas (rare) as عمومة from عَم uncle.
13. Fer from dels, as hes from deals an un-
branded she-camel.
14. Js from dels, as Sus from كاتِبٌ scribe.
15. ce from various singulars, as شل from
bs, foot.
16. gles ton various eas as Rae 3 from
Lin) a cake, el] (§ 01 0 arom حَيِيبٌ beloved; vel
from إِمَام president; Kal from إلاه God.
17. Jas very common, from various singulars,
as أمطار from yes rain; slat (always without the
nunation) from 5 54 thing. .
18. Mi on from dss as sly 3{ from قريب
relative; Avery from git rich.
19. Ass (rare), as Sy from er wounded.
78 89, THE BROKEN PLURALS.
we! a ih Ss -
20. رفعلاء as شعراء from yes poet.
21 ces, as Ress from me youth ; lye
(for be cf. § 69b) from جار neighbour.
~ 09
فرسَان _ district; عل from لدان as بفعلان
negroes from eal black. سوقان from ar rider;
Note. Forms 5 and 15—17 are used, as a rule, only of a
number of objects not exceeding ten (hence called pluralia
paucitatis).
From nouns with more than three radical con-
sonants (cf. § 56d ff.) are formed plurals in which the
first consonant takes @, the second @ and the third .أ
Such plurals are diptotes with the exception of all
those derived from stems ult. .¢ (or with an additional
(s— in the sing. 5 74.) which take the nunation in in
the nominative and genitive, but not in the accusative
which ends in .¢—. The forms of the singular of
Nos. 24 (cf. also عن § 66) and 25 are regarded
as quadriliterals. No. 29 ends in long @ and is diptote.
The following are the principal varieties:
23. كلل as Sols from poids (NF. dss)
locust. This form is also found from nouns that are
only in a special sense quadriliterals, inasmuch as
they are really triliterals with the addition of a
39.
89, THE BROKEN PLURALS. 79
formative consonant; examples of this group are:
a) seth, as jolt from 2031 (NF. 35351) fingertip;
also from elatives used as SEE REN, such as
أكاير the Brea ones from si elat. of os b) delis
as we from Se (NF. (تفعلة experience; © jolie
-O- 7-92
as مَرَايِلُ from see RE Rata) dung-heap; معايش
(with رو not with 5) from & معيشة 0 (NF. clas) livelihood;
معان (ace. (معاذى of hee (NF. Aare idea.
24. dels especially from قاعِلَة and fale (used
as asubstantive), as صواعق from Kiso thunder-clap;
فوَارس fi from uy rider; ole (for yal d § 670)
from vale person of distinction; gh> (ace. (جوارى
from جارية a female slave.
25. “wes from such nominal forms with a long
vowel after the second radical as have a feminine
form or signification, as a) جِنَائْرَ from جِنَارة funeral
obpeanne b) 5s from ast miracle; c) sls
from Lye bride.
26. las as lis from sys (N. F. Ax3) decision.
27. كَعَالِيل aa quadriliteral nouns with a long
gS Zo»
vowel before the last consonant, as عَنَاقِيلُ from عنقود
80 90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
(N. F. diss) bunch of fruit; this form is also found
with nouns derived from triliteral stems, of which the
following are specimens: a) Lust as أحاويثت from
(أمُُولَة د آخل وكة story; b) تتاعيل as تَصَارِيف
from تصريف (infinitive aver used as a noun) turn;
0 eels as مقادِير from ppd (participle Sais
used as a noun) fate; but also > duels (cf. No. 24) as
خرايييس from جاسوس (NF. (فَاعُولٌ spy.
28. قعاللة from quadtiliteral nouns denoting
living beings, as spls from bes (NF. قال a
mighty man; Ras from Gi ue كلامل from
aghs pupil; Told from ا 012921176 of Bagdad.
29. Shes, as ols from ككراء desert; هدايا
(for هدايى § 2d note b) from 5-2 (NF. تعيلة from
ult. (5) present.
The following nouns (arranged in alphabetical
order) are more or less irregular in their mode of
inflection:
se sé Se
father-in-law take حم brother and اخ father, اب
the following forms in the construct state and before
suffixes beginning with a consonant:
90.
90, IRREGULAR NOUNS. 81
Nominative 5 5 حبو
Genitive eh eh 0
Accusative GI, Leh, Gs
The Dual of esl is wll (i. e. the two parents), the
plur. 2h (§ 88 No. 17). The anatase لشي with
sul. of the 1. bers, sing. of St is el ويا est ويا
ا G; from 5 ic : gals with suffix of the 2. pers. masc.
sing. أَبْوكَ 1 Jel.
opt son; plur. sanus has nom. ee (construct b.
(بثو gen,-acc. بَنِينَ (st. constr. 85 broken plur.
eel (§ 88,17).
a brother, see a; broken plur. eae lel 23
(§ 88,5. 21).
crs ie, plur. esol
es or sal (also Bye) man; gen. eri acc, مرا 6
“o} woman; plur. from another root Blas, I
5 or en (§ 88,9. 5. 21).
gt 8, هد 8, a>
pf mother; plur.algofor .امات 4
١ |
man, human being; plur. ald ١ إِنْسَان
.ماس
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
d.
collective 4.
82 90, IRREGULAR NOUNS.
daughter, frequently also xi (with con- بنت
G فت
nective ‘Alif); plur. .ينات
dinar, gold-piece; broken plur. irregular, دِيتَارٌ
pubs.
(only in the st. constr.) possessor of ....; ذو
د get (SO) ace. 13; fem. esl oe dual nom. ples
559 (gen.-acc. 599) fem. S595 for the plural a
(uli), gen.-acc. أ is used.
XL year; plur. nom. een (or io) gen.-acc.
5
5 8 ‘amrun, ‘Amr, proper name of aman. A 5
is added to the written form of this word in the nom.
and gen. (عمرو) to distinguish it from oe ‘umaru i
diptote). Acc. [ees followed by ee) it is written ot
and pronounced ‘amra-bna.
و
or 353 mouth; st. constr. aces nom. 5 قم
broken plur. (§ 88,17) ays وفا gen. 3, acc.
ded night; broken plur. (from the root Ju) Jus
(§ 89,23).
مه عه رم
or stool (§ 88,9.17). مياه water; broken plur. ماء
Z.
m.
0.
q-
91, THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 83
35 hand; broken plur. (§ 88,15) gt from gost +
(cf. § Tle).
So- Sa وده
تنوم day; broken plur. aut from أ يوام (§ 88,17). s.
(88 91—93.)
Chapter Iv. The Numerals.
The cardinal numbers have the following forms: 91.
Fem.
Sam] 3 inflected
gael (inflected as a dual)
inflected
“se 2-6 oF
اربعة »
Ss
Ss
7: عر حي
” خيس
gS
9G
Xi ”
-
GEOL
BRA ”
75 (see p. 27%) كمَانِيَة 7
ners isda! indeclinable
6*
G- Le
KSMS (x43)
Masc.
| dels
1 5 _E
| oS
9 aust
3 EMS (48)
4 5!
5 حبين
7 هه
91. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Masc. Fem
12 phe إثنا Spike Lad! gen.-ace. “es cl,
ths اتنتى
13 ee a 00 eae indeclinable
14 pie ker) اربع عشرة 1
م ey يك فك
18 Ss كَيَانِيَة BRS GUS 5
19 ye تسعة ةرشع ews »
20 Gyre inflected, like all the tens, as a
pluralis sanus.
إِحْدَى وَعِشْرونَ DE وَعِشْرُونَ 91
yh, 00 yh 50 ريون 40 ,كافون 0ة
يعون 90 G5, 80 سَبُْونَ 10
100 ماكة (also written Kn, and always so
84
pronounced, m’atun, the | having no effect on the
pronunciation).
92. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 85
BL ah 500 400 ,*ثَلاث ب 0 ,LSLe, 200
343 800 شع م ماكَةٍ 700 ,ست مِاتَّةٍ 600 ,حمس Sle
ens: مم مات 0 900 %5Lo,
1000 231, 2000 Hi, 3000 SST BIG SST
is here a broken plural of the form SLs § 88 No. 17)
&c. 11000 Gall Se Bey, 100000 ail وماك 1000000
عه و عه
لف الف
The following are the leading points to be noted 92,
in joining the cardinals to the names of the objects
numbered:
The numerals for one (وَاحِلٌ) and two are adjec- a.
tives; the numbers from 3—10, on the other hand,
are substantives, and take the word indicating the
objects numbered in the genitive plural. They may
also, however, be placed in apposition after the noun.
Whatever their position relative to the substantive
may be—even, in fact, when the latter is altogether
omitted, or when they stand as the predicate of a
sentence—the construction is such that nouns of the
masc. gender take the fem. forms of these numerals,
2 ده
* Often written GUIW .عنة
86 93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
and vice versd nouns of the fem. gender take the masc,
In ewe S707 22
forms. Thus: eres BSNS (SIG wre) three sons,
2ر8 مسو —
wl (يَناث ارجع) أربع four daughters. Also before
broken plurals of which the singular is masculine,
we find the fem. forms of these numerals (3—10), as
men. 3 2595 رجالٍ
The numbers from 11 to 99 are followed by the
word indicating the objects numbered in the accusative
singular, as 5 es 30 men.
The numbers from 100 upwards take the thing
i
numbered in the genitive singular as ds} Le أربع
400 men.
In the compound numbers the nature of the
construction depends on the last numeral. The
particle 5 is used to join the numbers together; the
units and the tens may stand either before the
hundreds, or after the thousands and hundreds. Thus
the year 1895 is either is مادة و es as wy ue
- 390 So - عوهنو
.الف Urey & Sale hss وتسعون سنة or سَنق
The ordinals hay e, for the most part, the form
e-cr
the following:
d.
93.
- of the act. part. of the I stem, as may be seen from
93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 87
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.
2 1 هه Bs Ae
سادسة سادس .6 اولى first ,{ .1
سابعة سابع .7 ثانية 1 92
8 > SF yy Se we ررق
5. عاشر .10 خامسة خامس sale
11. عشرة حادى عشر ole indeclinable
13. pie wl ners xuG and so on.
The ordinals of the numbers from 20 upwards
are expressed by the corresponding cardinals, as
ee ells thirty-third; when larger totals have
to be expressed, the cardinals are used even for the
lower numbers. In dates, as a shia, the cardinal
numbers are used exclusively, as ثلا عَشَرة ia 5
a_i Se) lis ف Le ots in the 1313th year of
the Hegira (which ‘began on 6 24th of June 1895).
Fractions are usually expressed by the form ches, 2
as eal a third.
88 94, 95, PARTICLES,
Chapter V. The Particles. (§§ 94—96).
The adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions cannot
here be given in detail. The prepositions, like many
adverbs, are still for the most part recognizable as
nouns of three radicals originally, which have preserved
the accusative ending without the nunation. Preposi-
tions therefore always govern the genitive case in
Arabic and may also stand in the genitive in depen-
dence on other a cnt Thus الوق above, with
a subst. bl ق us up on the hill.
Nore. A few adverbs end in «u (which in this case has
absolutely nothing to do with the nominative termination) as
ناوه aoe
in the same sense; but as prepositions من بحن so لاج ماله بعد
Ve
wu or من بعد after,
The following particles (in alphabetical order)
because written with a single letter are inseparably
joined to the following word, cf. § 8 note.
=e cert
{ (3) interrogative particle, as (as! did he kill?
Before the connective Alif: Sian} for 14 SEAT is thy
name... 9
preposition ‘in’; with suffixes thus: 1. oS )3( ب
masc. x» (§ 12d) &e. .3 ربك .5 .2 in me,
& particle of asseveration, as xls by God.
94.
95.
96. PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 89
Shortened from oe a particle which gives d. س
to the impf. the sense of the future, as eas he
will kill,
cs, then, denotes a less close connection than 5:
Y (3) like, as. 7
J a corroborative particle before verbs, especially g.
in oaths, as plate he will certainly kill; it also
stands before nouns, especially after the particle إن
(§ 1254 note).
J (2) preposition and conjunction; before suffixes h.
(except in 1. pers. sing. J) it becomes J, as JU
to thee. :
connective particle; as a particle of i. )3 ,1( و
asseveration it takes the gen., as xU}, by God.
As regards the addition of pronominal suffixes 96.
to the prepositions and conjunctions, the following
points may be noted in addition to what has been
said under § 82.
Before the suffixes of the 1. pers. sing., the final a.
vowel or vocalic ausiaut is dropped as is the case
with the noun; thus nes ‘after’ with the suff. of the
1. pers. sing. .¢dx3, but بعك &e.
50 97. DISTINCTION BETWEEN PERF. AND IMPF.
b. In the prepositions As upon, and dt towards,
the final ى is sounded before suffixes (contrary to
§ 2d), ©. ع
with suff, of the 2. pers. mase. Sue, St
a iy egy, a, ee
» oo» ge bes » 005 4 (see § 82a)
6 The prepositions من and es double the 2 be-
fore the suffix of the 1. eS sing., as oe
d. eal behold, truly, and a that, become
re the suff. of the 2. pers. sing. masc. Jb! and Jl
” ” ” ” 1. ” ” set or lh
an or oy,
111. NOTES ON SYNTAX. ($§ 97—160).
Chap. I. Moods and Tenses. (8§ 97—104).
97. The perfect expresses a completed action, the
completion of which falls in the past, present or future,
or is thought of as falling in one or other of these
a ae
98. THE PERFECT. 91
periods. The imperfect expresses an uncompleted
action, which may likewise fall in each of the same
three spheres of time.
The perfect is, in the first place, the tense of 98.
narration (perfectum historicum), when an action com- 4"
pleted in the past is spoken of, and may, as a rule,
be rendered by our past tense, as Oss ele Zaid came.
By the perfect the idea is expressed that an action 0.
or a state has continued from the beginning, and still
continues, as الْعليَاء estes the learned (always)
disagree (gnomic aorist); الله تَعَانٌ God, he is exalted
(from the beginning).
When the perfect expresses an action completed c.
in the present, it is to be rendered by our present,
oF من وس
as هذا die! I present you with this (the affair is
at this moment concluded).
In a sentence containing an oath or a wish, the d.
perfect expresses an action which, in the mind of the
speaker, is completed in the future, as لعنه الله God
curse him; also with 5 ‘not’, as xi KD) 5 may God
have no pity on him; hes لآ aT; by God I do
it not!
When the particle cus stands before the perfect, ©
the latter may in most cases be rendered by our per-
52 99, THE IMPERFECT.
fect (either the present or the past perfect), as قل
ss we have (just) mentioned, or we had mentioned.
The perf. with قل may also be used in the sense given
under sub-section c.
When the verb oS (to be) stands before the per-
fect (with or without J), we must render as a rule
by cup past perfect اي as موسى od, ed)
JULY Jats فرعون yal OF كان when Moses was
born, Pharaoh had (just) commanded to kill the little
children.
Notre. Instead of the above verbal sentence (§ 134), ow
may be followed by a compound nominal sentence (§ 138 d) as كان
Our conditional is expressed in Arabic by the
perfect, that is, it is represented as something already
accomplished, as 005 Tshould wish, ee كنث ود tos)
I should have wished.
For the perf. after ذا and in conditional sen-
tences see §§ 157,158.
The imperfect indicative is to be rendered accord-
ing to circumstances by our present or our future,
sometimes also by our past progressive (imperfect).
If the future is to be expressed with greater pre-
cision than by the Arabic imperfect alone, the latter
99,
99, THE IMPERFECT. 93
has prefixed to it the adverb سوق (end), which may be
shortened tow and is then inseparably joined to the verb
(see § 95d), as تعليون Syn ye will know (it); سَنْرِيهم
(49b) we shall show you.
By the imperfect is expressed an action which 5.
accompanies another action completed in the past,
or which is still in the future from the stand point
- Loe 09, -F Fm
of the latter, as اباهم يبكون Aes 0 can to mien
father weeping (cf. § 1570); Sys العين igi} he
came to the spring to drink.
The imperfect can also express the continuance ©:
of an action in the past; يَتَقَائَلُونَ may also mean
‘they were fighting for a considerable time’, or ‘they
fought repeatedly, with each other’. More frequently,
however, this continuous imperfect is expressed by
a combination of كان with the impf. (cf. § 98/7. and
note); sometimes we can render such a combination
o- ww? ? دخ Pee.
by our ‘was wont to’ or ‘used to’, as كان ياخل في كل دوم
قلائ82 ذراهم he used to receive every day three
drachmae.
If AC stands before the imperfect, a certain in- d.
definiteness is the result, as يون Os ‘it will most
54 100, THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
likely be that... .’, an idea which is not unfrequently
found in the imperf. without KC?
Nore a. The impf. also stands in direct subordination to
“VE »v
other verbs, as ما ؤلت اشرب I ceased not to drink (cf. § 110);
- BO دمص ve JL9E م YE
le اقدر افعل ee he began to speak with the people; يكلم الناس
137 1 cannot do such a thing.
Nore b. Before several verbs (perfects or imperfects) joined
together with 0 it is sufficient to write كان once, and so with
Faded
3, سوف and 2
1208 c. oe (see note to 5 98/) is frequently followed by a
ل -e0D IIe مع
ود ل
Osman was كان عثمان يزور المقاير compound nominal sentence, as
wont to visit the graves (the cemetery).
The Subjunctive is found in certain kinds of depen-
dent clauses introduced by a conjunction, the action
of which is to be represented as one to be expected
as the result of the action of the principal clause,
and hence as one that is only likely to occur in the
future. Hence this mood is جلاعي (not always)
used after the conjunctions asf that, vt (from y 3!)
that not, ste until, ف (and ? that, and always ae
J, ns sy in order that, Gi] (made up of لا 23)
in order that. t, أو به in the sense of ‘except that’,
‘until’, as ood sls he came in order to visit me;
9 يو
أمرة ان يكنب he commanded him to write (that he
100.
101. THE MOD, APOCOPAT. OR JUSSIVE, 102. THE MOD. ENERGIC. 95
should aie) In like manner the subj. is used aie:
oo (i زلا it will not be (the case) that, as Les! od
I shall not send him.
The modus apocopatus (or jussive) is found: 101.
1) in positive commands, generally with the particle a.
J prefixed, as es Tet] let him write.
Norse, When such a form is further preceded by ‘ and 3
(which is sometimes the case, without any special stress renting
on these particles) J generally loses its vowel,. as الله wey
- 9 S00 | دسسدتت
and in God let the believers Pa eer) trust. قليتو كل المومتون
2) in negative commands with Y, as has y say not, 0.
thou shalt not say. The imperative can never take
a negative.
3) always after لم not as a prohibition but as ne- c.
gativing a completed action, as were) لم he did not
strike, (as the negation of Sys); in like manner after
U3 in the sense of ‘not yet’.
4) in the protasis and apodosis of conditional sen- d.
tences, see § 158.
The modus energicus is usually found in assevera- 102.
tions, and particularly in connection with an oath
and the corroborative particle J, as 5,35 allt by
God, I will certainly strike him; this mood is also
used with the prohibitive لا
56 103. THE PASSIVE. 104, THE PARTICIPLE.
The Passive is employed in those cases in which
the agent, for some reason or other, must not be
5 94 GSo- + 9
mentioned. Hence a sentence like 2) das means
‘Zaid has been killed (by some person unknown or
who may not be named)’. Our ‘Zaid has been killed
by ‘Amr’, the Arabs express by the active construction.
The passive is frequently found in an impersonal sense
(see § 1214).
With regard to the employment of the participles
the following points are to be noted:
The participle (especially as predicate of a nominal
sentence § 122) frequently expresses our “to be about
04. § - Té&
to”, as أنا قادم إليك I am about to come, on the
point of coming, to you.
The passive participle is also used impersonally
in Arabic; starting from the sentence عليه oie he
fainted (literally: it was covered over him) we can
also say عليه eke 53 he has fainted, fem. a
Lede = ihe a0. In such constructions the impersonal
part. pass. may be inflected for all three cases and be
عي عه 2
determined by the article, as مغشي عليه dese os
oF و مهرمع
I passed a man who had fainted; رايت المراة البغشي
عَلَيهًا I saw the woman that had fainted.
103.
104.
105.
105, VERB. COMPLEMENTS. 106—108. accus. comPLEMENT. 97
Chap. II. The Government of the Verb. )55 105—117):
In Arabic the verb may take as its complement
either an accusative, or a preposition with its case.
The numerous combinations of the latter sort, in
which the preposition with its case is sometimes the
necessary complement of the action denoted by the
verb, sometimes merely accessory (such, for example,
as specifications of place and time) cannot here be
106.
107,
108.
given in detail. See, however, §§ 114 ff.
The accusative is the case depending immediately
on the verb. We distinguish here the cases in which,
the accusative stands a) as object, B) as predicate,
and 7) as limitation or more precise definition, generally
called by grammarians, the accusative “of nearer
definition”.
a) Certain classes of verbs, as for example, verbs
of coming and going, take as direct object the goal
to which the action is directed, e. g. mul دكل
he went into the house.
Norse. On the other hand ot إلى jee denotes ولتتمستع
the direction of the action fowands the goal; فى ألبيت ges
he went into the house and stayed there.
The following take two accusatives: 1) The causa-
tive forms of transitive verbs with one accusative in
the I. stem, as me to know; caus. ات ts he
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
598 109, THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT.
taught him reading; 2) verbs that express the ideas
of filling or giving, of making into, of considering or
سين as, of naming, and many others: e. g.
Lis eel xu Ja God made the earth (into) a
26-9 9-09
Ria fous? أبنه ee he named his son Muhammed.
When averb of this nen is putin the eke the second
accusative remains, as pees xis ee his son was
named Muhammed; درهمًا el he was presented with
a dirhem, from the active Uso 3&1 he presented him
with a dirhem (for suff. see § 107).
Nore a. The two accusatives of such verbs as express the
idea of finding one to be, or considering one as something, stand
to each other, strictly speaking, in the relation of subject and
predicate (§ 139); thus a sentence like حليمًا Gas exces may also
be translated ‘I found that he was a gentle old man’. As second
object we may have a verb instead of a noun, as يضاعتهم joa
peal 23, they found their payment to be something which was
returned to them = they found that their payment was &c.
Nore b. Verbs expressing not an intellectual but a physical
perception are also frequently found with two accusatives. The se-
cond, indeed, is generally regarded as an acc. of condition (§
9 ev و
1138(, but sentences like WU ,سيكت عمرا it must be admitted,
may also be translated: I heard ‘Amr weeping, i. e. I heard how
“Amr wept.
For the purpose of strengthening or of more
precisely defining the idea conveyed by it, every verb
109.
110.
110. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE. 99
may take a so-called absolute object. This absolute (or
internal) object consists of an infinitive, a nomen speciei
(§ 64 c) or other noun. Usually this object is itself more
precisely defined either by some qualifying word or
sae zee ,2 £2. وى
phrase (§ 120) or by @ genitive, as LAs تَادِيبًا x30}
he educated him with a good education, i. e. well;
-- oF Pe oe
bys hyd he struck him with a stroke أوجعنى
which pained me (for the relative sentence, see § 155);
pes Say سلك he walked in the way of his grand
father. More rarely the absolute object is found with-
م IW ع وض
out any qualification, as Lb Ld به he struck him
with a stroke, as much as to say, he struck him a
oe ae J
blow, and what a blow! ١ 2 he wrapped it in
(so many) parcels; here the absolute object expresses
rather the result of the action.
Notre. Sometimes the place of the infinitive is taken by the
mere qualification, as ساو طَويلًا he journeyed long, for ساو سي طويلاً
he journeyed a long journey, or by some other form of nearer
ردم صلاو ردق We 2
definition, as ile فكع الله عاية بيت المقدس God allowed him to
“os ع اهالت
capture Jerusalem peacefully = glo ev.
B) The accusative stands as the predicate with verbs
which express the idea of being or becoming some-
thing, and is especially common with the verb oe
(med. لو This verb signifies either 1) to be in the
7
100 111. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE.
sense of to exist, as oy wes there was (there lived)
a vizier, or 2) to be something (in particular); in
the latter sense it takes its predicate (to adopt
the nomenclature of the native grammarians) in
the accusative, as Sula ae) ecg his wife was
pregnant. The same construction is adopted by all
verbs of similar ie saa such as eal to be
something late, et to be something early, Sle to
be or become وه a second time, alo to remain,
to last, Jf to cease to be something, pre to become
something, لسن not to be something. The place of
the accusative in the predicate may be taken by a
preposition with its case (cf. 5 114 ff.), as oF G كار
eos & Zaid was in the house; الفرين Jyh كانت
sa ye abst Gye the kings of Persia belonged
to the most powerful sovereigns on earth. The con-
struction of كان and the others with a finite verb
(§§ 987; 99c) must also be understood in this way,
that is, the predicate in such cases consists of a verbal
sentence (§ 135), as اناس قَنْ تَعِبُوا 9 Sf the people
had already (prop. early) become weary.
The accusative, further, stands in the predicate
11
112.
113.
112. acc. oF concomiTaNcE, 113. acc, OF NEARER 51811211107. 101
after the negative Sj, when the latter, as the Arabs
say, expresses a general negation. The accus. after رلا
which is always undetermined, drops its nunation, as
pee SO ع
there is (absolutely) no God but Allah. لا at! إلا الله
The accusative is used after the conjunction 3 to
indicate reas especially in verbal sentences
One م
(§ 135), as IG; صنئعت La what hast thou and
thy father done? heed eer os; Lo I ceased not
to go with (along) the Nile; also without a verb Lo
اس ل مه
Bese JJ what hast thou (to do) with Zaid?
7) The accusative of nearer definition is employed
in the following cases:
1) To give details of place and time, as ima oo
Js he looked to right and to left of him; ss 5 )
he journeyed a parasang; جاو عشاء they came late
Ge" عب
in the evening; حَيَاته ous استير عَلى ذلك he con-
tinued faithful thereto during his life-time.
2) Very frequently the accusative, as a rule un-
determined, appears in verbal (rarely in nominal)
sentences as the accusative of state or condition,
as آلْمَدِينَةٍ dl Led pie ساو he journeyed, taking the
direction of Medina; USG ees لَقِيث 1 met ‘Amr
weeping.
102 113, 114*. acc, oF NEARER DEFINITION AND EXCLAMATION,
Note a. With the accusative of condition the student
must be careful to note to which of the nouns in the sentence it
applies; in the last sentence above, for example, it might refer
s wil
to the subject pronoun implicit in 2. instead of to “Amr,
Notre b. Two nouns in the accusative of condition are
often وا beside hao euler without a conjunction (asyndeton)
قا
ag لخر منهًا مذوما مَحَقُورا (God said to Balan): 50 out of it (pa-
radise, fem.) as one cast off and despised (for lad see § 70 note),
Nore c. In some rare cases an infinitive is used (in place
eve - 2
of a participle) to denote a qualifying circumstance; قتل صمر! he
was killed bound (i. e. while bound) = .مصبورا
3) The accusative of specification(—accus. of respect),
also in most cases undetermined, expresses a more
or »0 كن
precise reference, as | حسنت it (paradise) is
beautiful with reference to staying (there),1.¢.as a dwell-
ingplace ; this accus. is especially common watch elatives
-oo & <=
(§ 63b) of a more general signification, as Beem اشل
stronger with regard to the colour red = redder.
4) The accusative of nearer definition is also em-
ployed to indicate the motive or purpose of an action,
in which case, also, it is mostly undetermined, as
Lo Pee: they fled from cowardice; x} List فيك
I stood up to do him honour.
The accusative may also stand in cases, parti-
cularly in exclamations, where a finite verb can be
supplied, as وَسَهْلًا Ws! welcome! Hens ae ust
114*
114, 115, THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS. 103
2 ١
sapply Gus, and the meaning of the phrase comes
to be: thou art come to relatives and a smooth (i. e.
pleasant) place; ey slowly! to be taken as the
absclute object of an imperative understood.
Of the numerous constructions of the verb with 114.
115.
a preposition attention need only be called to the
following.
Many prepositions are still treated as nouns, in
م with their original signification (see § 94),
GH سا سال سم
aS Sort مير بين اذكو he distinguished between
(prop. the distance, difference of) males and females.
Very frequently we find (cf. § 110) the partitive ee
used in this way as object, e. g. من ¢ آلطعَام as he
ate of the food.
A few verbs are construed, with but slight differ-
ence of meaning, now with a direct object, now with
رب as xyhe he knew it, به pls he knew about it.
Frequently \ serves to introduce an object, to which
the action ee the verb extends only indirectly, as
1Oa) & a3 he sent Zaid; Lun د cass he sent the
writing (i. e. some one with the writing); ber i بعت
he sent the slave, oualls ree same meaning, but
104 116, 117. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS.
with the understanding that the slave travels under
escort. Verbs of going construed with ب take tke
عر ات م لم ae i a
sense of bringing, as pak زيذنا is! he brought Zaid
the news.—This may also accompany an impera~
tive as a periphrasis of the first person of the dual
and plural, as Us أمض let (thou) us go, Us أمضوا
let (ye) us go.
The meaning of many verbs is often so altered
according to the preposition with which they are
construed that a sense quite the opposite of the
original, according to our idiom, is the result; thus
is properly: he called (to God) in his favour, دعا له
i, e. he blessed him, Kale led he called (to God)
against him, i. e. he cursed him; pit Jail he
(which عن occupied himself with the affair; bal with
he إشتغل contains the idea of separation) yl gy
was occupied so that he put the affair in question
aside, could not attend to it.
Of the various uses of the preposition ل (see
§§ 130 ff.), we may call attention to its special use in
dates, particularly in specifying the days of the month,
ae») oT oF ٠. .
as ere لأول ليلة من in the first (literally: to the first)
night of (the month) Muharram. pee Jl coed
116.
117,
118.
118. DETERMINATION. 105
or with the omission of JUS (§ 90 p) من شعبان
cee cried at the time of seven nights, which (cf.
had elapsed of Sa‘ban, i. e. when seven night )155 §
Br ع
(or days) of 5. had passed; بَقيَت (Ja) 3 ows لاربع
plas, من when still fourteen (nights) were left of
Ramadan.
Chap. 111. The Government of the Noun. (§§ 118—134).
A noun may take with it a) the article, 8) a permut-
ative (noun in apposition), y) a! qualifying (attribu-
tive) adjunct, 5) a genitive.
a) When a noun is preceded by the article, it is said
to be determined (§ 79b). This determination may be
stronger or weaker:
A very strong determination is found in certain
words which contain the idea of time, as الساعة this
hour = now, spall this day = today. In these cases
the article has the force of a demonstrative,
By means of the article a single definite object is
indicated, which the speaker has in mind, or which
has been already mentioned: by dae 1 is meant some
particular known man. Proper names furnished with
the article (see § 79a) were originally appellatives
with the determination, as اسن
106 119, APPOSITION.
The determination by the article often serves
merely to denote the species or class to which some-
mo 5 ن
thing belongs, as jus hive ~ he is like an ass,
This use of the article is named the generic.
8) From among the cases in which a noun follows
another noun in apposition, the following may be
singled out as worthy of note:
A substantive may have in apposition words
expressing a) size, b) resemblance, c) the parts and
d) the سين of which a thing is made up. Thus
a) توب ذراع a dress an ell long (lit. a dress, an ell);
b) sy جل دل a man like (lit. the likeness of)
Zaid; c) Lesh as a rope made up of rotten pieces;
d) اموي een the iron finger- 7s HED undeter-
mined preferably with من as ped من pie an idol
of gold. For the last, the genitive construction is
ع و 0
also found viz: aul .صلم
The word its totality is construed either with the
noun following in the genitive, or stands in apposition,
5
en Se,
with a suffix referring back to the noun, as كل الناس
88 ay
or كلهم lll all men. (Note that كل bane a substan-
tive always remains unchanged as regards gender and
number).
119.
120, QUALIFYING ADJUNCTS. 107
7) A substantive may be qualified 1) by an adjective, 120.
2) by a preposition with its case, or 3) by a relative
clause (§§ 155—6).
1) The qualifying word may be an adjective, as a.
Jolé ole an honest Imam; in this case if the
substantive is determined the adjective must also
receive the determination, as Jolalf obey, the honest
Imam,
The adjective follows its substantive; to this rule 6.
the demonstrative pronoun forms an apparent excep-
tion, in as much as it generally stands before (like the
article 5 118), less frequently after, the substaniye
which it qualifies. Thus we find هنا العام this slave,
alongside of الْغْلَام هذا
The adjective must agree د its substantive in c.
gender and number, as pavers صَبِية a pretty girl.
Among the exceptions is the word af much, which
generally remains unchanged, like a noun in apposi-
tion, even after the plural, as قي eae many men.
That the broken plurals take their adjectives in d.
the feminine has been already noted (see § 87); the
adjective, however, may also take a broken plural, as
noble men. The plur.sanus, moreover, is not ورجال كرام
108 121, PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE AS 507
unfrequently found especially if the adjective qualifies
words denoting living beings, as cape AGT the
ancestors that were of old (part. of i): In the same
circumstances the collectives (§ 86a) may also take a
plural adjective, as es Se miserly people, opt ex
violent people. The preceding pronoun often stands
then in the plural, as walt هولاء these men; but
with fem. plurals that do not denote living beings
generally in the fem. singular, as Stay sds these
deserts; before broken plurals also in the fem. sing., as
ISAT هذه these slaves.
2) From those cases in which a preposition with its
121. noun is dependent on a verb (§§ 114 ff.) or its equi-
* valent, must be clearly distinguished those in which
they form the qualifying attribute of another noun,
as Gell ile ae Coulee I sat down beside a
goldsmith (who was) in the bazaar; Jase | ذَرِيتَكَ من
thy posterity (that will be) after thee.
Sometimes this attribute does not stand next to
b. the word qualified; so pariealacly with the relatives
those of من ee deed من as SPT ,ما and من
Pes ما the Arabs that advanced into Syria; GLb
122. ASYNDETON OF ATTRIBUTES, 123. THE GENITIVE. 109
marry of the women whatever seemeth لكم ow النساء
good unto you.
Should several attributes qualify a single substan- 122.
123.
tive, the connecting Son tueuoy is usually omitted
(asyndeton), as الْعَظِيمْ Aad SUI the high and mighty
God; القرية wey oe chs SG a wide gate of the
gates of the town; نظلة xl de Reus عَيَامَةٌ
a thick cloud over his head which gave him shade.
6) One noun, when in dependence on another, is put
in the genitive case—the function of which is to deter-
mine more exactly the application of the preceding
noun. As the result of the close connection subsisting
between the second noun and the first, the latter, now
said to be in the construct state (§ 79c) and therefore
without the article, is regarded as determined. There-
fore رمحم الفارس is ‘the (particular) spear of the
(particular) horseman’, and so with the suffixes, as
AS his (particular) spear. When the dependent noun
(nomen rectum) is undetermined, the governing noun
(nomen regens) is only defined in a generic sense
(§ 118 ¢), or is specialized in a way resembling the
generic definition, as ملك Griz a daughter of a king
= a king’s daughter.
110 124. cons.anp GEN, INSEP, 125, DETER.BY SUFF. 126. 00117 NOUNS,
Note. More rarely, in the latter case, the generic article
may be attached to the nomen rectum, as الشعير par barley bread
The genitive cannot be separated from the go-
verning word (nomen regens); adjectival and other
additions must therefore stand after the genitive, as
آلْمَلِكِ الْوَاسِمُْ ons the spacious house of the king.
When, according to our idiom, a genitive belongs to
two substantives, in Arabic it is made dependent on
the first of the two, and represented with the second
by a personal pronoun, as x55 Paul) 5) the mercy
and blessings of God.
Substantives conveying the idea of time sometimes
receive a specially strong determination by the addition
IT O4 Go 5
of suffixes (cf. 5 118a), as ليلد de he prayed his
night, i. e. the particular night in which he then was.
The close connection of two nouns thus standing
in the genit. relation makes sometimes possible their
fusion to one idea, although only the first component
admits of inflection. Thus الله Kors (gen. الله OAs;
ace. xl dus) the servant of Allah, as a proper name,
conveys but a single idea. Further illustrations will be
found in the numerous examples of composite proper
names, of which one of the elements is one or other of the
So sé 8 د
words أبن son, اب father, بنت daughter, el mother.
124.
125.
126.
0
127.
128.
127, SUBST. USE OF ADJJ. 128. EXPLICATIVE GENITIVE. +11
As the Arabs have no family names, properly so-called,
the name of a man or woman receives for distinction’s
sake an addition by the help of the above words, as
ته و © « -
yt (observe the order). Very اعباس Se Beer يزيل
frequently a name thus made up has become vhs
principal name, as that of the first Caliph me yh
Ca
for example, or that of the savant Kaas ابن names
of tribes, too, like ee كني are in the same way
simple notions (Einheitsbegriffe).
Not unfrequently an adjective which in our idiom
would be made to qualify its substantive, is in Arabic
raised to the rank of asubstantive, on which its proper
substantive is made to depend; thus silo كريم the
nee) of his character = his noble character;
2 9nbE
most men. The same construction is found اكثر الناسن
-- oF
with elatives also, as عيشة wl عَاشُوا they lived
the easiest life (cf. § 109).
A species of explicative genitive is found in cases
where a general conception is more explicitly defined
Pat دونو
by a following proper name, as اليين Ue)! the land
of Yemen.—Under this head may be reckoned the
امقوه
suffixes appended to numerals, as تلتتهم the three
of them.
112 129. cLAUSE AS GEN, 130. PERIPH. OF GEN. 131. CONS. OF INFIN,
A few words containing the ideas of time and
place may have, instead of a genitive, a whole clause
depending on them, as das Re on the day on which:
he was killed.
When a noun on which another noun is in the
proper sense (cf. § 134) dependent must remain absolu-
tely undetermined (see § 123), the usual genitive rela-
tion of nomen regens and nomen rectum is inadmissible,
and the connection of 1 two must be expressed by
a preposition, as لحم a e brother of yours, where
i is attrib. adjunct 0 zl (see § 1214).
Infinitives may govern their object according to
the laws either of verbal or of nominal government.
In the first instance their subject is subordinated in the
genitive; oy xs accordingly means: the circumstance
that Zaid has killed. If no subject is named, the object
may likewise stand in the genitive, so that the same
Poe
expression 3} dis may also mean: the circumstance
that Zaid has been killed, the fact of Zaid’s being killed.
When both subject and object are present, the former
is treated as a subjective genitive; the latter remains
in the accusative or J with the genitive is used as a
9-H, 3
periphrasis for the accusative, as pal oy Kio, | Ovo
129.
130.
131.
132. PARTICIPLE WITH OBJECT. 113
the circumstance that he was constantly drinking
wine; pee o> the circumstance that I am fond
of wine. J also stands after an undetermined infinitive
(e. g. in cases like § 113d and others) as List ae
Bers) I stood up to do honour to Zaid.
In the case of the participle, the object of the 132.
verb appears as the objective genitive, and when the
part. has the sense of the perfect it is determined by
طاو = و موعن
God is الله حالق الارض the genitive following, as
he who has created the earth = the creator of the
earth. With a present or future sense the governing
participle is not determined, as well RNS er As
every soul is one that will taste of death; ملاقيكم xt
he is one that will meet with you. If the participle
is in itself determined, the object stands in the
accusative or is expressed periphrastically with J, as
ese SUT he who strives after knowledge; the
same applies 0 the participle is strictly undeter-
mined, as xsl 36 طَالِنٌ one who wishes to take
blood revenge for his father ; ems) Us ما لْتْ I
have not ceased to love Islam.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.’ 8
114 133. UNDETERM. STAT. CONSTR. 134. IMPROP. ANNEXATION.
A special idiomatic use of certain generic words
is their combination with a following genitive. They
are determined or undetermined according to the
comes e@. g. 5° he who has, possessor of (cf. § 902),
Ske 4 the مه قمر of wealth, a rich man; sole
companion, Onis hie ale the man of sense; hal
penalty Lads أل people of the world—worldly people;
wen 90
jon aes e. بعض العلياء .عم one, some of the
learned ; A pee: change, then ‘another than’, as
sees $023 ك ites مات البلك the king died ang another
than a reigned after him; similarly eS one, as
acl one 0 them; finally ابن son, in certain common
idioms, as Xia ابن تلانين thirty years old.
A special kind of genitive relation is presented
by the so-called improper annexation, by which a
participle or a verbal adjective (see § 600) is more
strictly limited or defined by a following genitive, as
x - -
a man beautiful of countenance. يكل حسن المَجه
This construction is best rendered by a relative clause,
the subject of which will be the word that more clearly
defines the governing idea, in other words the genitive
of the Arabic will be the nominative of the English,
a man whose countenance is beautiful. In such a case
133.
134,
135, 136. THE VERBAL SENTENCE. 115
the governing word is not determined by the following
genitive; should the latter require to be determined,
it may receive the article (contrary to the rule in
§ 123) as ays pu dy the man of the beautiful
countenance, i. e. whose countenance is beautiful.
Chapter IV. The Simple Sentence. (§§ 135—151).
Sentences in Arabic are of two kinds, verbal and 135.
nominal.
The chief characteristic of a verbal sentence is the
fact that it always contains a finite verb; in fact, a
verb of this kind with its inherent (subject) pronoun
is in itself a complete verbal sentence, as ways thou
hast struck. This type of sentence always expresses
the commencement of some activity, understood in the
widest sense. If a special exponent of the idea con-
veyed by the subject of the verb is added, it follows
the verb in the case appropriate to the subject, viz.
the nominative, as ds; Gy he has struck, Zaid (has)
= Zaid has struck, whereby Zaid is singled out as
the agent.
In the verbal sentence, the finite verb does not 136.
always agree in gender and number with the following
§*
116 136. CONCORD IN THE VERBAL SENTENCE,
subject. The following are the chief points to be
noted in this connection:
The verb stands in the masculine singular before
sound or outer plurals, and generally before the masc.
forms of the dual.
The verb stands in the feminine singular 1) before
a sing. fem. if it follows the verb immediately, 2) be-
fore sound plurals feminine, 3) before the fem. forms
of the dual, and 4) before broken plurals (cf. next
sub-section).
The verb stands in the masculine or feminine singular
1) before a sing. fem. not immediately following the
verb, 2) before collectives, 3) before broken plurals
denoting male persons; if these plurals do not imme-
diately follow the verb, the latter in most cases takes
the masc. singular form.
Once the subject is introduced, the verbs following
a Son &.
agree with it in gender and number, as ME; جاء زيل
الله وَقَالُوا Xie, there came Zaid, Halid and ‘Abdallah
and they said. After collectives also the verb, in such
a case, often takes the plural, as يَتَبعوتة dat مضت
the young people set out to follow him. So too after
words like قوم and others. Still it is always possible
Ss
So اس
for the verb to remain in the singular, as وقريش
137.
137, INDEFINITE sUBJECT. 117
and the Kuraishites كبس من قن رت As حبسم
(the tribe Kuraish) imprisoned whomsoever they
could imprison.
A subject unknown, or purposely left unnamed,
is treated as follows (cf. French on dit, German man
sagt):
1) The verb is put in the 3, pers. sing. of the
passive (see § 103), as salt يسار they journey to him.
It is to be noted that this impersonal passive can
never stand without a complement (here sail).
2) Or in the 3. pers. plur. of the active, as Ju
they said.
3) Or in the 2. pers. sing. (or plur.) of the active,
- of LE eo %0f_LE
3 .ع in the Kur’én ارايت or ارايتم dost thou think?
do ye think? where it is not any particular persons
that are addressed, but people in general, as much
as to say ‘could any one suppose that... .?’ تقول one
might say (cf. Eng. ‘as you might say’).
4) There may be added to the verb a subject a.
(participle) formed from the same root, as dls JG or
Fit BOS ee 5 32% ده & ده لكو ره خم
قال القاكل some one said; ali قصر لم رأوا الراون
a castle, the like of which had never been seen.
Norz. The case of an undefined complement of a verbal
action being expressed by a substantive derived from the verb is
118 138. INDEFINITE SUBJ. 139. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
not unfrequently met elsewhere than in the above construction,
e. g. Wes ee aliquem (interfectum) interfecit, لآثم iy opty I
they did not fear the reproof of any reprover. 3
Occasionally, out of something that has been
mentioned, a story or the like, there arises an in-
definite subject corresponding to our “it”, which is
usually expressed by the feminine of the verb; for
example, after a fable or the like, Nes seas, and
it (i. e. this story) passed into a proverb.
The nominal sentence, in contrast to the verbal
sentence, expresses a 51016 or condition of the subject.
This last as a rule stands at the head of the sentence
in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. the nomina-
tive; in most cases it is determined while the predicate
is undetermined. The predicate may consist of one
or other of the following:
a) a simple noun, as عالم O35 Zaid is wise;
b) a preposition and its case, as lot 5 dosti the
man is in the house;
c) an adverb, as lige الله ne ‘Abdallah is here.
d) a complete sentence, which may be either a) a
verbal sentence, or 8) a nominal sentence; the whole
2 Soe
now becomes a tompound sentence, Exx.: a) Uae زيل
Zaid (he) is ill; sit uaye ds) Zaid, his father is
138.
139.
140.
141.
140, 141. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 119
Ss
53
ill; 8) هن bit BS Zaid, his father is aged (i. e.
Zaid’s father &c.). The sentence constituting the
predicate must contain a pronoun referring back to
the subject. The subj. thus placed at the head of
the sentence has been wrongly named the nominative
absolute.
Norse. The difficulty we feel in distinguishing between aye
Goo عوض مداع
زيد and ضرب Ke) 3 Zaid has struck, may be explained in this way.
In the first of these two expressions it is the act of striking that
is uppermost in the speaker’s mind, and the enquiry as to the
subject or agent from whom the act proceeds is answered with
ere Gyo
Zaid, on which the logical emphasis now rests, In ضرب 04}, on
the other hand, we start with Zaid as a given subject or agent,
and the question as to what is to be predicated regarding this
woe
subject or as to what this agent has done is answered by 4,
on which in its turn the logical centre of gravity, so to say,
comes to rest.
Between subject and predicate, when both are
determined, there ought to stand the pronoun of the
3. person, but this rule is not always observed, as
ee) 2 mul God is the living One.—Sometimes,
also, this pron. merely serves to emphasize the
subject.
In negative and interrogative sentences the predi-
See هر 5
cate stands before the subject, as زيل ups! Where is
Zaid? Wy ما لكم ين ye have no helper (in which
case the subject J, receives the addition of من
120 142. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
(= French du, &c.) as strengthening the negation). In
the same way a predicate consisting of a preposition
and its noun, or of an adverb, stands before the subject
when the latter is undetermined and is not more
المي defined by any qualifying word or phrase,
or © 90
as siya loti & in the house is a woman; من mere
a) among them are some who maintain.
Nots. A predicate of this sort may even stand before a
determined subject, but in that case the logical emphasis is on the
Dy- ° 5 فل Gy
subject, as 5 ,عندى Zaid is with me, while in suc Rey the
logical stress is on the predicate: Zaid is with me.
Verbal adjectives (§ 605), in virtue of the verbal
idea inherent in them, sometimes stand as ست
before the noun in the place of a finite verb, as dsj
oor 9 9
sel Sys Zaid, his father struck Amr = Zaid’s عبرا
father &c. The predicate, thus placed in advance,
frequently agrees in gender and number with its subject
5 99 9-6
following, as المولقة قلوبهم whose hearts have been
inclined (to Islam), but in respect of case it agrees
with the word on which this kind of sentence is
generally dependent, as ريقه was ni with a mouth,
. 5 ني ون Ge ee SS eons
whose saliva is sweet; الوانها pastes َأَيْنَا دواب we
found animals, the species of which differed from each
other, of different sorts. A circumstantial accusative
142.
143, 144, 145. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 121
(§ 1136) may also, in this way, refer to a following
subject, although it is really dependent on the preced-
ing verbs, as بوه Ust, ds) les Zaid came, while his
father rode.
When the subject of 4 nominal sentence consists 143.
of a demonstrative pronoun, the latter agrees in gen-
der with the following predicate, as هل جَاريَة this
is a female slave.
The predicate of ما not (often also that of لسن 144.
55 50 and 110, and of كان 110 when ooounring with a
negative) is introduced by رب as بيلك (ds Lé this is
no king.
In the relation of subject and predicate (cf. §119a) 145.
may stand in Arabic:
A thing and its dimensions, as ذِرَاعًا oe eed) a
the pillar is thirty cubits (high).
A thing and that which it resembles, as dks gallo.
Ly “sf selling is the likeness of (is like) usury; and so
wa ك (§ 95/), which likewise may stand in any of
the three cases.
ur
A thing and its parts, as olin Pl usyall dks 8
the kings of the Persians fall into four divisions.
122 146, NoM. SENT. 147. NOM. SENT. WITH inna, ‘anna.
Eur
A thing and its material الاضايع حَدِينٌ ass
Bar
one part of the toes was of iron and وَيَعضهَا اف
another of clay.
In certain cases a pronoun has to be supplied as
GSa->o 94
subject of a nominal sentence, as d4= له 3 it is
said of him “he is Muhammed”, i. e. he is called
Ga» - 9s
Muhammed, prop. = ديل >.
The particles sl (mam) behold, and ol that (cf.
theless, eas if, ae because, and other combinations,
and also لَعَلّ perhaps, Sal would that, are all follow-
ed by a nominal sentence the subject of which stands
eu, &
in the accusative, as كَريم logy إن behold (truly) 2.
is generous. The predicate of the nominal sentence
following أت or * if it should consist of an adverb
or a preposition with its case (see §§ 139, 141), may
stand before the subject, which must still be in the
accusative, as WS هنا wl verily (only in the rarest
cases translatable) here is a man; tery القلعة & oil
in the citadel is a prison.
Note. Sometimes a qualifying phrase consisting of a preposi-
tion and its case appears, in addition, before the subject, as ey o}
Bue إليك I have a request (to make) of thee.
146.
147.
'§ 96d), the compound particles RES (OS) never-
148, NOMINAL SENT. WITH inna AND ’anna. 123
The corroborative particle ل (§ 95 g) is frequently b.
148.
a.
prefixed to the predicate after a preceding إن as
Je sil GUT of truly our Esther is in error; or
even to the subject, as sas إن فى ذْلِكَ truly there-
in is an example.
After the particles above mentioned, the pronoun
of the 3. pers. sing, masc., as the so-called pronoun
of the fact, is sometimes used as the subject of a
nominal sentence; the predicate, in this يوا عد
of a comprere sentence (cf. § 139d), as ا د م a
Ory NT of a truth [- the fact is), the ail: oe do
واه
not prosper; جوأر Ble us كان si has it is rela-
ted that M. had four female slaves.
While ol introduces a new and independent sen-
tence, one introduced by ot اه forms part 09
070-7
another sentence, as =. ا شى aU) 3 تعلم “i
feces knowest thou not tak God is mighty over all;
here the sentence pegimming with 9 is really the ob-
ject. In أَعْمَى asl فى 5 dan wd there has never been
any doubt that ie is blind, the arbres with أو is
virtually in the genitive; in تزوج St ee it has
reached my ears that he is married, it represents the
subject.
124 148. SENTENCES WITH ’an und md.
0 Ez °
Verbal sentences introduced by أن also form in
this way an integral part of the principal sentence; a
distinction must be made, however, between two va-
rieties of this construction. If the sentence beginning
with oh asserts that something is now going on, or
that it has now ceased, the verb in the subordinate
clause remains in the indicative, as a من cast
(or simply 0 as cel Tam surprised that he takes
the field against me, isle of vil JUS {lake an
they did this until they died; if, on the other hand,
something is conceived as falling in the future and
therefore still uncertain, the subjunctive (cf. § 100)
is required, as 10S head wl لَك it falls to thee to do
80, Uaelall oe jos a eit it is fit and proper
that thou shouldst guard against shameful actions.
Nore. Sometimes the preposition which 80 the relation
oF the two pane 0 the sentence is omitted before el and 3 28
|
eT ذلك = o! ذلك this was for the reason that, and it was so,
because .عنة
In the cases discussed in the above sub-section
an infinitive may take the place of أل with the finite
ot
verb. Quite as frequently as أن in such cases, we
find ما with the finite verb (of course always in the
149. SEVERAL PREDICATES, 150. NEGATIVE sENTENCES. 125
2 شان - OnE 9 10)
indicative), as IO} ead عدبت مما I am surprised
that thou hast struck Zaid — 1035 KS .من The
use of this so-called infinitive-ma@ is very common;
thus we have it in LS (as) — made up of Sand ما
Goer -
with a verbal sentence: sy oye US 33 oy Zaid
was beaten as ‘Amr was beaten.
When more than one predicate is required in a 149
nominal sentence, they generally follow each other
without a conjunction (cf. §§ 122, 1138, note b), as
I am attentive and well-informed. إنى are عَلِيم
The same is the case with the predicates of the verb
(which frequently occurs as the substantive 0 كان 7
ن akin thereto sb 110), as RLY عب and the
تصِير آخر wah مختلطة مختلفة بعضها 5 قوى ى وبعضها
the kingdom vill in the latter days ae ضعيف
mixed and a prey to dissension, and one of which
one part will be strong and another weak.
In negative verbal sentences we find Lo with the 150.
perfect, as ما شرب he did not drink, or لم with the *
apocopated impf. (jussive, cf. 5 101¢).
With the impf. indicative Le is used, as wer lab
126 151. EXCEPTIVE PARTICLE.
he does not drink, or ل with the same tense en y
he does not, or he will not drink.
Other uses of Y are (u) with the apoc. impf. (cf.
§ 1010) and (0) with the perfect (cf. § 98d). As negativ-
ing an act in the past لا can only stand before the per-
ag امن © os =
fect when two perfects come together, as ولد ro لا
ve he neither believed nor prayed, or after sentences
with other negatives.
Norse. A preceding negative, even in the same sentence, is
- Pee nL ar القاها مي - o-
frequently resumed by means of ,لا as ولا صاحبة S&B) لم ييحجى he
did not find the village nor yet his friend again.
After the exceptive particle إلا that which is ex-
cepted stands in the accusative when a positive sentence
precedes, as إلا ويا gous eles the people came, ex-
cept Zaid; when a negative sentence precedes that
which is excepted is less frequently in the accusative,
but rather, as a rule, in the same case as the word
to which the limitation or exception applies, as ما
35 Jt جاء الْقَوم the people came not, except Zaid;
Os) ِل esl ما مورت I passed no one except Z.3
pitts
I have struck no one, except ما tosh eee إلا عبرأ
‘Amr. Very frequently in such cases it is the exception
that brings us the necessary logical complement, as
151.
152.
152. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 127
د مده 2
I have not passed (anyone) except م ما Ley إلا بين
Zaid, i. e. I have passed only Zaid.
IM, Bel o«
Norse. Also in the sentence آللة vy لا إلة (§ 111) there is no
God but Allah, the last word is in the nominative, because it is
the logical subject (there is no God, if not Allah; but Allah is).
ae) رقم ان wo ممه كد - -or -
In the sentence قوة إلا باللة العلى العظيم Ys لا حول there is neither
power nor strength except (in union) with Allah, the high and
Ba2- Poe
mighty One, the ideas of power and strength (8535 (حول must
logically be supplied before the exception.
Chapter V. Compound Sentence. (§§$ 152—161).
Co-ordinate sentences are as a rule joined together
by a copulative particle. Thus a simple co-ordinated
sentence is usually introduced by 6 95i), as JSS
JL, ds Z. entered and said. ف (§ 95¢), on the other
hand, is used when the connection of the two sen-
tences is less close, when, for example, the second event
follows the first only after a certain interval, as مرض
Gps ل O35 Zaid was ill; soon after he died. = according:
ly,is often used when the subject is changed, as 33 sla
له Gis Zaid came; and so I said to him. ols with
a following nominal sentence expresses the motive of
the action and is to be rendered by ‘then’, ‘therefore’.
5
128 153, 154. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Note a. In lively narrative prose the connective particles
are often dispensed with, particularly when the story is told in
dialogue form, the words of each speaker being then mostly intro-
duced by a simple gu.
Nore b. As illustration of the omission of the connectives
(asyndeton) must not be quoted certain combinations of two verbs
(ef. § 99 note a), in which the second verb denotes rather the
end to which some more general activity is directed; such, for
example, is the imperfect with verbs denoting a beginning. In
other cases, a perfect may be made to depend on a perfect, an
imperfect on an imperfect, an imperative on an imperative, as
2 صف ونم . aed امسا سي
كم اخطيها Igo they arose and fought with each other; تقاتلوا
arise and woo her.
Norge .ن Among the connective particles 4» may also, in
a certain sense, be reckoned, when it does not introduce a
result expected in the future (§ 100), but denotes the actual
completion of an action, as in the sentence 17 ie > ساو he
journeyed until he alighted at Mecca = he journeyed and at last
alighted &c. In such cases a may also be followed by an imperf.
indicative or by al with a nominal sentence,
Relative sentences or clauses are of two kinds,
those which do not accompany a noun and _ those
which do accompany and qualify a noun. As regards
the asyndetical connection of several qualifications,
the latter class is subject to the same treatment as
the qualifying adjuncts discussed in 55 120—122.
Those relative sentences that do not depend on
or qualify a noun are introduced either by الذي (see
§ 14a) he that, that which, whoso, &e., which is
153.
154.
155. RELATIVE CLAUSES. 129
declinable and always determined, or by the indeclin-
able pronouns من (he that, one that, whosoever, those
that, such...as) and ما (that which, a thing that, what).
The former is sometimes determined, sometimes unde-
termined. Exx: المشامة lest كدر ل بآياتنا هم Ceol
those that reject our cous ene they will be the people
of the left hand (Gadd is here in the nom. as being
the subject); Lik os ne Rei (the devil said:)
Shall I fall down before one whom thou hast formed
of clay من) is here in the genit.)? بأفواعهم eee
ما ليس بِقُلْوبِهِمْ they speak with their mouth what
is not in their hearts (Ls is here accus.).
A relative clause is made to follow and qualify
Ga
a substantive by means of الى only when the sub-
stantive in question (the antecedent) is determined;
ore
with it sali agrees in gender and number, as eee
lS الرَجِلَ الذى I struck the man that came. The
explanation of this is that الذى 1 is originally not a
relative in our sense of that word, but a demonstra-
tive, and as such it is always determined. The above
sentence, for example, means, strictly speaking: I
struck that man there, he came. On the other hand
Socin, Arabic Grammar.’ 9
130 156. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Ge
the relative clause is appended without الذي when
x oF -,
the antecedent is undetermined, as جاء ene we
I struck a man who came (prop. I struck a man, he
came).
Nore, will is also dispensed with when the antecedent is
only dietariniued in a general sense (i. .ع when it has the generic
article see 5 118c), as أسقارًا Sod الحمار er like an ass that
carries books.
The relative clause, which we have seen to be
strictly speaking merely a verbal or a nominal sen-
tence subordinated to an antecedent noun, ought by
rule to contain a pronoun referring back to this an-
tecedent, as eit Syl welt ee the man whose
father is rich; Kee pee cpl a كان he had a son,
who was named M. (in this case = pronoun is 1m-
plied in the verb); ds) od JS) a man who is
named Z. (prop. of whom it is said: [he is] Zaid, cf.
§ 146). The pronoun which in this way points back
to the antecedent may stand in any Bart of the rela-
tive عي thus in the sentence vere xtc Loy 5 قل
Sans st orb الذى the army had come up close to
him, regarding which he thought that it was still at
a distance, it does not appear till we reach the sen-
at ac
tence which is subordinated by yy! to the verb .ظن
156.
157.
157. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. 131
Collectives which denote living creatures (cf. § 136d)
may be followed here also by a plural verb, as
people that beli قوم يومنون
A s people a 2
coe 617 قوم wie
Note a. The omission of the pronoun, however, is not un-
frequent, especially when it would merely consist of a suffix of
دوم “A و s us a o-
os for 2b I regret what I said. على ما the 3. person, as A
Nore b. In certain cases the antecedent may be repeated in
the nelalive clause ; inileed, this is thie avaurile consimemon with
oes Gooe -
(idol) عدن كا عند css je سيعة كل قدي as or a3 gee 3
Hubal had seven arrows (for casting the lot), of which each single
arrow had writing upon it.
A special kind of subordinate sentence is the
circumstantial clause. Such a clause may consist:
1) Of a nominal sentence introduced by the particle
, the subject of which may have been already men-
end or may be something quite new, as Kiel ee 0
Amina died while she was return- وني راجعة Lt مكة
- 270% Go
ing to Mecca; : مات زيل وابنه صغير Zaid died while
his son was still young ; with a compound nominal
OL we
sentence Ki المَدِينة duaity سار وهو he journeyed taking
Medina as his goal. A sentence, whose predicate con-
sisting of a preposition and its case comes before
its subject, acc. to § 141, may stand as a circumstan-
2 aig
tial clause, without ” as ced eee خرجت )5(& > يدى 1
went out with a bow in my hand.
g*
132 158. TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
2) Of a verbal sentence frequently; in this case the
imperf. either stands alone or is preceded by .وقل
When the sentence is a negative one, the negative is
لا or les; or the verb may stand in the apoc. impf. with
لَم or ms (as the negation of the perf.). We may
also have the perfect with a, or oS» when negative
with Loy ; ; thus we get the polite Ness Os lS
Z. came laughing; ws ie ى يكون لي عُلام A JG
ss pal بلعث من os; Wale silyl (Zakariya)
said: how shall I have a male child, seeing my wife
is barren and I have reached too great an age; دحل
de penne الست لا he entered the room without
greeting me.
Notre. In contrast to the stiffer accusative of condition
(§ 113 b) the verbal circumstantial clause expresses the commence-
ment of the action; there is very little difference, however,
ve, Go ~- Gel dl دو
between زيد يضحك zl and Ka زيد ze.
In temporal clauses (also in conditional clauses)
‘which are formed with the particle Ist when, if, we find
in the protasis as well as in the apodosis the perfect
in the sense et our present or future, we راض fat
صعابه els yor when John takes the thing in hand,
its difficulties are easily surmounted.
158.
159.
159. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 133
Norte a. The imperfect may also stand after 15) if the action
takes place repeatedly. Should 15) be followed by a compound
nominal sentence, as ee past 15} when hell is heated, it is
considered that this is but another way of writing what we should
expect to find expressed in a verbal sentence (and so with ob):
Nore b. A sentence with 15) may also be inserted between
two closely related words, or rather it is to be megorded as form-
ing with its apodosis a complete unity. Thus: قُتضًا 151 yuu pose
ily لم there were two gates, which when ghey were opened
could not be shut (again). In the apodosis to 15) a perfect is found
where we should expect an imperfect (cf. 5 99c), as أسروا 13) ip
Bio وجلا واطلقوا جروا they were wont, when they captured a
man and then released him, to cut off his front lock of hair. Very
frequently a sentence like this, with 13], is inserted between ae
(§ 152 note c) and its proper verb, as jolt Jee 15) oe was
Oe
wy I followed him until I overtook him as he entered the nae.
Lo in the sense of ‘so long as’ takes the perfect, as
ما نمت أن شاكر so long as 1 live 1 55811 be thankful.
In sentences containing the notion of a condition
which is the case after ol if, من if anybody, ما if
anything, lige whatsoever, كيف ما ,كنف how, how-
soever, a when &c. the perf. is used in the sense
of our present or future, and so too in the apodosis,
gue os, | ole 3
as إن فعلت ذلك ملكت if thou 00688 that, thou
134 160, 161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
wilt perish; JL Ja oe whoso seeketh, findeth (if
any one seeks, he finds).
Nore. If the perf. is meant to retain its proper force in the
Judean ee verb كان is placed after رن as كان قميصة قن من wo}
RAROE! we if his camisole is torn in front, she has told the truth.
The particles above mentioned may also take the
* apoc. impf. in protasis and apodosis alike, as قصبروا ot
o 22- هن Yo
if ye wait patiently, God will help you. دملذكم ربكم
The apoc. impf. also stands in the apodosis after
an imperative (with conditional force) in the protasis,
as Ks تكن Leas عش live contentedly (i. e. if thou
live &c.) thou wilt be a king.
An apoc. impf. in the protasis may be followed by a
perfect in the apodosis, as إن تضير ظَفِرت if thou
wait patiently, thou wilt gain the victory. Ifthe clauses
are ae negative, we have لم with the apoc. impf.,
om -0- ه
as we لم om لم ol if he does not go away, I am
not satisfied.
Nore. Occasionally the apodosis of a conditional sentence
is wanting, e. g. إن كان هد if this is so—supply: then it is well
(Arab. és). 1
Before the apodoses of conditional sentences,
other than those discussed in § 159—160 we find the
particle رقف which is employed:
160.
161.
161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 135
1) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence, as a.
درن 5 َو
(oe ol if he is refractory, then alas for فويل له
him! Also before sentences with إن and before
interrogative sentences.
2) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, of which 6
the perfect is intended to retain its force as a perfect
(cf. § 159 note), eae too, when d3 (cf. 8 98 e)
is employed, as عكر els وا dash is iss ol
est de bees if they become Moslems, then have
they come to the right way, and if they turn aside,
then thou hast but to announce the message.
3) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence that con- ©.
- oF
tains an impf. with one of the particles yan دس uy
or that expresses a command or a wish, as إن كنت
if thou findst thyself among في قوم تحت & إناتهم
people, milk into their pail.
APPENDIX.
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
a. Names of the Days of the Week.
In the following list the various names may also
be used with the word for day, as omitted.
1. oS ST 253 (1st day) Sunday.
D5 orc) يوم (2nd day) Monday.
3. cus يوم و (83rd day) Tuesday.
4. AES St نوم (4th day) Wednesday.
. goal يوم (oth day) Thursday.
: mT يَوْمْ (day of assembly) Friday.
مه 5
ool يوم (Sabbath) Saturday.
or
for)
x
b. Names of the Months.
In the names of the months the word مب %, month,
may be prefixed in the constr. state throughout;
indeed, as the following table shows, some of the
names are always so written.
COMPUTATION OF TIME, 137
9¢ اناا
1, المكرم al-Muharram.
2, صقر Safar.
3. وبيع الأول yee the first Rabi‘.
4, ill ربِيع ye the second Rabi‘,
5. حيافى الأول the first Gumada.
6. HET جِمَادَى the latter Gumada.
GS -L-
7. >) Ragab.
8. شعبان Sa‘ban,
9. رَمَضان Ramadan (the month of fasting).
10. Js Sawwal.
11. ذو الْقَعْدَةٍ Du-lka‘da.
و9 موه
Du-lhigga (month of the pilgrimage, hagg). ذو si .12
c. The Year.
The Moslems reckon by lunar years of 354 days;
their first year is usually considered as beginning
at the date of the Christian era given below. In
calculating from one era to the other, it may be
reckoned that 33 solar years are equal to 34 lunar years.
138 COMPUTATION OF TIME.
In the works of European scholars it is customary,
by means of comparative tables, to give the precise
day of our era with which each Moslem year begins
(see the Bibliography). The following short table will
be useful in helping to a rapid approximation of the
date required.
The Moslem year 1 began 16. July 622 A. D.
0 ” » 101 ” 24. July 719 » »
” 0 0 201 0 30. July 816 « »
0 0 ” 301 0 7. Aug. 913 » »
” » 7 401 ” 15. Aug. 1010 » »
» ” 7 501 ” 22. Aug. 1107 « »
” ” ” 601 ” 29. Aug. 1204 » »
5 : 0701م + 6. Sept. 1301 « »
” 0 7 501 ” 13. Sept. 1398 » «
” 0 0 901 ” 21, Sept. 1495 » »
0 ” ” 1001 ” 8. Oct. 1592 » »
” ” ” 1101 n 15. Oct. 1689 » »
n ” ” 1201 ” 24. Oct. 1786 » »
” ” ” 1301 ” 2. Nov. 1883 » »
7 ” ” 1313 ” 24, June 1895 » »
LITERATURE.
A history of Arabic literature as a whole, or even of particular
parts of it, does not exist, for the work of Hammer-Purgstall (Litteratur-
geschichte der Araber, von ihrem Beginn bis zu Ende des zwélften
Jahrhunderts der Hidschret. 7 Bande. Wien 1850-56. 49°.) must
be described as premature and as useless by reason of its numerous
mistakes. An acquaintance with Arabic literature must therefore be
goat partly from works by Arabs on the history of their literature, partly
from European catalogues. In the course of the present century
numerous works, including not a few specimens of the earlier litera-
ture, have been printed in the Hast, especially in Cairo (government
press in Balak), Beirtt (where there is an excellent press managed
by the Jesuits) and Constantinople; also in Persia, India and the
island of Java. We must, in particular, mention the great quantity
of valuable Arabic manuscripts that still await publication both in
European and eastern libraries. A synopsis of such catalogues of
these MSS. as have hitherto appeared will be found below.
In the following selection, books of special importance are marked
with a star, those recommended to beginners with a dagger.
A. BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Il. Printed Works.
u Written by Orientals,
*Kitab al-Fihrist (by Ibn abt Ya'kiib an-nadim; wrote in the year 377
H., beg. 3. May 987) mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben von Gustav
Fliigel. Nach dessen Tode besorgt von Johannes Rédiger und
August Miller. 2 voll. Leipzig 1871—2.
*Lexicon bibliographicum et encyclopaedicum a Mustapha ben Abdallah
Katib Jelibi dicto et nomine Haji Khalfa (Haggi Halifa t 1658)
celebrato compositum, Ad codicum Vindobonesium Parisiensium
et Berolinensis fidem primum edidit latine vertit et commentario
indicibusque instruxit Gustavus Fliigel. Leipzig-London 1835—
1858. 7 voll. 49.
140 LirERATURE A.
3 Written by Huropeans.
Bibliotheca arabica. Auctam nunc atque integram edidit D, Christianus
Fridericus de Schnurrer. Halae ad Salam 1811.
+Bibliotheca orientalis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. i conte-
nant les livres arabes, persans et turcs imprimés depuis l’invention
de limprimerie jusqu’s nos jours tant en Europe qu’en Orient ete.
par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. — Bibliotheca orientalis.
Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. IJ. contenant 1. supplement
du premier volume. 2. Littérature de l’Orient chrétien. 3, Litte-
rature de Inde etc. Par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1861.
+(Buting) Katalog der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek
in Strassburg. Arabische Litteratur. Strassburg 1877. 4°,
Bibliographie des ouvrages arabes ou relatifs aux Arabes publiés dans
YEurope chrétienne de 1810 & 1885 par Victor Chauvin, I. Pré-
face. — Table de Schnurrer. — Les Proverbes. Liége 1892
(is being continued).
Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht tiber die morgenlandischen Studien,
von 1844 an in Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847 ff. The annual reports on works
published up to 1858 appeared in the Zedtschrift, those for the
years 1859—61, 62—67 (one part), autumn 1877—81 appeared
as independent publications.
Bibliotheca orientalis oder eine vollstandige Liste der im Jahre 1876
in Deutschland, Frankreich, England und den Colonien erschie-
nenen Biicher, Broschiiren, Zeitschriften, u. s. w. tiber die Sprachen,
Religionen, Antiquitaéten, Literaturen, Geschichte und Geographie
des Ostens, zusammengestellt von Karl Friederici. Leipzig.
8 years (to 1883).
Bibliography for 1883-83 (not completed) in the Literatur-Blatt fir
orientalische Philologie unter Mitwirkung von Dr. Johannes
Klatt herausgegeben von Prof. Dr. Ernst Kuhn. 1883—85.
*Orientalische Bibliographie . . . herausgegeben von A. Miiller, now
E. Kuhn. Berlin 1888 ff. 4
Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlindischen Gesellschaft.
I. Druckschriften und Ahnliches. Leipzig 1880 (a new and
largely augmented edition will appear in a year or two). :
A. ©. Ellis, Catalogue of the Arabic books in the British Museum
Vol I. A-L. London 1894.
For works from oriental presses an important guide is: E. J. Brill,
Catalogue périodique de livres orientaux I—IX, Leide 1883 ff.
(To parts I—VII Index de noms d’auteurs et de noms de livres,
ib. 1889).
A. 141 178:471015ئآ1
Il. Manuscripts.
(Die Handschriftenverzeichnisse der kéniglichen Bibliothek in Ber-
lin. Vols. 7 ff.), Verzeichniss der arabischen Handschriften
von W. Ahlwardt. 4°. 1. Band. Berlin 1887; 2. Bd. 1889;
3. Bd. 1891; 4. Bd. 1892; 5. Bd. 1893; 6. Bd. 1894. A 7th
and last vol. will appear soon.
(Halle) Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Ge-
sellschaft. II. Handschriften u. s. w. Leipzig 1881.
Verzeichnis der orientalischen Handschriften der Bibliothek des
Halle’schen Waisenhauses von Fr. Aug. Arnold und August
Miller, , اط der lLateinischen Hauptschule), Halle
1876. 49
(University Library, Letpzig) Die Refaiya. Von Prof. Fleischer:
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. 8,
8. 573—584,
(Municipal Library in Letpziy) Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum,
qui in bibliotheca senatoria civitatis Lipsiensis asservantur, ed.
Naumann. Codices orientalium linguarum descripserunt H. O.
Fleischer et Fr. Delitzsch. Grimmae 1838. 49,
Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium Bibliothecae regiae
Dresdensis, Scripsit et indicibus instruxit H. O. Fleischer.
Lipsiae 1831. 4°
Die arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha.
Verzeichnet von Wilhelm Pertsch. 5 Bande. Gotha 1878—1892.
(Also w. the title: Die orientalischen Handschriften der h. B.
zu G. Dritter Theil).
Die arabischen Handschriften der K. Hof- und Staatsbibliothek in
Miinchen, beschrieben von Joseph Awmer, Miinchen 1866. (Cata-
logus codicum manuscriptorum Bibliothecae regiae Monacensis.
Tomi primi pars secunda.)
(Tiibingen University Library) Catalog arabischer Handschriften in
Damaskus gesammelt von J. G. Wetzstein. Berlin 1863.
Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca aca-
demica Bonnenst servatorum adornavit Joannes Guildemeister.
Bonnae 1864—1876. 4°.
Katalog der hebraischen, arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Hand-
schriften der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek zu
Strassburg. Bearbeitet von S. Landauer. Strassburg 1881. 4°.
Die arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Handschriften der kaiser-
lich-kéniglichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien. Von Gustav Fligel.
8 Bande. Wien 1865—7. 4°. 1
(Copenhagen) Codices orientales Bibliothecae regiae Havniensis enu-
merati et descripti a N. L. Westergaard etc. II. Codices hebr.
et arab. Hafniae 1851.
142 LirERATURE A.
Codices Orientales bibliothecae regiae universitatis Lundensis recensuit
Curolus Johannes Tornberg. Lundae 1850.
Codices Arabici, Persici et Turcici bibliothecae regiae universitatis
Upsaliensis, Disposuit et descripsit C. T. Tornberg. Upsaliae
1849. 49,
(Paris) Catalogue des manuscrits arabes de la Bibliothéque Nationale
par le Baron de Slane. Pr. Fascicule. Paris 1883. Sec. Fasc.
1889. Trois. Fasc. 1895. 49% (To be continued.)
Catalogue général des manuscrits des bibliothéques publiques de
France. Départements. Tome VI (p. 437—482). Marseille. Par
M. Vabbé Albanés. Paris 1892. — Tome XVIII. Alger. Par
E. Faynan, Paris 1893.
(Leide) Catalogus codicum orientalium Bibliothecae academiae Lugduno
Batavae I. IL. auctore R. 2. A. Dozy. III. IV. auct. P. de Jong
et M. J. de Goeje. V. auctore M. J. de Goeje. VI. auctore
M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Bavatorum 1851—77. — Editio se-
cunda. Vol. I auctoribus M. J. de Goeje et M. Th. Houtsma.
Lugduni Bat. 1888.
(London) Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium qui in Museo
Britannico asservantur. Pars secunda codices arabicos amplectens.
Londini 1846.
(London) Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the
British Museum (By Charles Rieu). London 1894, 4°.
(London) A catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the library of the
India Office. By Otto Loth. London 1877. 4°.
( Oxford) Bibliothecae Bodleianae codicum manuscriptorum orientalium,
videlicet hebraicorum, chaldaicorum, syriacorum, aethiopicorum,
arabicorum, persicorum, turcicorum, copticorumque catalogus a
Joanne Uri confectus. Pars Prima Oxonii 1787, — Partis se-
cundae volumen primum arabicos complectens confecit Alexander
Nicoll, Oxonii 1821. fol.
(Cambridge) Catalogus Bibliothecae Burckhardtianae cum appendice
librorum aliorum orientalium in Bibliotheca Academica Canta-
brigensitts asservatorum — confecit T. Preston. Cantabrigiae
1853. 4°.
Catalogue of the Oriental Manuscripts in the Library of King’s Col-
lege, Cambridge. By Edward Henry Palmer: Journal of the
Roy. As. Society of Gr. Britain and Ireland. New Series III.
105 ff.
A descriptive Catalogue of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish Manu-
scripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. By E. H.
Palmer, Cambridge and London 1870.
(Escurtal) Bibliotheca arabico-hispana Escurtalenst sive Librorum
omnium Mss. quos Arabice ab auctoribus magnam partem Arabo-
Hispanis compositos Bibliotheca Coenobii Escurialensis complectitur
LITERATURE A, 143
recensio et explanatio opera et studio Michaelis Casiri etc. 2tomi.
Matriti 1760. fol. — Les manuscrits arabes de l'Escurial décrits par
Hartwig Dérenbourg. Tome premier. Paris 1884.
Catalogo de los Manuscritos Arabes existentes en la Biblioteca Na-
cional de Madrid (F. ©. Roblés). Madrid 1889.
(Florence) Bibliothecae Mediceae Laurentianae et Palatinae Codicum
manuscriptorum orientalium catalogus, Steph. Evod. Assemanus
recensuit. Florentiae 1742. fol.
(Venice) Catalogo dei Codici manoscritti orientali della Biblioteca
Naniana, compilato dell’ abbate Simone Assemant. 2 Part. Pa-
dova 1787—1792. 4°.
Remarques sur les manuscrits orientaux de la Collection Marsigli a
Bologne suivies de la liste compléte des Manuscrits arabes de
la méme collection par le Baron Victor Rosen. Roma 1885 (atti
della R. Academia dei Lincei. Serie 3%, Vol. XII).
(Milan) Catalogo dei Codici arabi, persiani e turchi della Biblioteca
Ambrosiana (Hammer-Purgstall): Biblioteca Italiana t. XCIV,
pp. 22 and 322.
Cataloghi dei codici orientali di alcune biblioteche d’Italia. 5 fase.
Firenze 1878—1892.
Catalogue des manuscripts et xylographes orientaux de la Bibliothéque
Impériale publique de St. Pétersbourg. St. Pétersbourg 1852.
(St. Petersburg) 8. Dorn, Catalogue des ouvrages arabes, persaus et turcs,
publiés 4 Constantinople, en Egypte et en Perse, qui se trouvent au
Musée asiatique de P Académie. — Chronologisches Verzeichniss der
seit dem Jahre 1801 bis 1866 in Kasan gedruckten arabischen,
tiirkischen, tatarischen und persischen Werke, als Katalog der in
dem asiatischen Museum befindlichen Schriften: Mélanges asia-
tiques tirés du Bulletin de l‘Académie Impériale des sciences de
St. Pétersbourg. Tome V. Livr. 5. 86. Pétersbourg 1867.
(St. Petersburg) Notices sommaires des manuscrits arabes du Musée
asiatique par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Pétersbourg 1881.
(St. Petersburg) Les manuscrits arabes de l'Institut des langues orien-
tales décrits par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Pétersbourg 1877.
(J. M. E, Gottwald) description of the Arabic Manuscripts in the
Library of the Imperial University of Kasan, Kasan (no date)
[1885]. In Russian. | 8
(Catro) Fihrist al-kutub al-arabiya al-mahfiza bil-kutubhana al-hedi-
wiye el-ka’ine biserai derb al-gamamiz. (Under the management
of Spitta and Vollers.) 7 vols. Cairo 1301—1308. Second
Edition. Vol. I 1310.
Catalog der mektebe ‘umiimiye in Damascus. Damascus 1299. 49,
Studia Sinaitica No. III. Catalogue of the Arabic Mss. in the Convent
of 8. Catharine on Mount Sinai compiled by Margaret Dunlop
Gibson. London 1894.
144 Literature B, C,
(Batavia) Friedrich, Codicum arabicorum in Bibliotheca Societatis
Artium et Scientiarum quae Bataviae floret asservatorum Catalogus.
Absolvit indicibusque instruxit L. W. C. van den Berg. Bataviae
et Hagae 1873.
B. INTRODUCTION.
General.
Borhan-ed-dini es-Sernadji (as-Sarnagi lived at the and of the 12th
century of our era) Enchiridion studiosi. Arabice edidit latine vertit
et lexico explanavit Carolus Caspari. Praefatus est H. O. Flei-
scher. Lipsiae 1838. 49°.
Einleitung in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Mohammed
und zum Theil spater . .. von ©. W. Freytag. Bonn 1861.
Orientalische Skizzen. Von Theodor Noldeke. Berlin 1892. Trans-
lated, with the title ‘Sketches form Eastern History’ by J. S. Black.
London and Edinburgh 1892.
De auctorum graecorum versionibus et commentariis syriacis, arabicis,
armeniacis persicisque commentatio quam scripsit Joannes Georgius
Wenrich. Lipsiae 1842. 1845.
C. CHRESTOMATHIES.
*+R, Briinnow, Chrestomathy of Arabic Prose-Pieces. Berlin and Lon-
don 1895.
+Chrestomatia arabica quam e libris Mss. vel impressis rarioribus
collectam edidit Fr. A. Arnold. ParsI. Textum continens. Pars II.
Glossarium continens. Halis 1853. -
+Chrestomathie Arabe, ou extraits de divers écrivains Arabes, tant en
prose qu’en vers 4 l’usage des éléves de l’école spéciale des langues
orientales vivantes; par A. J. Sylvestre de Sacy. 11. éd. corr. et
augm. Paris 1826. 3 vol.; Tome IV Anthologie grammaticale
arabe. Paris 1829.
+Chrestomathie élémentaire de lArabe littéral avec un glossaire par
H. Dérenbourg et J. Spiro, 2 ed. Paris 1892.
Joh. Godofr. Lud. Kosegarteniti Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus
mauuscriptis Paris. Goth. et Berol. collecta atque tum adscriptis
vocalibus, cum additis lexico et adnotationibus explanata. Lip-
siae 1828.
Georg. Guil. Freytag, Chrestomathia arabica, grammatica historica in
usum scholarum Arabicarum ex codd. ineditis conscripta, 8° maj.
Bonnae 1834.
Literature D, 145
{Thier und Mensch.vor dem Konig der Genien. Ein arabisches Mahr-
chen aus den Schriften der lauteren Briider in Basra im Urtext
herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici, 2, Ausgabe, Leipzig 1881. —
Arabisch-deutsches Worterbuch zum Koran und Thier und Mensch
von Fr, Dieterict, 2, Aufl. Leipzig 1894.
Brevis chrestomathia arabica. In usum scholarum ed. Joh, Bollig.
Roma 1881.
Chrestomatia ardbigo-espafiola por Fr. J. Lerchundi y Fr. J. Simonet.
Granada 1881.
Girgas and de Rosen. Arabic Chrestomathy (in Russian). St. Peters-
burg 1875, 1876. — Dictionary to the Chrestomathy and to the
Koran by W. Girgas. Kasan 1881 (in Russian).
An Arabic reading-book compiled by W. Wright. Part first, The texts.
London 1870.
Magani el-adab fi hadaik el-arab. 6. Ed. Beirut 1885ff. Jesuit Press,
6 vols. Sarh magani el-adab (Notes &c.). 4 vols. ib. 1886-8.
D. GRAMMARS &e.
Written by Orientals. به
*al-Mugzhir fi ‘ulim el-luga, philological Encyclopaedia by Galal
ad-din as-Suyiuitt )+ 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505, cf. for as-
Sujuti Goldziher in den Sitzungsber. d. kais. Akademie der
Wiss. zu Wien. Phil.-histor. Cl. LXIX. 80.1. 8.7 ff) Bulak
1282.
*Le livre de Sibawaihi, traiteé de grammaire arabe par Sibotiya, dit
Sibawatht ) 180 H., beg. 16. March 796). Texte arabe publié
d’aprés les manuscrits du Caire, de l’Escurial, d’Oxford, de
Paris, de St. Pétersbourg et de Vienne par Hartwig Derendourg.
Tome I, Paris 1881. Tome II, Paris 1889, — Stbawath2’s Buch
iiber die Grammatik nach der Ausgabe von H. Derenbourg und
dem Commentar des Sir&fi tibersetzt und erklart... von ©. Jahn.
1.—8. Lieferung. Berlin 1894. 1895.
*Al-Mufassal, opus de re grammatica arabicum auctore Abu ’l-Kasim
Mahmud bin ‘Omar ZamahiSario (az-Zamahsari + 538 H., beg.
16. July 1143) ed. J. P. Broch. Hditio altera, Christianiae 1879.—
Also: Ibn 7038 (+ 643 H., beg. 29. May 1245) Commentar zu
Zamach8ari’s Mufassal. Nach den Handschriften ..... herausgeg.
u. s.w. von Dr. ©. Jahn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. Zweiter
Band. Leipzig 1886. 49.
*Alfijjah, Carmen didacticum grammaticum auctore Ibn Malik ) 672H.,
beg. 18. July 1273) et in Alfijjam commentarius quem conscripsit
Ibn Akil (Ibn ‘Akil + 769 H., beg, 28. Aug. 1367) ed. Fr, Dietericd.
Lipsiae 1851. — Ibn ‘Akil’s Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik
Socin, Arabic Grammar.? 10
146 LITERATURE D.
aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male tibersetzt von 177.
Berlin 1852.
al-Aburrimiyya, Arabic Grammar by Jin Agurrum as-Sinhagi (7 723 H.,
beg. 10. January 1323). Often printed with ‘and without Com-
mentaries. Cf. E. Trumpp, Einleitung in das Studium der
arabischen Grammatiken. Die Ajrummiyyah des Muhammad bin
Daud. Miinchen 1876. On this work see Fleischer in Zeitschrift
der D. Morgen]. Ges. 30 (1876), pp. 487—513; reprinted in
Kleinere Schriften II (Leipzig 1888), pp. 75—106. Text also
printed in Briinnow’s Chrestomathy.
Kafiya fin-nahi, Syntax by Ibn al-Hagib ) 646 Hs beg. 26, April
1248). Frequently printed in the Hast.
Mugni al-labib, Grammar composed by 157 Hisam al- Riad (7 762 H.,
beg. 11. Nov. 1360). Another grammatical work by the same
author bears the title: Katar an-nada wa-ball as-sada; a third
Sudiir ad-dahab. All three works have been frequently printed
in the East.
al-Hariri’s ) 516 H., beg. 16. July 1143) Durrat al-gawwas, heraus-
gegeben von Heinrich Thorbecke. Leipzig 1871. (On errors of
speech). With the commentary of al-Hafagi, Constantinople 1299.
Cf. Le livre des locutions vicieuses de Djawaliki publié par
Hartwig Derenbourg (al- -Gawaliki + 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072)
in Morgenlandische Forschungen. Leipzig 1875.
Tartka mustahdata fi tashil al- hatt al-arabi. Calligraphic models
12 parts. ‘Beirut 1891.
8 Written by Europeans.
*Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber nach den Quellen bearbeitet
von ©. Fligel. Erste Abth], Leipzig 1862. Abhandlmgen der
Deutschen Morgenl. Ges. II. Band. Nr 4. (This work gives
a list of grammarians to about the year 1000 of our era).
Dr. C. P. Caspar’s Arabische Grammatik, Fiimfte Auflage be-
arbeitet von August Miiller. Halle 1887, — Grammaire arabe de
C. P. Caspari traduite de la quatriéme édition allemande et en
partie remaniée par E. Uricoechea, Bruxelles 1880.— A Grammar
of the Arabic Language translated from the German of Caspari
and edited, with numerous additions and corrections by W. Wright.
2. ed. 2 vol. London 1874—5. A 38rd edit. is announced.
Geo. Henric. Aug. Ewald, Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cum
brevi metrorum doctrina. Lipsiae 1831—1833. II vol.
*Grammaire arabe 4 Pusage des éléves de V’école spéciale des langues
orientales vivantes; avec figures. Par M. le Bon Silvestre de
Sacy. Seconde édition, corrigée et augmentée, 4 laquelle on a
joint un traité de la prosodie et de la métrique des Arabes. 2 tom.
Paris 1831.—Very important notes and corrections will be found in
1188411011 E. 147
*Fleischer, , Beitrige zur arabischen Sprachkunde“: Berichte iiber die
Verhandlungen der kg]. sachsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Classe. 1863 (p. 93ff.); 1864
(p. 265 ff.); 1866 (p. 286 ff.); 1870 (p. 227 ff); 1874 (p. 71ff.); 1876
p. 44ff.); 1878 (p. 64/f.); 1880 (p, 89ff.); 1881 (p. 117ff.); 1883
p. 72 ff.); 1884 (p. 272 ff); conf. 1856 (p. 1 ff.); 1862 (p. 10 ff.)
Reprinted in Kleinere Schriften von Dr. H. L. Fleischer, vol. I,
1st. and 2nd. parts, Leipzig 1886; the two last articles'in vol. II,
part 1. Leipzig 1888.
. J. G. iL. Kosegarten, Grammatica linguae arabicae pp. 1—688, without
title and date, incomplete. (Very rare).
Mortimer Sloper Howell. A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language,
translated and compiled from the Works of the most Approved
Native or Naturalized Authorities. Published under the Authority
of the Government of the N.-W. Provinces. In an Introduction
and Four Parts. 3 vols. Allahabad 1880. 1883. 1886.
Grammaire arabe composée d’aprés les sources primitives par le
P. Donat Vernier, 8. J. TomelI. Beyrouth 1891; TomeII. 1892.
Darstellung der arabischen Verskunst mit sechs Anhangen u.s. w. nach
handschriftlichen Quellen bearbeitet und mit Registern versehen
von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1830.
Théorie nouvelle de la métrique arabe précédée de considérations
générales sur le rythme naturel du langage par M. Stanislas
Guyard. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal as. 7 sér., t. 7. 8).
Die Rhetorik der Araber nach den wichtigsten Quellen dargestellt und
mit angefiihrten Textausziigen nebst einem literaturgeschichtlichen
Anhang versehen von Dr. A. F. Mehren. Kopenhagen 1853.
E. DICTIONARIES.
a Written by Orientals.
*Sahah al-arabiyye (or as-Sahah) by al-Gauhart (Abt Nasr Ismail ibn
Hammad + 393 H., beg. 10. Nov. 1002). 2 vols. Bulak 1282. 4°.
Lisan al-‘arab by al-Mukarram (Ibn Manazir al-Ifriki al-Misri al-Ansari
al-Hazra$i + 711 H., beg. 13. May 1311). 20 vols. 4°, Cairo 1308.
*al-Kamis al-muhit (or al-Kamus) by al-Firtizabadi ({ 816 or
817 H. = 1413/4). 2 vols. Calcutta 1817; 4 vols. Bulak 1279.
40, id. 1301/2. — With Turkish Commentary 3 vols. Stambul
1272 and later. — *Commentary to the Kamis with the title
Tag-el-artis composed by Sayyid Murtada az-Zubaidi (f 1205 H.,
beg. 10 Sept. 1790). 10 vols. Cairo 1307.
Muhit al-muhit by Butrus al-Bistani, 2 vols. Beirut 1286. (1869/70).
an-Nihaya fi garib al-hadit by Ibn “ل اه ) 606 H., beg. 6. July
1209). 4 vols. Cairo 1311 (Dictionary to the Traditions).
10*
148 LITERATURE E,
Asas al-balaga (Lexicographical Work, dealing esp. with the meta-
phorical meanings of words) by az-Zamahsart ) 538 H., beg,
16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1299.
Fikh al-luga, Synonyms by at-Taalibi ({ 429 H., beg. 14. Oct.
1037). (Frequently reprinted; esp. in an expurgated edition
Beirut 1888). Cf. Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften THI, 152.
Tdlabs (+ 291 H. = 904) kitab al-Fasih. Nach den Handschriften
von Leiden, Berlin und Rom herausgegeben, mit kritischen und
erléuternden Noten versehen von Dr. J. Barth. Leipzig 1876.
*Gawaliki’s al-Mutarrab (a work on Arabic loan-words, by 01-7
+ 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072), Nach der Leydener Handschrift
mit Erlauterungen herausgegeben von Ed. Sachau. Leipzig
1867. Cf. Z. 0. D. Morg. Ges. 33, 208.
Liber as-Sojutii (+ 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505) de nominibus relativis,
inscriptus Lubb al-lubab, arab. cum annot. crit. ed. P. J. Veth,
1-3. Lugduni Bat. 1840-51. 49
*Al-Moschtabih auctore Schamso’ddin Abu Abdallah Mohammed ibn
Ahmed ad-Dhababi (ad-Dahabi + 748 H., beg. 13. April 1347).
E codd. mss. editus a P. de Jong. Lugduni Batav. 1881. (On
homonym proper names).
Kitabo-’l-adhdad sive liber de vocabulis arabicis quae plures habent
significationes inter se oppositas auctore Abu Bekr zbno-"l-Anbart
(+ 328 H., beg. 18. Oct. 939) ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni
Bat. 1881.
6B Written by Europeans.
+0. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djeuharii
Firuzabadiique et aliorum libris confectum. Accedit index vocum
latinorum locupletissimus. IV. Tomi. Hal. 1830—1837. 4° maj.
G. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum ex opere suo majore in
usum tironum excerptum edidit. Halis 1836. 40 maj.
*Maddu-l-Kamoos, an Arabic-English Lexicon derived from the best
and the most copious eastern sources comprising a very large
collection of words and significations omitted in the Kamoos,
with supplements to its abridged and defective explanations,
ample grammatical and critical comments, and examples in prose
and verse: composed by means of the munificence of the most
noble Algernon, Duke of Northumberland and the bounty
of the British Government: by Edward William Lane. In two
books: the first containing all the classical words and significa-
tions commonly known to the learned among the Arabs; the
second, those that are of rare occurrence and not commonly
known. Book I, Parts 1—5. London 1863-1874. Ed. by
Stanley Lane Poole, Parts 6—8 (and Supplement) 1877—1893.
Lireratore E. 149
(From the letter k onwards, the book is incomplete; its continua-
tion is not to be expected.)
*Supplément aux dictionnaires arabes par R. 2027. 2 tom. Leyde
1881. — Cf. Fleischer, Studien نوطنا Dozy’s Supplément: Be-
richte ناوطنا die Verhandlungen der kgl. sachs. Ges. d. Wiss. zu
Leipzig. Philol.-histor. Classe 1881—1887. Reprinted in Kleinere
Schriften von H. .بآ Fleischer. Vol. II, pt. 1. Leipzig 1888.
Vol. 111 dd.
A, Kazimirski de Biberstein, Dictionnaire arabe-frangais I. II. Paris
1860.
+A. Wahrmund. Handwérterbuch der deutschen und neu-arabischen
Sprache. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I, 1. 2. II, 1. 2. —
11. Deutsch-neuarabischer Theil. Giessen 1870—77.
F. Steingass, The Student’s Arabic-English Dictionary. London 1884.
H, Anthony Salmoné, An Arabic-English Dictionary on a new System.
2 vols. Vol. I Arabic-English ; vol. II English Index. London 1890.
yArabic-English Dictionary by the late William Thomson Wortabet.
Second edition, revised and enlarged, Beyrout 1893.
George Percy Badger, English-Arabic Lexicon. London 1881.
7". Steingass, English-Arabic Dictionary for the use of both Travellers
and Students. London 1882.
English-Arabic Dictionary by Mr. J. Abcarius. New edition revised
and enlarged. Beyrout 1894.
+Vocabulaire arabe-frangais 4 Pusage des étudiants par un pére mis-
sionnaire de la Cie de Jésus; 3.60. Beyrouth 1893, (Arab.: al-
Faraid ad-durriye.)
Dictionnaire francais-arabe par le P. J.-B. Belot, 8. J. 2 parties.
Beyrouth 1890.
*Die aramiischen Fremdworter im Arabischen. Von Stegmund Frinkel.
Leiden 1886.
Dictionnaire détaillé des noms des vétements chez les Arabes. Par
R. Dozy. Amsterdam 1845.
Die Namen der Saugethiere bei den siidsemitischen Vélkern. Von
Fritz Hommel. Ueipzig 1879.
Die Waffen der alten Araber aus ihren Dichtern dargestellt. Ein
Beitrag zur arabischen Alterthumskunde, Synonymik und Lexi-
cographie nebst Registern von Friedrich Wilhelm Schwarzlose.
Leipzig 1886.
*Glossaire des mots espagnols et portugais dérivés de l’Arabe par
R. Dozy et W. H. Engelmann. 2. éd. Leyde 1869.
Glossario etimologico de Jas palabras espariolas de origen oriental por
D. Leopoldo de Eguilaz y Yanguas. Granada 1886.
Dictionnaire étymologique des mots frangais d’origine orientale par
Marcel Devic. Paris 1876. — Cf. Remarques sur les mots
francais dérivés de ’Arabe par Henrt Lammens, Beyrouth 1890.
150 LITERATURE F.
1" KORAN, ISLAM, LIFE OF MUHAMMED.
CHRISTIANITY.
u Written by Orientals.
Al-Coranus seu Lex islamitica Muhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo-
prophetae edita ex museo Abrahamt Hinckelmanni. Hamburgi
1694.
Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque pulcherrimis characteribus
descriptus, in latinum translatus, oppositis notis, auctore Ludovico
Marracio. Patavii 1698 fol.
+Corani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres-
sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretum lectiones et auctoritatem
recensuit indicesque triginta sectionum et suratarum addidit
Gustavus Fliigel. Editio stereotypa C. Tauchnuitzii. Tertium
emendata; nova impressio Lipsiae 1869 (I. 1834; recensionis
Fliigelianae textum recognitum iterum exprimi curavit Gustavus
Mauritius Redslob, Lipsiae 1837), (In Fliigel’s first edition and
in numerous oriental editions of the Koran, the enumeration of
the verses, which is indispensable for reference, is wanting).
*Concordantiae Corani arabicae. Ad literarum ordinem et verborum
radices diligenter disposuit Gustavus Fliigel. ditio stereotypa,
Lipsiae 1842.
Chrestomathia Corani arabica, notas adjecit glossarium confecit C. A.
Nallino. Lipsiae 1893.
al-Itkan fi ‘ulum al-kur’an, a sort of introduction to the Koran by
as-Suyiti (+ 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505); 2 pts. Cairo 1278. —
Sayuty’s Itqan on the exegetic sciences of the Qoran. Edited by
Mowlawies Basheerooddeen and Noorool-Haqq with an analysis by
A. Sprenger. Calcutta 1852—54.
al-Kassaf. Commentary on the Koran by az-ZamahSart (+ 538 H.,
beg. 16. July 1143). 2 vols, Bulak 1281. — The Qoran with
the commentary of Zamakhshari entitled the Kashshaf, an haqaiq
al-tanzil, ed. by W. Nassau Lees and Khadim Hosain and ’Abd
al-Hay?, Calcutta 1856.
*Beidhawit )] 685 H., beg. 27. Febr. 1286; or 692) commentarius in
Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibus et Lipsiensibus edidit
indicibusque instruxit H. 0. Fleischer. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846—48.
40, — Indices ad Beidhawii commentarium in Coranum confecit
Winand Fell. Leipzig 1878.
Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The commentary of El-Baidawi on Sura
111 trans. and expld. . . . by D. 8. Margoliouth. London 1895.
*Le Recueil des traditions musulmanes par Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail
al-Bokhari (al-Buhaot + 257 H., beg. 29. Nov. 870) publié par
Literature F. 151
Krehl. 1-111. Leyde 1862—68 (incomplete). — Oriental لك
edition: Sahih al-Buhari. 8 vols, Cairo 1290; also frequently
elsewhere, with and without commentary.
Sahih Muslim. Collection of the Traditions of the Prophet, composed
by Muslim 7 261 H., beg. 16. Oct. 874(. With commentary by
an-Nawawt ) 676 H., beg. 4. Juni 1277). 5 vols. Cairo 1283.
Masabih as-sunna, composed by Husain ibn Mas‘ad al-Farra al-Ba-
gawt ) 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122). 2 vols. Cairo 1294,
Thya al-ulum, by al-Gazali ({ 505 H., beg. 10, Juli 1111). 4 vols.
4°, Bulak 1289. — (Cf. Richard Gosche, Uber Ghazzalis Leben
und Werke: Abhdl. 0. kgl. Akad. 0. Wiss. zu Berlin 1858).
‘Abdu-r-razzaq’s Dictionary of the technical terms of the Sufies edited
by Aloys Sprenger. Calcutta 1845,
*Das Leben Muhammeds nach Muhammed ibn Ishak (+ 151 H., beg.
26. Jan. 768) bearbeitet von “Abd el-Malik 25: Hischam ) 218 H.,
beg. 27. Jan. 833); hrsg. von F', Wiistenfeld, 2 Bande. Gdttingen
1858—60. Oriental edition; Sirat ibn Hi8am. 2 vols. Cairo 1295.
(Translated into German: Das Leben Muhammeds 11. 8. w. be-
arbeitet von ©. Weil. Stuttgart 1864).
Muhammed in Medina. Das ist Vakidi’s (al-Wakid: + 207 H., beg.
27. May 822) Kitab al-Maghazi in verkiirzter deutscher Wieder-
, gabe herausgegeben von J. Wellhausen. Berlin 1882.
Sama’il at-Tirmid? (fF 279 H., beg. 3. April 892) Traditions respecting
the Prophet. Cairo 1273; with commentary 2 vols. Bulak 1296.
Usd al-gaba. List of 7500 persons who knew Muhammed, drawn
up by Ibn al-Attr (+ 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232). 5 vols. Cairo 1286.
al-Isabe, A biographical dictionary of persons who knew Muhammed
by Ibn Hagar (Ibn Hagar + 852 H., beg. 7. March 1448). Edited
in Arabic by Mowlawies Mohammed Wajyh, ‘Abdal-Haqq, and
Gholam Qadir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca Indica, Vol. I, Cal-
cutta 1856; vol. IV, Calcutta 1873. Vol. II, fase. 1—13; vol. ITI,
fase. 1—15.
Kigag al-’anbiya (Legends of the Prophet), by at-Ta‘labi ) 427 H.,
beg. 5. Nov. 1035). Cairo 1297 and often.
Pillar of the creed of the Sunnites by al-Nasafi, ed. by W. Cureton.
London 1843. ١ 1
Ad-dourra al-fakhira: la perle précieuse de Ghazali (al-Gazalt + 505 8,
beg. 10. July 1111) par ZL. Gautier, Genéve 1878. — Muslim
Eschatology.
Muhammedanische Eschatologie nach der Leipziger u. Dresdner Hand-
schrift zum ersten Male arabisch und deutsch herausgegeben von
M. Wolff. Leipzig 1872. .
Disputatio pro religione Mohammedanorum adversus Christianos
Textum arabicum (composed 942 H. = 1535) © codice Leidensi
cum varr. lect. edidit F. J. van den Ham. Lugduni Bat. 1890.
152 LITERATURE F.
Book of religious and philosophical sects by Muhammed al-Shahre-
sténi (a3-Sahrastani + 528 H., beg. 29. March 1153). Now first
edited by W. Cureton. 2 vol. London 1846, — Abu-l-Fath
Muhammad asch-Schahrastani’s Religionsparteien und Philo-
sophenschulen. Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt mit Anmerkuogen
von Th. Haarbriicker. 2 Bande. Halle 1850—1.
*(Bible) Kitab al-mukaddas (Old Testament), London. R. Watts,
1822. (New Testament 1. vol. 1821.) — f Beirut, various editions,
+ New York 1867.
Arabic Bible-Chrestomathy with a Glossary edited by Geo. Jacob.
Berlin 1888.
8 Written by Europeans.
Der Koran nach Boysen von Neuem aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
mit einer historischen EHinleitung und Anmerkungen von G@. Wahl.
Halle 1828.
Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu iibersetzt mit An-
merkungen von L. Ullmann, 6. Aufl, 1862.
Le Koran, Traduction nouvelle, faite sur le texte arabe par Mr.
Kazimirski. Nouv. éd. Paris 1854.
The Koran commonly called the Alcoran of Mohammed: translated
into English from the Original Arabic. With explanatory notes
taken from the most approved commentators. To which is pre-
fixed a preliminary discourse. By George Sale. London 1774.
Last ed. by E. M. Wherry “with additional notes and emenda-
tions”. 4 vols. London 1882—87.
J. M, Rodwell, The Koran, translated from the Arabic. 2. ed. Lond. 1876.
The Qur’an translated by E. H. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880. (The
sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars
and edited by F. Max Miiller, vol. VI. IX).
Der Koran. Im Auszuge iibersetzt von Friedrich Riickert, heraus-
gegeben von A. Miiller. Frankfurt a. M. 1888. 9
Die finfzig 4ltesten Suren des Korans in gereimter deutscher Uber-
setzung von M. Klamroth. Hamburg 1800.
+*Geschichte des Qorans von Theodor Noldeke. Gittingen 1860.
Uber die Religion der vorislamischen Araber. Eine zur Habilitation
etc. 6ffentlich zu vertheidigende Abhandlung von Ludolf KreAl.
Leipzig 1863.
*Skizzen und Vorarbeiten. Von J. Wellhausen. Drittes Heft. Reste
arabischen Heidentumes. Berlin 1887.
Kinship and marriage in early Arabia. By W. Robertson Smith.
Cambridge 1885.
*Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad nach bisher gréssten-
theils unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprenger. Zweite
Ausgabe. 3 Bande. Berlin 1869.
LiTERAaTuRE G. 153
+Das Leben Muhammed’s. Nach den Quellen popular dargestellt von
Theodor Noldeke. Hannover 1863.
*W. Muir, The Life of Mahomet and History of Islam, 4 vol. London
1858—61. 8rd edition 1 vol. 1894.
11235 Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. Dargestellt von Ludolf
Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des Muhammed. Leipzig 1884.
Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von J. Wellhausen. Viertes Heft. 1. Medina
vor dem Islam. 2. Muhammad’s Gemeindeordnung von Medina.
3, Seine Schreiben, und die Gesandtschaften an ihn. Berlin 1889.
+Was hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthum aufgenommen? von Abra-
ham Geiger. Bonn 1833.
*R. Dozy, Het Islamisme. Leiden 1863. 2 ed. Haarlem 1880; Essai
sur Vhistoire de l’Islamisme par R. Dozy trad. par V. Chauvin.
Leyde-Paris 1879.
*Snouck Hurgronje, Het mekkaansche Fest. Leiden 1880.
Die Mutaziliten oder die Freidenker im Islam. Hin Beitrag zur all-
gemeinen Kulturgeschichte von Heinrich Steiner. Leipzig 1865.
De strijd over het Dogma in den Isl4m tot op el-Ash’ari door Dr.
M. Th. Houtsma. Leiden 1875.
Zur Geschichte Abu ’l-Hasan al-A¥ari’s (+ about 324 H. = 935) von
Wilhelm Spitta. Leipzig 1876.
Exposé de la réforme de l’Islamisme commencée au IIIéme siécle de
VHégire par Abou-l-Hasan Ali el-Ash ari et continuée par son
école. Avec des extraits du Texte arabe d’Ibn Asakir par
M, A. F, Mehren. Vol. IL des Travaux de la 36 session du
Congrés international des Orientalistes.
1. Goldziher, Die Schule der Zahiriten, ihr Ursprung, ihr System
und ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884.
*Mohammedanische Studien von JI. Goldzther. Erster Teil. Halle
1889. Zweiter Teil. Halle 1890.
Polemische und apologetische Literatur in arabischer Sprache zwischen
Muslimen, Christen und Juden, nebst Anhingen verwandten
Inhalts, Von Moritz Steinschneider. Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde
des Morgenlandes VI, 3. Leipzig 1877.
G. JURISPRUDENCE.
al-Muwatta’ fil-hadit, Corpus juris composed by Malik 8 Anas
al-Himyari al-Madani ) 179 H., beg. 27. March 7 95). Frequently
printed; also with commentaries, e. g. that of az-Zarkani (f 1122
H., beg. 19. Febr. 1710). 4 vols. Bulak 1280.
Sunan Abi ‘Abdallah al-Kazwini, known as Iin Maga ) 273 H., beg.
8. June 886). Delhi 1282 and 1889. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Adi Daud Sulaiman as-Sigistani (f 275 H., beg. 16. May
888); freq. printed, e.g. Bulak 1280. 2 vols. (Legal traditions).
154 1115841185 H.
al-Gamet by Abi Isi Muhammad at-Tirmiédi (¢ 279 H., beg. 3. April
892), Frequently printed. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi ‘Abd ar-rahman an-Nasa’t )+ 303 H., beg. 17. July 915);
lithogr. in Kanfar 1847. (Legal traditions).
Fliigel, Die Classen der hanefitischen Rechtsgelehrten: Abhandlungen
der k, S&chs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften VIII. Leipzig
1860.
Jus Schafiiticum. At-Tanbih auctore Abu Ishak as-Shirazi (Abu
Ishak a3-Sirazt wrote the work in the year 452/3 H. = 1060/1)
edidit A. W. T. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Précis de Jurisprudence Musulmane selon le rite Chafeite, par Abu
Chodja (Adu Suga‘ + in the 6th cent. of the Flight). Publication
du texte arabe, avec traduction et annotations, par 8. Keijzer.
Leyde 1859.
Minhadj at-Talib, le guide des zélés croyants. Manuel de juris-
prudence musulmane selon le rite de Chafi'i (a3-Safi't). Texte
arabe, publié par ordre du gouvernement avec traduction et
annotations par L. W. C. van den Berg. 3 vol. Batavia 1882—1884.
(Cf. Snouck Hurgronje in the Indian Gids, 1884 ff. Elaborate
criticism.)
Précis de jurisprudence musulmane suivant le rite malékite par
Sidi Khalil (Halil lived in the 8th cent. of the Flight) publié par
les soins de la Société asiatique. Quatriéme édition. Paris 1877.
Maverdii (al-Mawardi + 450 H., beg. 28. Febr. 1058) constitutiones
politicae. Ex recensione Maxinuliani Engert. Bonnae 1853.
H. PHILOSOPHY.
a Written by Orientals.
Documenta philosophiae Arabum, edidit latine vertit illustravit Aug.
Schmélders. Bonnae 1836. — Cf. id. Essai sur les écoles philo-
sophiques chez les Arabes et notamment sur la doctrine d’Algaz-
zali. Paris 1842.
Tahafut al-falasifa (the mutual refutation of the philosophers) by
al-Gazali )+ 505 H., beg. 10. July 1111), Ibn Rusd ) 595 H.,
beg. 3. Nov. 1198), Hoga 2206 ) 893 H., beg. 17. Dec. 1487).
Cairo 1303.
Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus arabischen Handschriften
zum ersten Male herausgegeben. Von Fr. Dietericit. Leipzig
1882 (Abhandlungen des Berl. Or.-Congresses). Cf. Die so-
genanute Theologie des Aristoteles aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen versehen von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig 1883.
11 commento medio di Averro# alla Poetica di Aristotele pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio, Parte I. 11 testo arabo: Annali della Universita
11718815 H. 155
Toscane. Tomo XII. Pisa 1872. 40, - 11 testo arabo del com-
mento medio di Averroe alla retorica di Aristotele, pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Firenze 1875. (Pubblicazioni del R. Istituto
di studi superiori).
Alfarabi’s (ft 950 A. D.) philosophische Abhandlungen aus Londoner,
Leidener und Berliner Handschriften, Herausgegeben von Fried-
rich Dieterict?. Leiden 1890. — Id. aus dem Arabischen iiber-
setat. Leiden 1892. — Alfarabi’s Abhandlung der Musterstaat
aus Londoner und Oxforder Handschriften herausgegeben von
17. Dieteerici, Leiden 1895.
Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes (Idn Rud + 595 H., beg.
3. Nov. 1198). Herausgegeben von M. J. Miller. Miinchen
1859. — Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt. Miinchen 1875.
Le Guide des Egarés, Traité de Théologie et de Philosophie par
Moise ben Maimoun dit Maitmonide (+ 605 H., beg. 16. July
1208). Publié pour Ja premiére fois dans Voriginal arabe et ac-
compagné dune traduction francaise par Munk. 1-111. Paris
1856—66.
Kitab Ikwan as-safa wa-hullan al-wafa (between 950—1000 of our
era). 4 vols. Bombay 1305—1306. — A part of the rasail
ihwan as-safa has also been printed in Cairo, 1306. — Die
Abhandlungen der Ichwan Es-Safaé in Auswahl] herausg. von
F. Dieterict. 3 Hefte. Leipzig 1883—6.
Statio quinta et sexta et appendix libri Mevakif auctore “Adhad-eddin
el-Igt (+ 756 H., beg. 16, Jan. 1355) cum commentario Gorganii
ex codd. etc. edidit Th. Sérensen. Lipsiae 1848 (Scholastic
Metaphysics).
Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Scherif Ali ben Mohammed Dschor-
dschani (al-Gorgant + 816 H., beg. 3. Apr. 1418). Accedunt de-
finitiones theosophi Mohji-ed-din Mohammed ben Ali vulgo Ibn
Arabi (+ 638 H., beg. 23 July 1240) dicti. Ed. et adnot. critica
instruxit Gustavus Fliigel. Lipsiae 1845.
8 Written by Europeans,
Die griechischen Philosophen in der arabischen Uberlieferung. Von
August Miller, (Festschrift der Franckischen Stiftungen zu dem
50jahrigen Doctorjubilaum Bernhardy’s). Halle 1873. :
Al-Kindi (+ ca. 850 A. D.) genannt ,,der Philosoph der Araber“. Ein
Vorbild seiner Zeit und seines Volkes. Von G. Fliigel. Leipzig
1857. (Abhandlungen der D. Morg. Ges. 1. Band. Nr. 2). Cf.
Otto Loth, Al-Kindi als Astrolog, Morgenlandische Forschungen.
Leipzig 1875, pp. 261 ff. and Sir Wm. Muir, The Apology of
Al-Kindy 2 Ed. London 1887. ;
Al-Farabi, des arabischen Philosophen, Leben und Schriften. Von
156 11115184101813 I.
Moritz Steinschneider: Mémoires de Académie Imp. des Sciences
de St. Pétersbourg. VII. série, tome XIII, 4. 1869. 49.
Ernest Renan, Averroés et YAverroisme. 3. éd. Paris 1861.
Die Philosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert u. Chr. aus den
Schriften der lauteren Briider herausgegeben von 177.
Die Naturwissenschaft und Naturanschauung der Araber. Berlin
1861. — Die Propadeutik. Berlin 1865. — Die Logik und Psy-
chologie. Leipzig 1868. — Die Anthropologie. Leipzig 1871. —
Die Lehre von der Weltseele. Leipzig 1872. — Die Natur-
anschauung und Naturphilosophie, 2. Ausg. Leipzig 1876. —
FHinleitung und Makrokosmos. Leipzig 1876. — Mikrokosmos,
Leipzig 1879.
I. NATURAL SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
Wiistenfeld, Geschichte der arabischen Arzte und Naturforscher. .لل
Gottingen 1840 (rather out of date).
Histoire de la médecine arabe par le Dr. Luczen Leclerc. 2 vol.
Paris 1876 (insufficient),
Ibn Abi Useibia. Herausgegeben von August Miller. Konigsberg
i. Pr. 1884 (Ibn Abt Usaibi‘a + 668 H., beg. 14. May 1297
wrote this great work on the history of Arab physicians under
the title: ‘Uytn al-anba’ fi tabakat al-’atibba’. For which see
Vol. 11 des travaux de la 6¢ session du Congrés international des
Orientalistes 4 Leide. Leide 1884. .م 257 ff.).
Hayat al-haiwan (zoological work) by ad-Damirt ) 808 H., beg.
29. June 1405). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Cairo 1305.
Kitab al-kantn fit-tibb, Theory of Medicine, composed by Abu “Ali
ibn Sina (Avicenna + 428 H., beg. 25. Oct. 1036). 3 vols.
v Bulak 1294.
al-Gami* li-mufradat al-’adwiya wal-’agdiya (On the common medicines
and foods) by Diya’ ad-din Aba Muhammad 151 al-Baitar
) 646 H., beg. 26. April 1248). 4 vols. Bulak 1231.
Tedkire (Science of medicine) by 22544 al-Antakt ) 1005 H., beg.
15. Aug. 1596). 3 vols. Cairo 1294.
La Chimie du moyen-age . . . par M. Berthelot. Tome III. Lal-
chimie arabe comprenant une introduction et les traités de Cratés,
del-Habib, d’Ostanés et de Djaber . . . texte et traduction . .
avec la collaboration de M. 0. Houdas. Paris 1893. 49,
Matériaux pour servir 4 Vhistoire des sciences mathématiques chez
les Grecs et les Orientaux par M. L. P. 17. A. Sédtllot. 2 tomes.
Paris 1845. 1849.
Traité des instruments astronomiques des Arabes, trad. par J. J. Sé-
dillot. Paris 1834. 1835. Mémoires sur les instruments astro-
nomiques des Arabes par J. J. Sédillot. Paris 1841-45.
111884155 1 157
K. HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY.
a Written by Orientals.
Ibn Coteiba’s (ibn Kutaiba + 276 H. beg. 6. May 889) Handbuch der
Geschichte herausgegeben von Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Géttingen 1850.—
Oriental edition: Kitab al-maarif. Cairo 1300.
Abu Bekr Muhammed ben al-Hasan 151 Doraid’s (| 321 H., beg.
1. Jan. 933) genealogisch-etymologisches Handbuch herausgegeben
von F. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1854.
*Chronologie orientalischer Volker von Aldérini. Herausgegeben von
Eduard Sachau, Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. M. Ges. Leipzig
1878, 49. - Chronology of ancient Nations. An English Version
of the Arabic Text of the Athar ul Bakiya of Albirtini, or
“Vestiges of the Past”. Collected and reduced to writing by
the Author in A. H. 390—1, A. D. 1000. Translated and
Edited, with Notes and Index, by 0. 2. Sachau. Published for
the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland.
Roy 80. London 1879.
Ion Wadhih (Wadih) qui dicitur ai-Ja‘ qubt (Ya kabi) Historiae (composed
ca. 297 H.). 2 partes ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Batav. 1883.
Anonyme Arabische Chronik Band XI vermuthlich das Buch der Ver-
wandtschaft und Geschichte der Adligen von Abulhasan ahmed
ben jahja ben gabir ben dawid elbeladori elbagdadi (al-Baladurt
+ 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 893). Autogr. und herausgegeben von
W. Ahilwardt. Greifswald 1883.
Kitab al-ahbar at-tiwal verf. von Abu Hanifa Ahmed ibn Daud ad-Daz-
nawart (fF 282 or 290 H.) hrs. von Wladimir Girgas, Leiden 1888.
*Annales auctore Abu Djafar Mohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (at-
Tabari + 309 H., beg. 12. May 921), quos ediderunt J. Barth,
Th. Noéldeke, 0. Loth (ft), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke (+), 8. Frankel,
D. H. Miller, M. Th. Houtsma, §. Guyard (t+), V. Rosen et
M. J. de Goeje I, 1—5; 11, 1—3; 111, 1—4. Leiden 1879 seq.
Magoudi (al-Masudi + 346 H., beg. 4. Apr. 957) Les prairies d’or.
Texte et traduction par C.Barbier de Meynard et Pavet de Cour-
tedile. 9 tomes. Paris 1861—77. (id. 2 vols. Bulak 1283).
Hamzae Ispahanensis (Hamza wrote about 350 H.) annalium libri X.
Edidit J. M. E. 6011:0101. I. textus, 11. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae
1844, 1848.
Fragmenta historicorum arabicorum. Tomus primus continens partem
tertiam operis Kitébo ‘l-Oyun wa ‘lhadaik fi akhbari ’l-hadaik
(written after the 11th cent. A-D.) quem ediderunt M. J. de
Goeje et P. de Jong. Lugduni Bat. 1868. 4°.— Tomus secundus
continens partem operis Tadjaribo ’1Omami, auctore Jon Maskowath
) 421 H., beg. 9. Jan. 1030) edidit M. J. de Goeje. Lugd. Bat. 1871.
158 LITERATURE K,
*Ibn el-Athiri (ébn al’ Atir + 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232) Chronicon
quod perfectissimum (el-Kamil) inscribitur. Edidit Carolus Jo-
hannes Tornberg. 14 vol. Lugduni Bat. 1851—1876.— 12 vols,
Bulak 1290 and later.
Commentaire historique sur le poéme d’Ibn-Abdoun 1 * Abdiin
+ 529 H., beg. 22. Oct. 1134) par Ibn Badroun (lon Badrun
wrote in the same century) publié par R. P. A. 2027. Leide 1846
(Ouvrages arabes publiés par Dozy).
Historia saracenica arabice olim exarata a Georgio Elmacino (al-Makin
+ 672 H., beg. 18. July 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et
studiis Thomae Erpeniz. Lugduni Bat. 1625.
Ta’rih muhtasar ad-duwal (Outlines of History by Gregorius 3
|-Farag Ibn el-Ibri (Barhebraeus + 1286 A. D.) ed. by Salhani.
Beirut 1890. (The edition by Pococke, 2 tomi 4°. Oxonii 1663
is rare).
Elfachri. History of the Moslem Empires from the beginning to
the end of the Califate by 157 etthigthaga (wrote about 1302
A-D.). Edited in Arabic by W. Ahlwardt. Gotha 1860.
Abulfedae (+ 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Annales muslemici arabice
et latine. Opera et studiis J. J. 222512, nunc primum ed. J. ©.
Ch Adler. 5 vol. Hafniae 1789—94.—2 vols. Stambul 1286.
+Abulfedae historia Anteislamica, Arabice e duob. Codd. Paris.
edidit, vers. lat. notis et indicibus auxit H. 0. Fleischer. Lipsiae
1831. 49%
Ta’rih Zain ad-din ‘Umar ibn al-Wardi ) 749 or 750 H. = 1348/9).
2 vols. Cairo 1285. — An excerpt: Aegyptus auctore Ibn
al-Vardi. Edidit vertit notulisque illustravit Martinus Friéhn.
Halae 1804.
Ibn Haldin (+ 808 HL, beg. 29. June 1405) al-ibar etc. History of
the World. 7 vols. Bulak 1284. — Prolégoménes d’Ebn-
Khaldoun. Texte arabe par Quatremére. 3 vols. Paris 1858
(Notices et extraits des mscr. XVI, 1. 52511, 1. XVIII, 1.). —
Prolégoménes historiques d’Ibn Khaldoun. Traduction par Mac
Guckin de Slane. 3 vols. Paris 1862—68 (Notices et extr. XIX,
1. XX, 1. XXI, 1).
The Tarikh al-Kholafé; or history of the Caliphs, from the death of
Mohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated Jalal
al-Din Al-Osyooti (as-Suytit? + 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505), ed. by
W.N. Lees und Mawlawi Abd 21-8200. Calcutta 1857. Another
edition Cairo 1305.
*Liber expugnationis regionum auctore Imamo Ahmed ibn Jahja ibn
Djabir al-Baladsori (al-Baladurt + 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 892) ed.
M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 49.
Ouséma ibn Mounkidh un émir syrien au premier siécle des Croisades,
(1095—1188) par Hartwig Derenbourg. Deuxiéme partie, Texte
LITERATURE 1 159
arabe de Vautobiographie d’Ousima. Paris 1886 (cf. Carlo de
Landberg, Critica arabica II, Leyde 1888). — Ousima ibn
Mounkidh etc. par H. Derenbourg (French edition.), Paris 1889.
‘Imad ed-din el-katib el-isfahani ) 597 H. = 1201) Conquéte de la
Syrie et de la Palestine par Salah ed-din. Publié par le comte
Carlo de Landerg. Vol. I. Texte arabe. Leyde 1888.
Vita et res gestae sultani Almalichi Alnasiri Saladini auctore Bohad-
dino F. Sjeddadi (Baha ad-din ibn Saddad + 632 8. = 1234)
edidit ac latine vertit Albertus Schultens. Lugduni Batav. 1732
(1755), fol.
Kitab ar-raudatain f1 ta’rih ad-daulatain (History of Nureddin, and
Saladin) by Sihab ad-din al-Mukaddasi, called Abu Sama
(¢ 665 8. = 1267). Cairo. 2 vols. 1287.
Kitab al-ins al-Zalil bi-ta’rih al-kuds wal-halil. History of Jeru-
salem and Hebron by Mugir ad-din ) 927 H., beg. 12. Dec.
1520). — Cf. Histoire de Jérusalem et d’Hébron. Fragments de
la Chronique de Moudjir-ed-dyn traduits sur le texte arabe par
Henry Sauvaire. Paris 1876.
Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wiistenfeld (I Azraki. II Fakibi, Fasi, Ibn Dhuheira,
III Kutb ed-din. [IV German edition). I—IV. Leipzig 1857—61.
Hulasat al-wafa bi’ahbar dar al-mustafa (History of the town of
Medina) by as-Samhudi (¢ 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505). Bulak
1285. — Extracts translated by Wiistenfeld in den Abhandlungen
der k. Ges. der Wissenschaften zu Gdéttingen. Bd. IX. 1860.
*al-Hitat (Geography and History of Egypt) by al-Makrizi (+ 845
H., beg. 22. May 1441). 2 vols. Bulak 1270. — Histoire des
Sultans Mamlouks de l’Egypte, écrite en arabe par Taki-eddin-
Ahmed Makrizi, traduite en francais et accompagnée de notes
par Quatremére. 2 vol. Paris 1837-45. 4°
Abul-Mahasin ibn Tagri Bardii ) 874 H., beg. 11. July 1469) Annales
(History of Egypt) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. ©. J. Juynboll et B. Ff.
Matthes. TI, 1. 2. ed. 12, ©. J. Juynboll, Lugduni Bat. 1852—61
(incomplete).
Husn al-muhadara. History of Egypt by as-Suyutt ) 911 H., beg.
4. June 1505). 2 vols. Cairo. ١ 7
‘Agaib al-atar fit-taragim wal-ahbar (History of Egypt) by al-Gabarte
+ 1236 = 1821). 4 vols. Cairo n. d.
Ahmedis Arabsiadae (Ahmed ibn ‘Arabgah + 854 H., beg. 14. Febr.
1450) vitae et rerum gestarum Timuri, qui vulgo Tamerlanes
dicitur historia. (Ed.) Latine vertit etc, S. H. Manger. 2 vol.
Leovardiae 1767. 1772. — Cairo 1285,
The History of the Almohades by Abdo-’1-Wahid al-Marrekoshi
(wrote in the year 621 H. = 1224) edited by R. Dozy. 2, ed.
Leyden 1881.
160 1118847085 K.
Historia Abbadidarum praemissis scriptorum Arabum de ea dynastia
locis nunc primum editis, auctore R. 2, A. Dozy. 1-111. Lug-
duni Bat. 1849. 49, (Deals w. Spain).
Annales regum Mauretaniae a condito Idrisidarum imperio ad annum
fugae 726, ab Abu-1] Hasan Ali ben Abd Allah Ibn Abi Zer’
Fesano, vel ut alii malunt Abu Muhammed Salih ibn Abd el
Halim Granatensi conscriptos ed. illustr. Carolus Joh. Tornberg,
2 vol. Upsaliae 1843. 1846.
Histoire de Afrique et de ’Espagne intitulée al-Bayano ’l-Moghrib
par Ibn Adhari (de Maroc) (Ibn al-‘Idart wrote between 3
and 366 H.) et fragments de la chronique d’Arib (de Cordoue)
publiés par R. 2, A. Dozy. 2. vols. Leyde 1848—51.
Analectes sur Vhistoire et la littérature des Arabes d’Espagne par
Al-Makkari (al-Makkart + 1041 H., beg. 30. July 1631). Publiés
par R. Dozy, ©. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright. 2 vol. Leyde
1855—61. (Conf. Fleischer, Textverbesserungen in Al-Makkari’s
Geschichtswerke. Kleinere Schriften. Vol. II pt. 1. Leipzig
1888.) — Lettre 4 M. Fleischer contenant les remarques critiques
et explicatives sur le texte d’Al-Makkari par R. Dozy. Leyde
1871. — Cf. The history of the Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain
by Ahmed ibn Mohammed Al-Makkari. Translated and illustrated
by Pascual de Gayangos. 2 vol. London 1840—3. 4.
Bibliotheca arabo-sicula, ossia Raccolta di testi arabici che toccano la
geografia, la storia, la biografia e la bibliografia della Sicilia,
messi insieme da Michele Amari. Lipsia 1857; Appendice, ibid.
1875.
Alberunt’s India, an account of the religion, philosophy, literature,
chronology, astronomy, customs, laws and astrology of India
about 1030. Ed. by Edw. Sachau. London 1887. 4% — Id.
An English edition with notes and indices. By E. Sachaw. Londen.
2 vol. 1888.
Scriptorum Arabum de Rebus Indicis loci et opuscula inedita rec.
et illustr. Joannes Gildemeister. Fasc. pr. Bonnae 1838. —
Cf. id., Dissertationis de rebus Indiae, quo modo in Arabum
notitiam venerint, pars I. Bonnae 1338,
*Ibn Challican, Vitae illustrium virorum. E codd. nunc primum
arabice edidit variis lectionibus, indicibusque locupletissimis in-
struxit Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingae 1835—40, 4°. — Ibu Hal-
likan (} 681 H., beg. 11. Apr. 1282), 2 vols. Bulak 1275; another
edition 1299. — Ibn Khallikan’s Biographical Dictionary, translated
from the Arabie by Baron Mae Guckin de Slane. 4 vol. Paris-
London 1843—71. 49,
Fawat al-wafayat (supplement to Ibn Hallikan) by as-Salak al-Kutubi
) 764 HL, beg. 21. Oct. 1362). 2 vols. Bulak 1283.
Lirerature K. 161
The biographical dictionary of illustrious men chiefly at the beginning
of Islamism by Abu Zakariya Jahya el-Nawaw? (+ 676 H. = 1277)
edited by Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1842—47 (cf, idem for
the Life and Writings of el-Nawawi, Gottingen 1849, from the
4th vol. of the Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gitt.).
Nuzhat al-’alubba fi tabakat al’udaba. Concerning celebrated Men.
By Abul-Barakat al-~Anbari ) 577 H., beg. 17. May 1181),
Cairo lithogr. n. d.
8 Written by Europeans.
TVergleichungstabellen der muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit-
rechnung nach den ersten ‘lagen jedes muhammedanischen Monats
berechnet. Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Leipzig 1844.—
Fortsetzung der Wiistenf. Vergl.-Tab. bis 1500 von H. Mahler.
Leipzig 1887.
*Die Geschichtsschreiber der Araber und ihre Werke. Von F. Wiisten-
feld. (From the XXVIII. and XXIX. vol. of the Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. W. zu Gottingen). Gottingen 1882. 4°,
*Genealogische Tabellen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien...
Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt von Ferdinand Wiistenfeld.
Gottingen 1852. q.-fol. — Register zu den genealogischen Ta-
bellen der Arabischen Stimme und Familien. Mit historischen
und geographischen Bemerkungen von Ferdinand Wiistenfeld.
Gottingen 1853.
*Caussin de Perceval, Essai sur Vhistoire des Arabes avant l’islamisme
3 vol. Paris 1847.
Geschichte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der Sassaniden. Aus
der arabischen Chronik des Tabari iibersetzt und mit ausfihr-
lichen Erlauterungen und Erganzungen versehen von Lh. Noldeke,
Leyden 1879.
+*Der Islam im Morgen- und Abendland. Von A. Miiller, 2 Bande.
Berlin 1885. 1887. (Allgemeine Geschichte in Hinzeldarstellungen
hrsgg. von L. Oncken. Zweite Hauptabteilung. Vierter Teil).
*Geschichte der Chalifen. Nach handschriftlichen grosstenteils noch
unbentitzten Quellen bearbeitet von Gustav Weil. 3 Bande.
Mannheim 1846—51. — Geschichte des Abbasidenchalifats in
Aegypten. Von Gustav Weil. 2 Bande, Stuttgart 1860—2.
{Geschichte der islamitischen Volker von Mohammed bis zur Zeit
des Sultan Selim iibersichtlich dargestellt von Gustav Weil.
Stuttgart 1866.
+Geschichte der Araber bis auf den Sturz des Chalifats von Bagdad.
Von Gustav Fligel. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1864.
The Caliphate, its rise, decline, and fall from original sources by
Sir William Muir, London 1891. New and revised edition 1894.
Socin. Arabic Grammar.? 11
مدا
162 :11151ئ1 41015 L,
Handbuch der morgenlandischen Minzkunde. Von J. ©. Stickel.
2 Hefte. Leipzig 1865—70. 4°.
Catalogue of Oriental Coins in the British Museum, 9 vol. London
1875—1889.
The Mohammadan Dynasties, chronological and genealogical Tables
with historical Introductions by St. Lane-Poole. London 1894.
Die Charidschiten unter den ersten Omayyaden. Ein Beitrag zur
Geschichte des ersten islamischen Jahrhunderts von &. £.
Briinnow. Leiden 1884.
De opkomst der Abbasiden in Chorasan door ©, van Viooten. Leiden 1890.
Mémoires sur les Carmathes du Bahrain et les Fatimides par M. J.
de Goeje. Leiden 1886.
Die Statthalter von Agypten zur Zeit der Chalifen. Von F. Wiisten-
feld. Parts 1 and 2. Abhandlungen der Kgl. Ges. d. Wissen-
schaften zu Gottingen. 1875 (4%) Band 20. Parts 3 and 4,
ibid, 1876, Band 21.
History of the Moors in Spain to the Conquest of Andalusia by the
Almoravides (711—1110), by RB. Dozy. German Edition with
additions by the Author. 2 vols. Leipzig 1874.
Poesie und Kunst der Araber in Spanien und Sicilien. Von Adolf
Friedrich von Schack. 2 Bande. Berlin 1865. 2. Aufl. 1877.
*Culturgeschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen. Von Alfred von
Kremer. 2 Bande. Wien 1875—77.
Das Hinnahmebudget des Abbasiden-Reichs vom Jahre 360 H.
(918—919) von Alfred von Kremer. Denkschriften der philos.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie der Wiss. in Wien. Bd. XXXVI. 1887.
*Geschichte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegriff, die
Prophetie und Staatsidee. Von Alfred v. Kremer. Leipzig 1868.
Die Baustile. Historische und technische Entwicklung. Des Handbuchs
der Architectur (von J. Durm) Zweiter Theil. 3. Band, zweite Halfte;
Die Baukunst des Islam. Von Franz Pascha. Darmstadt 1887.
Prisse d’Avennes, L’art arabe d’aprés les monuments du Caire depuis
le VITe siécle jusqu’ a la fin du 591114. 3 vol. fol. 1 vol. 4.
Paris 1877. — La décoration arabe. (Extrait du grand ouvrage.)
Paris 1865. fol.
L. COSMOGRAPHY, GEOGRAPHY, ETHNOGRAPHY,
TRAVELS.
a Written by Orientals.
Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou Abdallah Mahommed ed- +
(ad-Dimiski + 654 H., beg. 30. Jan. 1256). Texte arabe publié
apres Lédition commencée par M. Frahn, et d’aprés les manu-
1115184501215 L, 163
scrits par M. A. F. Mehren, St. Pétersbourg 1866. 4°, — Manuel
de la cosmographie du moyen age, traduit de Varabe ,,.Nokhbet
ed-dahr fi ‘adjaib-il-birrjwal-bah’r“ de Shems ed-din Abou- Abdallah
Mohammed de Damas et accompagnée d’éclaircissements par M.
A. F. Mehren. Copenhague 1874.
*Zakarija Ben Muhammed ben Mahmtd el-Cazwini’s (al-Kazwini
682 H., beg. 1. Apr. 1283) Kosmographie. Herausg. von Ferd.
tistenfeld. 2 Bande. Géttingen 1848-9, — id. nach der
Wistenfeld’schen Textausgabe etc. iibersetzt von Hermann Ethé,
Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868.
Haridat al-‘agaib wa-faridat al-garaib, a species of Cosmography
composed by ‘Umar ibn al-Wardi (+ 749 or 750 H. = 1348 or 9).
Cairo 1292.
Specimen e literis orientalibus exhibens az-Zamaksarti, (az-Zamahsart
1 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) lexicon geographicum quod auspice
T. G. J. Juynboll edidit Mathias Salverda de Grave. Lugduni
Bat. 1856.
Al-Hamdani’s ) 334 H., beg. 13. Aug, 945) Geographie der Arabischen
Halbinsel. Nach den Handschr. herausgegeben von David Heinrich
Miller. Leiden 1884.
Das geographische Wérterbuch des Abu ‘Obeid ‘Abdallah ben ‘Abd
el-Aziz el-Bekri ({ 487 H. = 1094) nach den Handschvriften
zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Mailand herausgegeben von
Ferd. Wiistenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen, Paris 1876. 1877.
*Jacut’s (Yakut + 626 H. = 1229) Geographisches Wérterbuch aus
den Handschriften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten
der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wiistenfeld. 6 Bande. Leipzig 1866—73.
Jacut’s Moschtarik, das ist: Lexicon geographischer Homonyme,
Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Géttingen 1846.
Marasid al-ittila‘i, Lexicon geographicum ed 7. ©. J. Juynboll I—VI.
Lugduni 8. 1850—64. (An Extract from Yakit).
Géographie 0: Aboulféda (Abu l-fida + 732 HL, beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Texte
arabe par Reinaud et Mac-Guckin de Slane. Paris 1840. —
Géographie d’Ismail Abou ’l-Féda en arabe publiée par Charles
Schier. Ed. autogr. Dresde 1846. — Géographie d’Aboulféda,
traduite de Varabe en francais par Reinaud I (*Introduction
générale 4 la géographie des Orientaux) II, 1 Paris 1848; II, 2
par Stanislas Guyard, Paris 1883.
*Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum, Hdidit 21. J. de Goeje.
- Pars prima. Viae regnorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu Ishak al-Farisi al-Istakhri (al-Istahrt, cf. Zeitschrit
d. 2. Morgen]. Ges. Bd. 25, p. 42 ff.). Lugduni Bat, 1870.
Pars secunda. Viae et regna. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu ’l-Kasim Jin Haukal (ibid.). Lugduni Bat, 1873.
11*
164 Literature L.
Pars tertia. Descriptio imperii Moslemici auctore Al-Mokad-
dast (al-Mukaddas?t wrote in year 378 the H.), Lugduni Bat. 1876.
Cf. Description of Syria &c. by Mukaddasi. Translated from
the Arabic by Guy Le Strange. (Palestine Pilgrims’ Text Society),
Pars quarta. Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emen-
danda ad part. 1-111 auctore MM. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1879,
Pars quinta. Compendium libri Kitab al-boldan auctore Ibn
al-Fakth al-Hamadhani (wrote ca. A. D. 290). Lugd. Bat. 1885,
Pars sexta. Kitab al-masalik wal-mamalik (liber viarum et
regnorum) auctore Abu’l-Kasim Obaidallah ibn Abdallah ibn
Khordaddbeh (Ibn Hordadbeh wrote in the second half of the
ath cent. A. D.) et excerpta e Kitab al-Kharadj (K. al-harag
Taxbook) auctore Kodama ibn Djafar (Kudaéma ibn Ga'far
wrote about 930 A. D.). Lugduni Bat. 1889.
Pars septima. Kitab al-a‘lak an-nafisa VII auctore Abi Ali
Ahmed ibn Omar 2511: Rosteh (wrote before 301. H.) et Kitab al-
boldan auctore Ahmed ibn abi Jakob ibn Wadhih al-Katib al-
Jakubi (cf. p. 157). Lugduni Bat. 1892,
Pars octava, Kitab at-tanbih wal-ischraf auctore al-Mastdi
(cf. p. 157). Accedunt indices et glossarium ad tomos VII et
VIII. Lugduni Bat. 1894,
Description de lAfrique et de Espagne par Edrzst (wrote 548
H., beg. 29 March 1153) texte arabe publié pour la premiére fois
daprés les man. de Paris et d’Oxford avec une traduction, des
notes et un glossaire par R.,Dozy et M. J. de Goeje. Leyde 1866.
The travels of 1611 Jubair (Ibn Gubair end of the 6th cent.) edited by
William Wright. Leyden 1852.
Voyages d’Ibn Batoutah (Ibn Batuta + 779 H., beg. 10 May 1377).
Texte arabe, accompagnée d’une traduction par C. Defrémery et
B. R. Sanguinetti (Publications de la Société asiatique), 4 vol.
Paris 1853—58; deux. tir. 1874—77. — Cairo 1288.
B Written by Europeans.
F. Wiistenfeld, Die Litteratur der Erdbeschreibung bei den Arabern.
Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Erdkunde hrsgg. von J. ©. Liidde I,
1841, 8. 24-7
Carte générale des provinces européennes et asiatiques de Empire
Ottoman, dressée par Henri Kiepert 4 feuilles. Deux. éd. en-
tiérement corrigée et augmentée d’un index alphabetique. Berlin
1892.
(Karte von) Arabien zu 0. Ritters Erdkunde, Buch ILI, West-Asien,
Teil XII und 5111 bearbeitet von H. Kzepert, Neue berichtigte
Ausgabe, die Orthographie revidiert von Th. Noldeke. Berlin 1867
(D. Reimer),
111547 65 L. 165
Skizze der Geschichte und Geographie Arabiens von den 4ltesten
Zeiten bis zum Propheten Muhammad, Auf Grund der Inschriften,
der Angaben der alten Autoren und der Bibel von Eduard Glaser.
Zweiter Band. Berlin 1890.
Die alte Geographie Arabiens als Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte
des Semitismus von A. Sprenger. Bern 1875.
Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von
Otto Blau. Mit einer Karte: Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl.
Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559—592. 1
Arabien und die Araber seit hundert Jahren. Eine geographische
und geschichtliche Skizze von Albrecht Zehme. Halle 1875.
Palestine under the Moslems. A description of Syria and the Holy
Land from A. D. 650 to 1500. Translated from the works of the
medieval Arab Geographers by Guy le Strange. (London) 1890.
Relation de VEgypte par Abdallatif (‘Abd al-Latif al-Bagdadi + 629 H.,
beg. 29. Oct. 1231). Le tout traduit et enrichi de notes par
Silvester de Sacy. Paris 1810. 40. (The text of ‘Abd al-Latif
has been published by J. White: ‘Abdollatiphi Historiae Aegypti
compendium, Oxonii 1800).
*Beschreibung von Arabien, Aus eigenen Beobachtungen und im
Lande selbst gesammelten Nachrichten abgefasst von Carsten
Miebuhr. Kopenhagen 1772, 4°.
Carsten Niebuhrs Reisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andern um-
liegenden Liindern. 1. Band. Kopenhagen 1774. 2. Band. 1778;
English edtn. 2 vols. Edinb. 1792.
+*Travels in Arabia (1814) comprehending an account of those territories
in Hedjaz which the Mohammedans regard as sacred. By the
late John Lewis Burckhardt. London, 2 vol. 1829. — Johann
Ludwig Burckhardt’s Reisen in Arabien, enthaltend eine Beschrei-
bung derjenigen Gebiete in Hedjaz, welche die Mohammedaner
fiir heilig achten... Aus dem Englischen tibersetzt. Weimar 1830.
L. Burckhardt, Notes on the Bedouins and Wahabys. 2 vol. .لال
London 1831. — Bemerkungen iiber die Beduinen und Wahabi’s.
Weimar 1831.
Richard Burton, Personal narrative of a pilgrimage to El Medinah and
Meccah. 2 vol. London 1857 (and frequently, also in the Tauchnitz
edlition).
*Travels sein Deserta by Churles M. Doughty. 2 vol. Cambridge
1888. (With new map).
Adolf von: Wrede’s Reise in Hadhramaut, Beled Beny ‘Issa und Beled
el Hadschar. Herausgegeben... von H. Freiherr von Maltzan,
Braunschweig 1870. — Reise nach Siidarabien und Geographische
Forschungen im und iiber den siidwestlichen Teil Arabiens von
Heinrich Freihern von Maltzan, Braunschweig 1873.
166 85خ 18ر1 M,
Mekka von Dr. 0, Snouck Hurgronje. 2 Bande. Mit Bilder-Atlas,
Haag 1888. 1889.
+*An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians,
written in Egypt ete. By Edward William Lane. Various
editions. London. — Lane, Sitten und Gebrauche der heutigen
Egypter. Ubersetzt von J. Zenker. 3 Bde. Leipzig 1852.
E. W. Lane, Arabian society in the maida ages. Studies from the
Thousand and One Nights ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. London
1883. (Supplement to the “Manners and Customs”, containing
the notes to Lane’s translation of the Thousand and One Nights
(v. infra).
M. VERSE.
Delectus veterum carminum arabicorum. Carmina selegit et edidit
Th. Noeldeke, glossarium confecit A. Miiller. Berolini 1890.
Uber Poesie und Poetik der Araber von Wilhelm Ahlwardt. Gotha
1856. 4°.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alten Araber. Von Th. Noldeke.
Hannover 1864.
Kitab al-agant by Abu °l-Fara& ‘Ali al-Isfahant (¢ 352 H., beg.
30. Jan. 962), 20 vols. Bulak 1285. — Ali Ispahanensis
liber cantilenarum magnus, ed. Kosegarten, T. 1. Gripesvoldiae
1840. 4°, — The twenty-first volume of The Kitab al-aghani
ed. by Rud. E. Briinnow, Leyden 1888. — Tables alphabetiques
du Kitab al-Agani par .0ق 6. 1er fasc. Leide 1895.
Kitab raudat al- adab fi tabakat Suara’ al‘arab by Iskander-Aga
Abkarius (modern Beyrout scholar). Beirut 1858.
Hizanat al-adab wa-lubb lubab lisan al-‘arab, by ‘4b-dal-Kadir ibn
‘Umar al-Bagdadi (+ 1093 H.; beg. 21. Aug. 1629) 4 vols. Bulak
1291 (A work on poets; on the margin are printed the Sawahid
al“Aini). An index to the poets appeared from the pen of Guidi
in the transactions of the R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome 1887.
*The Diwans of the six ancient Arabic poets Ennabiga, ‘Antara, Tharafa,
Zuhair, ‘Algama and Imruulqais, ed. by W. Ahlwardt. London.
1870.
Bemerkungen iiber die Achtheit der alten Arabischen Gedichte mit
besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. von W. Ahlwardt,
Greifswald 1872.
Le Diwan de Nédiga Dhobyéni publié par 2. Dérendourg. Journal
asiatique 1868—9.
H. Thorbecke, “Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867.
Die Gedichte des‘ Alkama Alfahl. Mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben
von Albert Socin, Leipzig 1867,
Le diwan d’Amro’lkais par le Bon de Slane. Paris 1837. 40, With
Literature M. 167
Commentary by al-Batalytsi. Cairo 1308. Of. Amrilkais, der
Dichter und Kénig. Von Fr. Riickert. Stuttgart und Tii-
bingen 1843.
Septem Mo'allakat carmina antiquissima Arabum, textum etc. rec.
.ل A, Arnold. Wipsiae 1850 (out of print) — With commentary
by az-Zauzant ) 375 H., beg. 24, May 958). Cairo 1288,
A commentary by Aba Zakariya Sabya at-Tibried (+ 420 H., beg.
11. Aug. 1108) on ten ancient Arabic poems edited from the Mss.
of Cambridge, London and Leiden by Charles James Lyall.
Fasc. I Bibliotheca Indica, New Series, No. 789, Calcutta 1891;
Fasc. II ib. No. 840. Calc. 1894.
Der Diwan des Lebid. Nach einer Handschrift zum ersten Male
herausgegeben von Jiusuf Dija-ad-din al-Chalidt. Wien 1880.
Cf. A. von Kremer in den Sitzungsberichten der phil.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften 98. Bd. 2 Heft.
Wien 1881. — Die Gedichte des Lebid. Nach der Wiener
Ausgabe iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen versehen aus dem
Nachlasse des Dr. A. Huber herausgegeben von Carl Brockel-
mann. Leiden 1891.
Die Mufaddalijat (Anthology of the Grammarian al-Mufaddal; + about
170 H.) Nach den Handschriften herausgegeben von Heinrich
Thorbecke. Hrstes Heft. Leipzig 1885.
*Hamasae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in-
struxit, versione latina et commentario illustr. G. G. Freytag.
2 vol. Bonnae 1828—47 (collected by Abu Tammam 1 190, beg.
27. Nov. 805; at-Tabrizi Comm. + 420 H., beg. 11. Aug. 1108).
Another edition Bulak 1296. Cf. Hamasa oder die Altesten
arabischen Volkslieder, gesammelt von Abu Temmam, ibersetzt
und erldiutert von Friedrich Riickert. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846.
The Hudsailian poems contained in the manuscript of Leyden edited
in Arabic and translated with annotations by J. G. L. Kosegarten.
Vol. 1. London 1854. 40, — Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu-
dhailiten, arabisch und deutsch: Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von
J. Wellhausen. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884. Comp. 2. der D, Morgenl.
Gesellschaft 39. pp, 104, 151, 411 ff.
Die Gedichte des ‘Urwa ibn Alward. Von Th, Néldeke: Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gottingen. Hist.-Phil. Classe 11.
Gedichte und Fragmente des “Aus iin Hajar, gesammelt, herausgegeben
und iibersetzt von Rudolf Geyer: Sitzungsberichte der Kais,
Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Philos.-hist. Classe. Band
126. Wien 1892.
Anis al-gulasa’ fi diwan al-Hansa@ (The poetess al-Hansa is said to
have died A. 8. 24, beg. 7. Nov. 644 A. D.) Beirut 1888. —
Le diwan d’al Hansa’ traduit par le P. de Coppier et suivi de
fragments inédits d’Al-Hirniq. Beyrouth 1889.
168 LITERATURE M.
Ibn Higami ) 762 H., beg. 11 Nov. 1360) Commentarius in Carmen
Ka‘bi ben Zoheir Banat Su‘ad ed. Guidi. Lipsiae 1871. 1874.
Der Diwan des Garwal b. Aus al-Hutej’a (+ between 68—70 H.)
Bearbeitet von Ignaz Goldziher: Zeitschrift der D. Morgen.
Gesellschaft Bd. 46, 8. 1—53; 173—225; 471—527; Bd. 47,
8. 43—85;163—201. Also in a collected edition. Leipzig 1893,
Diwan sayyidna Hassan ibn Tabit ) 54 H., beg. 30. Aug. 683).
Tunis 1281.
Diwan @al-Ahtal, Texte arabe publié pour la premiére fois d’aprés le
manuscrit de St. Pétersbourg et annoté par le P. A. Salhani
8. J. Beyrouth 1891.
Divan de Férazdak ) 110 H., beg. 16. April 728) récits de Mohammed
ben-Habib d’aprés Ibn-el-Arabi publié sur 16 manuscrit de Sainte-
Sophie de Constantinople avec une traduction francaise par R.
Boucher. Paris 1870. 4%. (incomplete).
Masmi mu&tamil ‘ala hams dawawin (an-Nabiga, ‘Urwa, Hatim, ‘Al-
kama and Farazdak) Cairo 1293 cf. 2. der 2. Morgenl. Ge-
sellschaft 31, 667 ff.
Chalef elahmar’s (died after 155 H.) Qasside. Berichtigter arabvischer
Text etc. von A. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1859.
Diwan al-Buhtur?t (t 190 H., beg. 27 Nov. 805). Constantinople 1300.
Diwan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschrift
mit Benutzung anderer Handschriften herausgegeben von W. AAl-
wardt. 1. Die Weinlieder. Greifswald 1861. — Diwan Abi Nuwas.
Cairo 1277. (Abu Nuwas + about 195 H. = 810).
Diwan postae Abu-1-Walid Moslim 155621 ‘Walid al-Angari cognomine
Carto-"l-ghawani (Sart al-gawani + 208 H., beg. 16. May 823)
quem edidit M. de J. 60676. Lugduni Bat. 1875. 4",
Al-anwar az-zahiya fi diwan Abi’lAtahiya (AbwlAtahiya +
H., beg. 26. Dec. 835), Beirut 1886. 2me édit. 1888.
Diwan 2467 Tammam Habib ibn Aus at-Tai ) 231 H., beg. 7. Sept.
845). Cairo 1292.
Diwan amir al-muminin Ibn-al-Ma‘tazz al- Abbasi Ct 296 H. = 909)
Cairo 1891. Cf. Uber Leben und Werk des ‘Abdallah ibn al-
Mu'tazz von Otto Loth. Leipzig 1882.
Mutanabbii (al-Mutanabdt + 354 H. = 965) carmina cum commen-
tario Wahidii primum edidit, indicibus instruxit, varias lectiones
adnotavit Fr. Dieterict. Berolini 1861. 49,
Diwan Abi Firas al-Hamdani (f 357 beg. 7. Dec. 967). Beirut
1873.
Abwi-Al@ al-Mu‘arri ) 449 8. beg. 10 March 1057) Sakt ez-zind,
Poems with Commentary. 2 vols. Bulak 1286 and 1302 (Another
pe Beirut 1884). — Luztim ma Ja yalzam. Bombay 1303.
; Luztmiyat 2 vols. Cairo 1891. — Carol? Riew de Abul-Alae
1115841155 N. 169
poetae arabici vita et carminibus. Bonnae 1843. Of. Zeitschrift
der D. Morgen]. Gesellschaft 29, 304; 30, 40; 31, 471 ff.
Yatimat ad-dahr fi Swara’ ahl al-‘asr, Anthology composed by Abi
Manstr “Abd al-Malik at-Ta‘alitt ) 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 1037)
4 vols. Damascus 1302.
Anthologie arabe ou choix de poésies arabes inédites traduites pour
la premiere fois en francais et accompagnées d’observations critiques
et littéraires par M. Grangeret de La Grange. (Paris) 1828.
N. BELLES-LETTRES, ETHICS, ROMANCES.
*The Kamil of Hl-Mubarrad ) 285 H., beg. 28. Jan. 898), edited
for the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part. 1—12;
Leipzig 1864—92. <A reprint appeared in Cairo 2 vols, 1308.
al-Ikd al-farid, by Ibn ‘Abd-rabbiht al-Andalust ) 328 H., beg.
28. March 860) 3 vols. Bulak 1293.
Kitab al-Muwassa of Abu ’t-Tayyib Muhammed ibn Ishaq al-Wassa
(lived 860-986 A. D.) edited by R. Briinnow. Leéyden 1886.
Ibn Arabschah ) 854 H., beg. 14. Febr. 1450) Fructus imperatorum
et jocatio ingeniosorum edidit ©. ©. Freytag, 2. vol. Bonnae
1832. 4° — Oriental editions with the title: Fakihat al-hulafa’
wa-mufakahat az-zurafa’,
Makamat badi‘ az-zaman al-Hamadani (al-Hamadani, the predecessor
of Hariri died 398 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1007) with commentary by
Seih Muhammad Abdo. Beirut 1889. Other Makamat of Hama-
dani Constantinople 1298.
*Les séances de Hariri (al-Hariri + 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122),
avec un commentaire choisi pao Silvestre de Sacy; 1 60. Paris
1822; 2. éd. par Reinaud et J. Derenbourg., 2 tom. Paris
1847—1853. — With the Commentary of as-Sarzsi (+ 619 H.,
beg. 15. Feb. 1222) 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Makamat (Vowelled
text) 2. Ed. Beyrouth 1886. — The Assemblies of Al-Hariri,
transl. &c. by Thomas Chenery. Vol I 1867. — Do. Arabic text
with English notes &c. by F. Steingass 1895.
*Kitab Adad al-Katib (proply. an aid to elegant writing) composed
by Muhammed Abdallah ibn Muslim Iin Kutaiba (} in the
gnd. half of the 3rd. Centy. of the Flight). Cairo 1300.
Kitab al-matal as-s@ ir fi,’adab al-katib was-Sa‘ir (Treatise on Style)
by Ibn al-Atir al-Gazart ) 637 H., beg. 3. Aug. 1239) Cairo
1282.
Rasail (Letters) abi'l-Fadl badi* az-zaman al-Hamadani ) 398 H.,
beg. 17. Sept. 1007). Constantinople 1298.
al-Maidani (+ 518 H., beg. 19. Feb. 1124) Magma‘ al-amtal. (Collec-
tion of Proverbs). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Arabum proverbia,
170 LITERATURE N.
vocalibus instruxit, latine vertit, commentario illustravit ©. G.
Freytag I, 11, 111 (a b.), Bonnae 1838—43.
+Les colliers d’or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (az-Zamah Sart
+ 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) texte arabe suivi d’une traduction
francaise et d’un commentaire philologique par C. Barbier de
Meynard. Paris 1876.
412:5 hundert Spriiche arabisch und persisch paraphrasiert von Reschid-
eddin Watwat, nebst einem doppelten Anhang arabischer Spriiche
herausgegeben, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von
2. L. Fleischer, Leipzig 1837. 49.
Sirag al-mulik (Ethics and Anecdotes) composed by Abu Bekr Mu-
hammed at-Tartugi al-Maliki ) 520 H., beg. 27. Jan. 1126).
Cairo 1289.
Muhadarat al?udaba wa-muhawarat a3-Su‘ara’ wal-bulaga’, a species
of Ethics with Anecdotes by ar-Ragib al-Isfahani (7 in the
beginning of the 6th centy. of the Flight). 2vols. Cairo 1287. 4°
al-Mustatraf fi kull fann al-mustazraf, a species of anthological En-
cyclopaedia compiled by Ahmad al-Ib&ihi (lived about 800 H.)
2 vols. Cairo 1304. 1307.
Siret “Antar ibn Saddad, 32 vols. Cairo 1286. 1307. (another recension
10 vols. Beirut 1871). Cf. Antar, a Bedoueen romance. Trans-
lated from Arabic by 7. Hamilton. Part. I, i—iv. London 1820.
Alf 121132 wa-laila. Tausend und eine Nacht arabisch. Nach einer
Handschrift aus Tunis herausg. von Maximilian Habicht I—VIII;
fortges. von H. .لظ Fleischer IX—XII vol. Breslau 1825—43.
(This edition is not suitable for beginners in Arabic, as the
Janguage is in many parts strongly influenced by the vulgar
tongue). — The Alif Laila or book of the thousand nights and
one night, published from an Egyptian Ms. by W. H. Macnaghten.
4 vols. Calcutta 1839-42. 4 vols. Bulak 1279. — Original
in expurgated edition, Beyrout 1888—90. — Following the
earlier Bulak edition: The thousand and one nights commonly
called, in England, The Arabian nights’ entertainments. Trans-
lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 ed. 1841. Other editions
by Edw. Stanley Poole (the last 1882).
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
CHRESTOMATHY
OF
ARABIC PROSE-PIECES
DR. R. BRUNNOW.
Crown 8. Cloth pp. 334, price 8s. 6d.
DELECTUS VETERUM
CARMINUM ARABICORUM
Carmina selegit et edidit
THEOD. NOELDEKE.
Glossarium confecit
AUG. MUELLER.
Crown 8°, Cloth pp. 256, price 7s. 6 d.
‘ AN
ARABIC BIBLE-CHRESTOMATHY
WITH A GLOSSARY
Edited by
DR. GEORGE JACOB.
Crown 8°. Cloth pp. 64, price 2s. 6 d
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGALE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
PART II.
PARADIGMS, CHRESTOMATHY
AND
GLOSSARY.
Socin. Arabic Grammar.” A
EXERCISES IN READING. 31*
Berrys es Ge
CoE es ee a ae :
.5 وباكت اليتوق أم يسيبون النقط الشنيع تشبرا
mdi Godel Slab POT Geis آلَطّالِيِينَ
و مانأ Gree 5
Last 207 Soi sla ena ast السيّارة
*+ Sf التطهير YORI JOST CLES ah
6 قام الرسول we اعتل Gall #6 كاتبعرة ولا تتيعوا
* الْعَالِبُونَ ae عد حِرِب الله Dail ae آَلضَرِبُ ae QUT
يسم se sal قوم re لحر oe yo #* الشطح de
peel ae الْأمر LT إن a الطوبل ass we الرخين
& endl الصبية فى Sls يونا انبسط ع * dual
te las GEE ae الطوقان oe OFT year
a * GAM ge tI
OT أقرباء SSP LSE GILL كسَاءلوا yal مَلآن 05
ولا رسم 02 لح = -b
جمد م - وظ on 4 ف .8% 29 شاه م8 eo
leo, Xe) هذى 8 Le. AY إليهم Bere) العاليينى 8. 9.
beets oleate Pee eae pate كوس 2289
السمواث الرحين تانيهم Bay ينظروا = SF il
Ivo
LY -g “28 - سس مجر on 0 a ?9 مين
اتبعنى Jey الملايكة امش ALS إختلفوا yas
م عردو 94H, و و 5و 6 اوه وه عن wee Ger
أمدكم كل بوه يوبقهن بينهم مسقطة يشاء %
32* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
B. EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY.
ie نحم ما 52 ص جا صم eee - 770 a Be
16-29. احون حسن 25 عَضِبَ GIS Gdsst pas
- 2. LUG @ee Sipser ae wwe g ae ge ae 0 - -0o7%0
اطلع غيل past dole اضطجع انطلق erin!
a0 ee اعد ».-G-7 كا عوسي
gh ويج طحن Liki O15 بل مَتََرَصَدَى
* ورك Grbac pop أَصْلِحَ SH Le
099, فرقم ORY أَحْسْن Ly SS ST us
L551 lA) bass) حَمَلا كيل BE يَرْجِعُونَ SI
أطهرت GES SHY catti Les yap jis
yes es ae cee وه او مدو
تقسم NS تستاخرجين تقكّموا Gia
Shad (yi مُسَلْطِى إمْتَنَعْنَا Med أَسْنِدُوا sete
- @ 9 oe
an 2 o-oe 5
34-36. خروا Sow ينفك صب نورتل Carns يضمون Goo,
we b-0- واج w-o-
> Bes iG A و عن عد WOW حومنة “ore ee | امكو .زم
500 ao <7 ve? 0 :
م2
TABULA I.
Suffixa et Praefixa in flexione
verbi adhibita.
Imperfectum
—?2 @)
— 33)
— 36)
(so) ديق )8(
i
i) وحان 6
(=) ols 6)
ينعن ls ©)
(2) ens @
و حن )(
وت
سحن
— 56)
AY
Perfectum
Numerus
sing.
Persona
masc.
fem.
- masc.
. fem.
. masc.
. fem.
- masc.
fem.
masc.
. fem.
دم دع تم دم
“Moy *Z
"0818111 °*Z
*181 *
“OSBUL ع*
760519
snd
-811111 1
2066 6 goer 36 6» 6
: 2 :
sp | اميم | لصي
“O€ “06 -66
EXP | SEXP | ممم
->-666 جود “7 6€
CRY ERY SEX
“0606 “oer “oGe eee
snaty
‘T 71011 6م 3
I @ |yedooody carn igny SnAyeoIpUy
mung
wunjoapsaduy ai
WNATIOV
SIdins jues 1q.10A stuoIxay ewSipeseg
ye Tl VIOQdVi
I
TI ‘d.eugy
snany
-v4aduy
PARADIGMATA.
4*
jer
6069
jerry
66 >»
JEN
6066 >
renpfoseut © | عو | كص | aang | eee | صم
5*
PARADIGMATA
حم
9
0
fe}
3
59
ص
دا
6
1
3
wy
3
6
\
e
.
5
6
\
e
5
ع
\
6
5
o \
=:
6
\
i
\
ك3
35
2°
Ie
Ay
١
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi sani
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA III.
Imperfectum
Indicativus Bubjune-
tivus
pees و سمه
يقئل | يقتل
age | joe
2-9? ا د طم
دق | Logs
قا بي عله - 09
ws 3 Aas
2 -ok 2-08
xf ١ x34
--0? - Uy
Y oe Ni يقد
3 --09 - 09
لان x83 ألا Seance
1 -~ 09 اد OF
عدو إلا سير لان
2 ee Ie,
يقد \ و 3 8 | ون
= ee sees
eC
55 roo 209
8 sees { | en
o-09 oto
اتن oe cas
I-09 ا بيد
ذه haga
Perfec-
tum
6*
Persona
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
If
11
sdiyg
“Sst
"oY
"ssUd
‘0
821195
0110 101ظه2
1211110111011
snaryered uy
=
”
6290 *9
wunidrnieg
‘syjedoyyipend iqioa umidiys emsipereg
“AT VINEVL
snatpuyuy
7*
PARADIGMATA.
11111001417
15111108718011
11101
90011
111140979011
sep | mp | 26 دمر ري
“9S § ° 5- 9
wey
ov + 3
ny ome 7 ‘
OE ع 9
a 3 6 كك
ay ١ jap
ee 6. a) 6o¢0
ea ax exp
6»م-” 6 مم 7 ce
Tit 1 1
‘Tues 0194 11!0115ا 1
‘A 06119
6م
PARADIGMATA,
&*
0 SNATILUYUT
a wantd1o14.18 J
a 11110811901311
1415593 10
« wuidroyaeg
6 SnAtzelod uly
« wnyoojroduy
IAIOY wnyoo9}j»10g
gt
PARADIGMATA.
Impera-
tivus
PaRADIGMATA.
TABULA VI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae geminatae
Imperfectum
Subjunc-
te Apocopatus
Ge Gi- oe ف
| ررك
5 a ae
ys oe كدر
Si Sys
ees aE, of
peal افور افر
ie
bs)
فروا يفروا
wy يفررن
aoc ar
تفروا 1,585
aw Co Se te
Indica-
tivus
Perfec-
tum
Nume-
rus
10*
Persona
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc,
2. fem.
ParaDIGMATA, 11*
TABULA VII,
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi mediae geminatae
(Peeves Imperfectum افده
Persona hii
us 1 Indicati- | Subjune-| , 5
vus tivus ا
. G? ace Ga? G79 ودمه
3. masc.! sing. فر ye يفرريفر | يفر
oa? an? an? وده 0-0?
تغرر ~ a3 ys فرت ” fem. .3
يون لم ~ g-? دن
تغرر 3 تقر قفر masc. » Sy .2
wr? ون رن و 0
2. fem. ” yy تفرى تفرى تغرين
وو = 2 a at ood
ES ee ل ee
a وده ars are
3. masc. | dual. فر lye يفرا يفرا
73? - 2) a? ai?
3. fem. 0 تفرأ تفرا تفران فرتا
-?0 5 7 ao? are an?
2 > | فررنما gh || le =
a? ans a-? ans
يفروا يفروا يغرون فروا mase. | plur. ,3
0-99 - 0-99 - و4سهمه ? 0-
[ert | ep يتررن. | ayy? | مايه
ac? Ces ar? د | xo?
2. masc.) ٠ تغروا تفروا | تفرون فرتم
وسوس | وسوس | 3 26 ع ont?
2. fem. a 7 oor 3) a re wer
ao ? ae ac? we? wet?
: اديج ان oe ee
a re | 2
fee | fC | on | 14° | HC | » snANUyUy
6 Ss 6. Ss -- § o ف 9 -
4 4 4 LC «
i en) se ee a unidionreg
af bam | eee | )سمخ هذ | Bal 1
دمع 6 Bae ee me 0 وه wnzoajred uty
jak orf eel 2 oC of 1415881 1007.19
606 وهم Code gt ee ‘
4 Cl wg 3 4 2
ome, || ee لبعد
Jor ل | © | ye | A | eK « snaryesoduy
o- 0 مير 0 ze 16 a0 5 =! 2 2 0° ٠.
كريخ تبيخ XP 34 كع ey 4 3 » 0 1110710011
نام كا “o- 2 “re ‘9 0 ده
عن fick | mf fut fat لل mney umooneg
TTA TIA IA AI 111 1
PARADIGMATA.
WINALPDEIFUOD VePVUIWIS 98100111 IqJIA WHIdIHS 2111210870
TA 7
12*
13*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA IX.
Paradigma formarum selectarum flexionis
verborum hamzatorum
verbi tert.
Verbi sec. +
a
BO 9 رهظو
o 4 بوذن
اككب الام
3
و 2و
يلا
سانا
0
6
°
ذاه
0-7
عه اها جم
bo
Verbi pr. =
-E
اع
yl
Perf. Act.
Impf. 0
Imperat. »
Partic. =»
Perf. Pass.
Imperf. »
Imperf. Act.
Infin. 0
Perf. Act.
Perf. Pass.
Perf. Act.
Imperf. »
Perf. Pass.
Imperf. »
Il.
IV.
VITl.
14* PARADIGMATA.
TABULA X,
Paradigma flexionis verborum
primae radicalis pectic
Verbi pr. 9 | Verbi pr. 9 Verb pe 5 and Verbi pr:
Imperf. i Imperf. a 2 مع
I. Perf. = Act. ودع وَصل
2 + عي وز عويب
5 Imperf. » dias يدع
oe hice, : 03
Imperat. » دع صل
1
Imperf. Pass. hey, يودع
Infinit. Ele ,ودع KES
age ع6 رم
اودع أوصل IV. Perf. Act.
و و و A 0
بودع يوصل ” Imperf.
مودع موصل » Partic.
إبداع Infinit. Jest
تَدَعَ |اتَصَلَ لم VII. Perf,
Imperf. « uae يتيع
Perf. Pass. juast edsl
X. Perf. Act. إسنودع استوصل
Infinit. SLaasat | استيداع
15*
Impera-
tivus
Imperfectum
Indicati- | Subjunc- | Apocopa-
vus tivus tus
28 و قم زه :#
يقل Jy) | يقول
م 5ن a - Ie 2
00 تقول تقول
موه By يد عية 2
0-5 تقول تقو
7 7
تقولي | تقولي | تقولين
عو ه 9E - عو و
اقل إاقول دو
ee Dion هق - >43 -
يقولا |يقولا | يقولان
Je ده 5 - 3% =
2S (Meese oo
تقولا تقولا تقو دن
عل فون te) ون | ete
i | يَقُولُوا | يَقُولُونَ
oD 500 OIL 2
يقلن | يقلن | يقلن
tn hee 4 4 -
تقولوا | تقولوا | تقولون
i j ee Se i tse كك(
Hae 00 2 ;
نقول دعول
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis 5
Perfee-
tum
\
Ju
Nume-
rus
Persona
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
3, masc.
3. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
Impera-
tivus
-
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis co
Imperfectum
Indicati- | Subjunc- | Apocopa-
vus tivus tus
نض و 32 2 2+
امريد
ot, ee 2 2
,> ديدي 3
ye ~~ عجرم
oe ° - جضت قي و
Perfec-
tum
167
Persona
3. masc.
3. fem.
2: masce.
2. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. 5.
2. fem.
17*
Apocopa-
tus
وم »©
ond
gee0
Imperfectum
Subjunc-
tivus
PaRADIGMATA.
TABULA XII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi mediae radicalis 0 vel Ss
Indicativus
Perfec-
tum
Nume-
rus
sing.
n
Persona
3. masc.
. fem.
. masc.
2. fem,
. masc.
3. fem.
- masc,
. fem.
2. masc.
. fem.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
001
53
0
\
5
سس
ا
3
-9
بعد
igs
V4
om)
—4
j
a |
5
بك
sa
1
x
aT
1١1:
\
يي
\
9
لت
3
\
5
o
9
34 4
Ba wx rye ory ony “ad بحصي 38 0
اد ene ea 1 2 ا ta ae 0 1 ("0 1011116 [
ree | SP | Sep | فنا هس | لابه | SP | الم
ey | sy | yr | حر | | sm | Fp fovea سردم
eet) amp ار | ee | | ae) الكو | tee
هونا 9 و و و as ~ Ss
mp | تسةمدسو « | مج | حب | كس | صق | مجم | مس
os 0-90 n-90 go 6 م 8 2.6
تيبم | amp | ap | wp | me Pe | تسق | صمت
عي م “o- 6 عرزي ¢ s ‘ a ‘ eG “6 «
eer lore جردا lore men 0 eo ١و ‘oseul ‘a ‘IT)
مجاعم > 6-6> 626 3-8 o- or rar
yey | ا | ier | ap ay TP | AP | 1077
Dal | Npal | مم 'ى 6 | Moa 6 af weit wef? ¢
“POUL “QIOA | قم" "419A | "POUT "GIO A |"PEUT 124 ant "0104 ا ‘pene Wre)K
x TTA TIA AI I I I
wneEpnsas 5١ 4a © ovrpaur 18100304 umnidsys emSipeseg
"AIX 5
PARADIGMATA,.
18*
PaRADIGMATA. 19*
TABULA XV,
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae 5 jas
Imperfectum 5
Persona wie 57 Indica- |Subjunc- | Apoco- pied
tivus tivus patus
masc.|sing. es ye yy 582 .3
355 اتغرو )5385 B.fem. | ١ | esd]
و2 on “90-7 Ow -
!34 تغز تعزو 9535 غَرْوت « .22850 .2
iA ot 30k 398 57 20-7
27 أغزو اغزو عزوت ” 1
© اوس يس 1و سس ع :و eer
يغزوا يغزوا يغزوان غزوا masc.| dual. .3
yas | 585 | تغزوان رقا | « B.fem.|
r es ae’ ا ب و د كاج
اغزوا تغزو تغزوا ley غزؤوقيا ” 2
- 1 و ea و ae Se م مه
يغزوا يغزوا يغزون 152 masc.| plur. .3
oF a ? ee 2 - ب 3 = دده 2ه
يغؤون | يغزون | يغؤون | غزون » | fem. .3
أغروا Gyles] types) types) | عَوُوْتَمْ | » .قفص .9
BE) a BU ee eee eG عد جيه 3ه
ددهو ماه 9 “oer Pee
3° 35% غؤونا ” 1
Impera-
tivus
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XVI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae ى ACE)
Imperfectum
Indica- |Subjunc-
tivus tivus
عرنيى | ety
ونا زو ©
sty? | wt
قرمى sr]
تريى | ترمين
of - أ
st)! ارمى
يَرمُوا | يرمون
يَمِينَ Cee
نوا oil
Perfec-
tum
--
sy
Oo سس
An )
Nume-
rus
20*
Persona
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
PARADIGMATA. 21*
TABULA XVII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae ى 561 و Aer;
Imperfectum
Nume-| Perfee- Impera-
Persona |" os 7 Indica- | Subjunc- | Apocopa- | وريم
tivus tivus tus
5 2 08 ده a0. ao
3. masc.| sing. s®| برض يرضى إيرضى
oe 8 48s a ace
3. fem. | « ترض ترضى |ترضى |رضيت
- - له ما -o7 - hate “9
2. masc.| » رضيت oer أرض شرض قرضى
- - 0-07 @ مم or عي vane
2. fem. ” ed) ote ترضى ترضى is)!
Ee 2 و
يَرضَيَا masc.| dual. As) ghey Lia .3
3. fom. | « | Gedy yess كرضيًا ays
يرضون رضوا masc.!plur. .3
يرضين يرضينى يرضين رضين fem. n .3
إرضوا ترضوأ ترضوا ores وضيتم « .88م .2
or on - 0-0 اليد OO, 7 87 OF ميا - وه
5 الاين
0000م 061
» 0 017190511
1415581 140710
“000001
snatyesad wy
» 0214091390011
1411097000010
of
Le
© ym rqtea
I
CoP ف
2 -0§
GP | همك
هيع | هيم
(SS (a
(en qe
wv |i
هك | كيم
(oS) GS)
rr! of
© qm tqsea) $7 مو 304
I I
S joa
qm iqi8a
11
5١ وم
© ym qqrea
TI
S ya © geuyjn umsoqioa wnidays euSipeseg
“XIX 71113 ك7
5١ jaa
2 مرو 4
AI
PARADIGMATA,
22*
|
514771501
ا 0
019087100011 »
1 1115501
00001010011
» 0 90411819001501
40 000101
14119090 WAN Ooo J
S) jaa
© مو 4
IA
aS
t4\
3
هي
١
أ
3
5:
١:
0
a
0
١
1١
\
a“
5
”
\
.الس ء
الس
Ve .
\ 8
\
:هه
١:
\
1
S yea
C ممع مرو
TIA
S Jaa
Cam tqtea
x
23*
PARADIGMATA.
Si a ON:
66 عه 6 |
2 6 -
وهس
PARADIGMATA,.
TABULA XVII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi ultimae , vel ى
Imperfectum
Indicativus -قصه زطت8
tivus
“, &F eo?
2 es - 09
ere (ete
- 8 > سه 5
دعصي نعصى.,
oO) G2 ones
يُقَصَوا
١ 2
Perfec-
tum
Nume-
rus
sing.
24%
Persona
3. masc.
25*
determinati in
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XX,
Paradigma flexionis nominis
a) generis masculini
a) triptoti
cum articulo statu constructo
eas
Las
Shas
née
Be aa
Glas = Glaill
nls woladi
apd o stad
Gayla Gay laili
8) diptoti
es
ar SS
es |
آخران het
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Acc.
Dual. Nom.
Gen.-Acc.
Plur. Nom.
Gen.-Acc.
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Ace.
Dual. Nom.
Gen. Acc.
26* PARADIGMATA.
determinati determinati in
mac beeen tnt cum articulo statu constructo
Plur. Nom. الأحرون أخرون aye
Gen. Acc. آخَرى لآخَرين آخَرين
TABULA XXI.
b) generis feminini
a) triptoté
Sing. Nom. Rola الساعة aes
Gen. ساعة الساعة ساعة
Ace. uA سَاعَةَ
Dual. Nom. ysl gust Gali
Gen.-Acc. ساعتين oi ساعتى
Plur. Nom. Coe. Ser فقت
Gen.-Acc. olen آلسَاعات wk,
B) diptoti
GL
Sing. Nom. مرة
ceterum idem
Gen. Acc. Xue
27*
PaRADIGMATA.
TABULA XX.
a) generis masculini in __ desinentis.
eo
determinati determinati in
cum articulo statu constructo
قاضي القاضى
5 “Ue oe -
cal oss.
5 م 7 -
قاضِيا لقاضيان
oe 07 -
قَاضِيَّىَ الْقَاضِيَيُن
م ohe ar
3 -O- -
indeterminati
Sing. Nom.-Gen. vals
Acc.
Dual.Nom.
Gen.-Acc.
Plur. Nom. قاضون
Gen.-Ace. قَاضِينَ
b) nominis in 6, | desinentis.
a) triptote
-- ون ee - 0
99 ناس
-؟و aH
orca 9% ergo? ~
مصطقو yrtads|
o-
gies ies
Sing. Nom.- 260 3
eee S
ree
Dual. Nom.
ليمصطفيين مصطفيين Gen.-Ace.
3 86 #5 عد
x” 34
Plur. Nom.
- O77 Oo 9
Gen.-Acc. مصطفينى
PARADIGMATA,
determinati in
determinati
cum articulo statu constructo
28*
indeterminati
Sing. Nom- ١ Ze ~ cif gz
Gen Ave.f las Las!
Dual. Nom. وان as ان oat peers
8) diptoti
Sing. Nom.- 2, ow -%
noe sre spel Ss
id. دذيًا bene Uso
TABULA XXIII.
Paradigma nominis cum suffixis.
4 Spee S-
a) nominis masc. in singulari positi les; fem. KL.
(gen. s:Las) قصضابة
(قضَّابِهمًا Ugsleas (gen.
ره ,29
(gen. fetes) َشَائِهمْ
(قَصَابِهِن.508) صابن
cum suffixo 1. pers. sing.
0 ” 2.0» د masc
” ” 2. ” » fem
masc » ” .3 ” و
fem. » ” .3 ” ”
dualis » 2 ” 9
” 27 3. ” ”
n » 1. » pluralis
” ” 2 ” » msc.
7 7 2 0 ” fem.
” ” 3: ” ” msc.
” ” 3. ” 5 fem.
29*
PaRADIGMATA.
b) nominis in duali positi.
Nominativus cum suffixo 1.pers. sing. GbLas
» msc. JGLai ete.
» msc. duglas
n ” xolas
» fem. [gla ete.
”
”
”
” n
Gen.-Acc. 7
2 ”
n ”
c) nominis masculini in plurali positi.
. . . 3 an
Nominativus cum suffixo 1. pers. sing. قصابى
» msc. Islas etc.
a a =
=
» fem. قَصَابِيهًا etc.
27
» 2,
م 1.
» 2.
» 3.
» 8.
» 2,
» 1,
» 2,
n 3.
n 3h
ند ”
Gen.-Acc. 0
Nom.-Gen.-Acc. cum suff. 1. pers. sing. ساعائى
Nominativus » ” 2. » » Msc. نين عا فك
” ” ” 3. on ” ” ete etc.
Gen.-Acc, ” 2 2. 9 ” ” Ase
0 7 » 3. » no” ساعاد ete.
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
L
A. EXERCISES IN READING.
الكتاب معرفة يقبضون نظلم ذحيرة تهتدى جبيع 1
gays Lilo, غالب كين اسكدرا رجو حطط خلف
بالغ هروبة شمس فرزدق بصل ple اضطرمت قال
يغلظ Las ys ماض تشبه سلوك طاف ججم باع ورش
عسنات دري وظيفة شاه تقنص يحقك عصابة
2.3. صَلوة whine AG By jab داع Syed ds
GH 5G oy he WG 98 bs كبرى bis ts
te eel عدوم كَرْدَلِمْ سيقوا GOL
إئليس كالفون 121 993 JS) Lash إِمْضَاه »
Oe مم
5 0 2 Gas say Ble
% ملاك يدىء [OQ بطو زاقل حمراءغ
EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 33*
رغرده oe a ردن 2 2 - oe? وات اعد
eee ASUS ous by or. 37-38 توخرا ايتلفنا
pie Bo» oo wee re 2.
Seis 0 3 17 ص دع
Z a -~ oe
9 Be - 69 B
- 0G ee.
قت ene) bas دَعوا wre 0 توجهن '
مركن ا استيقظنا توقظ bi 33 2
Bos حرا و كاعد وحمي .5ه
,41-44 جزت نقوم Goal صر طرتم “zl بجَاعُوا casio’
إعوجت يكتار ore ملت See كن يبعن ish
ديه هوه سناع مو
JS كلك غيرثم يتصاحوا تم لمنا Keron ole
عد Gad Sy استعين pes
oF ماه و5
pos ees eal vil ونأ Oe يدق أمسيت 45-48.
1 بكي be sais! fs iS me cast 2 ل 4“ دون ian
إستثنيْث ge ROE Ge يَكْفِيَان nie rat
Ge 2 ore? o-- 6 =
ee يكلون ess) اشتروا أشقروا ie eet)
* elo 3945 pares =)! wed} Ssh ارموا
Socin, Arabic Grammar.?
0-0
34* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
eee oS - bh, wane Roce Yoo
يرون Linc wars] دلى وذيات نطوى تشاء جومون
2
Sen F ¥ 2
O72 6S أر اريت vey
9 29¢%G- 0 5 Pet 5 oe ود OF PF mone
حر كتموة ARAAD م ius نتيتها ترمبهم 5
2 متيو “Ge
Be
Ce ee Ae, oe 8 woe, Hr % ie. عي
Opie يََْضْهَا يُعَالجُوتيى ES لنبى USE بد
عر لني :يت
2 5 3 اين G
* ظلمناهن حدّتكن يُنَادِيهمًا
8 | هوه 8 وم 8 وات 98 رره: 6 09-- 6ه ويس )-
متكارب pais مسلط مكتوب oe خادم مرتعل
2% © جه 9 9 7-0 S$, - ¢ So,-2 GS oz 89 o 99 4ه
إقسام lait w= p= a a كود
Spe Star 6-8, Sues كمه وه ,$7 Brees
متمسك إظهار تكلم يكاح عر GLAS! استقبال
yo, 9 مه § G S225
oo عد و -E § وهع 8ق 8 o, 0-, نه » 2 9ن 32
سم إنفكاك اذن منقض حاج اإستتباب حب Spe
سمو 98 ae S ~ gt Br- o> ا 22 34 وت و
مزخوف مستقمر اعز AS مور إيبان So موخر
2
مُقيم صَائْر اختيار تائم pale مشار تصايم إطاعة
Swe 8: 2%, es) Sui-- §-,. 0 وها 5 98
استعانة تزوج ديل منهار بيت eet تضوف
Ge Gof % هدوهج 8 و Gis S$ 4 §
Anges إذقياد تغييمر مستقيم سوق مقام سمغيب
49.
53.
60-61.
67-71.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 35*
So wee? 2 aT eee ده 89 دم 5 وه Oe
مشى زهو مقضى ممين Ble] مفشى dein غان
8 2 - - @ gs wo furgy ie Fe Be oes
مناداة مستتنى مدعو انبغاء جفاء رضى غنى
875- 83 2 رهبت Crd, 8-7 y- 2 ون
معطى تسيية منتهى BLO مضى عدو MH
9 0 oe Few Sie 8 وو 8 هد © ول
.89 .88 سيوف أذيان رووس رجال عمال عشاكر e=
GS pooh Gar 2 Sa oF ووه وعره 2نو 9 2ه ره
S- oF و ات و -- S29 - %er-g G8
ضور بَوَاطِنْ ملابس أمكنة ble dys ISLE jas
nig? Bow qe se 2 yee pee pte ee B=?
رعاة جهل قتلى رعايا عشاريت اقرباء الهمة سكارى
\ 2ه و هو 6? © 7,
6,70F Se 89 اه © -- 1 و of
| امطار ممالك م كوم ضوق فيران أ ينام
يساح got سودان Syn كرادِيس أقوال عَشَايْرٌ
dels زايا 2b, fabs Shs Si مراع BSG
C. EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
Spd 135-98 عمرو غلامًا ds Geant Js wd بان
مم ote G 2 G ران و 29S ن ee 4# 0
الدار 96 dol لكم aver) البكر xolab, كانت”
is * ST Gale; eld g at
1 § 130, 2§ 990,
36* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
الله عافلا مَاصِرَا' في العلوم ae الت dpe والنصارى
كن أبناء الل TT Gow Gel; هَاربينَ' *
Se مهم ااي نوا 9 العا 5 Sheree 11007 و
الفقراء WE JE x منهم' لا تقتلواء Gog %
ف قن هو قو الل g WIG جد
8 9- 29 gv ف
Ss قاتلهم ابن العبّاسن" ag قلوبهم قاسية” ALT
Se Dene
aie a se ual ye QUIT sacl
العورية ost به UT Sige Sle ay Gaull
اند فجن ويه @ AE le عق ليق
3
7
الرجيم ae يُقيض الله الارض “age القِيَامَةٍ spay
2 يه راسم 5 By a? * كاين Lon و 55 29 يو
السياء ببييند ثم يقول SUAS Lt اين 5
م وعدن L 8 ot . فع 292 Pee . Bree
الدرض 3% اتبعوا & هذه oS a Rist Loot! ورقة
0% اقم 707 AS 5 pa Pao Bae on بين pee EG UO دوو ماه
1$110.149. 251366 2. 3 5 124. 4§113b. 5 5 118 ». 6 § 137
15 1219. 5 5 1015. 9 5 113d. 10 5 108. 11 5 126, 12 5 109, 13 5 0.
1١4 5 92. 15§113a, 15 5 141. 175 108, 18 5622.195 98ef. 20§ 116.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 37*
gc و GEL نه Fon
عِيَادَة el KOR 5455 yee وانه! نيى
3 5و bo- بي sae ل
es د التواضع GAG, : أن سيوذى Ko SI me
3 Spall
Ma; Geb Miss GMs EE Lali t00e
Ph يكل ىه * be لهم مير ور ob
265 0 a فى SLIT سا ةم شَرِيك el
Odi, ib نور وَالْعَفْلَةٌ aoa ُبراَقَعْلا م
03 es اع
vd الأخبق x من علامة 3K aes past 5 IMS
3
ost x one shai ee) on jest TA
3-0 Ge -0G
tel € Si alab! ou ei 00 6 البطنة
1 85 147a, 148b note. 2§ 99a, cf. note b. 3 § 123.
38* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
MT بِيَدِ lassi mols il g GUS at
# odf G53 yar; pi at fe 7
elas لا SNe الصَدِيق x Bove والبغض
3K aad wane Kind يعطيك galas XK Se 3
ألم كر أن الله ae pall SIGE إن الظالِيِينَ لَهُمْ
aig
Gk
7a وه سه ei
Sua? a a ri cll د ن 0
3 ات ا Kast ish ١ Gl x تال re
sur woe -- -G-o
ot + المتكيرين de edi gs آللة yy
oo 3 البعافق 0" jdm 2G oy ds #
إن فى ذلك لاآيَاتِ * of ف ذلك عبر آل
-[- » » ag Zak on
ee xe Spellbs? em إنه ل x الا بصار
اين خميع. =
Jl a dct فَلَمْ يَنْأَلَهُ Ge لئاس JAI
sf - 5
Sle UT الو عن de SES Gt SUL
15 134. 2§ 152,
147,
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 39*
#5 في Khe OG oll بقراط استهينوا Ju
pole ee انك عور etre
BIS آلطيْباكِ ge OUT Sw yl اب
نام التروءة MES JST Bde القلون
biG مَقَاتِيكهًا 2 ais Lgilast sul, أوعِية
SE أبو الْأَسْوَدٍِ GOST we she إِنْسَانِ مفتاح IS
wai مني Dies جَعَلَ؛ الله af كَقَالَة eee سَاِلٍ
-
oye PL الكفاز # LEST Ge oS مَا
Spel 7 لِلْعَبِيدٍ hb: se ما 3 juli من
Gy Ca الأممَالِ شَيْء Ge وَل # مَا Ge ما لَهُم:
جوعَة الْمسْلِم وقضاء 235 وتنفيسن clea! SIG من
les JG * LGBT, Lud لا يَسْتَوى ge was
15 131. %§10lanote. %§152, 4§98d. 5 5 132
6§ 144. 7§ 141.
40* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
١ ye ae & 09 وه ‘ta wc
خرصية إلا زوالها ع J يتكبر إلا كل ee) ولا
- 099
و 5 5 قذي 9 G 3 ro
يتواضع إلا كل رقيع 3% lo نرسيل المرسلين إلا
"Gels وَمُتَذِرِينَ #
an = 2 = م وو نس و ف ىر ان 3
DG, هذا القرآن HI بد # يَنْبَغِى
vee مم وعدن
eg BOs 8 IR oo ie ag - oo ا
للإِنسان أن Gites معاشرة الاشرار ويترك مصاحية
دك
lai * لا Lond Gaal Qo حتى يَْقَط
ee # ووفاته ue, فى تكبنه EG فى sll
=e ١ و
وهر ده
إِنْمَا ELT ds أن Staal SS BY وَالْبَعْضَاء
oe
pal 3 والميسر ويصدكم عن ذكر الله وعن
ane 2
bes لا leds ONG bee GEIS
َم مين saab UT قا » GOO د
ot -90~ 9 oF 1 a a مغدوه
م zoe 7 oe
Gall اهل القرى أن pease باسنا
15 151, 25 115. 3 § 157,
100.
يه
154 ff.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 41*
Grog OSE - سوه 22
% + Bas لم
Us ال ost اينيج فج yeah G isu
امنوا وَعَمِلُوا آلصَالحَاتِ Guddl a LS je CES
Leis ee) oy els pel di الْأنْهَار خالِدين
8ع
- ed ed
wots مريم ot عيسى G الله JG x» het فيها
0 أت إِلْمَيْنِ يمن ذونٍ الله eres) weil) eae
ASE ى ae loa التسليين ais JaG
بِأَمُوَالٍ eles pe مَثَلُ الْمَلِكِ الَّذِى
shat wi aa oaks الذى SEX
So as 3 Sa ol لي
x del dui iyi pes لا a dag
he Gaiad لا MU Hour Ou الرجل الحقير
2 وَآلَّذِينَ HSE GS aT Gor #* عَايْصِهًا
الصَاحِبُ ae UGG 1305 آلَّذِينَ Use), في الفلك و
د
د
رقعة في الثوب فلينظر الإنسان بم en وي 0
roe عه مه
BIE) أخلاي الشريفٍ كتيان الشِر وَأَعْلَ Sot
49* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
Ata) 0 7 de a Ui 08 برام Pel een
وس سخ وو 5
5 ig
at راص من das 36 يصتعون 13 5 Ui
at هذه GR Alt I فيه UGE IG
» HG أَصْلْهَا Fe RTT & el Gal
صَدِيقٍ A Gs ولا tet dé لا كَسََقِلٌ
GT مَا Basins LI pod & Josind ولا
من Oe Ja) Sr كما meu SS x A
مَنفعتها ولخذر ae Ji,2 oe قال KOS انتقعت
بأغداءى slosh Geist Ce Fst * لَعَذْ
S55 ole
My dod مِن AUS مَصَبَروا Le DE كَذِْبُرا واوا
35 مُبَِلَ لِكَلِمَاتِ AT #
Sules Sis xadbes Gy Y 3 sal 5 3 قال
OU لم تأنه JU د dhe أسِيرك 1 GAG به
صرت أسيرة ae الكلام Rs SLL 9 OE كَنَمَ
SES we IB ie SST GI الإسكندر Df شيم
158 ff.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 43*
one
- بن تك .شمو - د Ose فى 0G -
ra] SLs nna أت كنت حخضيت الشيب فكيف
2
oe ped أحِيه De pho ربكلا UT تَصْبْعْ
J pals te my عَلَيْهِ US adi
جنازقة anddy وَيَعُودْةُ إِذَا مرض ME CLE إِذَا
* وَيُشَيْتَهُ إِذَا عَطّسَ KES إِذَا Russ إِذَا مات
وَإِذَا aime SUE aS) UT Sy قال آلرَسُولُ
dite ISG GAT OU ببيييه al Ss
on 9S سنو © Le
وَيَشْرَبْ بِشِمَالِدِ * lis IS مَقَالَ وَحَيْرٍ JT
sha إِلى is إِذَا Sat JG د AP Ga مَا
cel, sitll إلى ast, pS, Idee
- 2D vor ono - 2 و 2 رده واردكن
الكلبة إذا x جر وسكم وارجلكم إلى الكعبينى
-
o een هموس هن ممه هم oss و
حرجت Ge القلب وقعّت في القلب Wty حَرَجَت
ف انان ان GG هو نلق Cs
o- هه
ols 0-00 pe فى الأرض: doa Gale الناس
جَيِيعًا * إِذَا roel JSS الْمَمْحِنَ mel MAG
ow en ae 2.230 o “on عام ىا Ce اش وي
ex لي ابواب رحميك وإذا خرج فليقل اللهم
EGE w
oes Jlas, doo إِذَا e dla WL إنى
ع
44* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
ine, علقت اكرات كين at is
a الْمَوَدَة é تَقَارَبُوا 5 jovi é dels 3 الشيَاطِين
we يعفر لم Irak TS إرَحمُوا تَرِحمُوا
post; على حَذَرٍ ky فكن GILT sys إِذَا
انهلا عليك ولت ينا يمتوى رلا يشيلنك. لطفه
سه و
O-- 5 - عبد sees
بك على أن قلخل mus وبين مله وحشيخ SE
resol 3 cabot dia وَتوَادَدِ اساي aS
Pe’ -- 9°
= J GOS hie إِذا اشتكى عضو say
Oi ot Sat Gk eT 3 * وَأَلسّهرٍ pele,
7 alas لبن JWT gle; Gace hae لي كان
oy لا مَرِفَعونى ترق ut قَالَ « og Is ae
الله SU : التصارى في السينيم. AG في مَا ais
# yey as 0 قبل Rees asl des 56
Race ما كن alts GEST شاد « me des dus
dé wll. Se Js Yu كنرك anes
re ee
a) وين a متاق إن ISP الله Bed
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 45*
غلامى وجاريقى oli, وفقاقى 6 مين حسن
?999
ee ea 0
خلقه طايت BLAS ود أمت سلا متك
oo a as sell oO ve 9° GL- ماه
تا عبشنه sale sly ومن Kise النفوسن
3 ad -at7- 99 - 8
وَدَامَتُ Reddy وَتَمَرَتِ النفوس EW #* Mis نوح
من aT oT, دَعَا النّاس إلى الركوب Lass
ل #2 هن دسدوه 3 es & © 5 00 oe لص ها
وَأَعْلَمَهُمْ Si الله GBT Ge على SF
وم 7 Pe ee ee Lore SE “g Ses
كلها is يطهرها من اهل المعاصى فلم mst
ره و 5 ام يننا 2 oe a
السَلام حم بِيْنَ البشوقى والبغرب قال مسيرة يم
oa 2 د GZ 0 وح 50-5 موعن 00
~ Jun
Solty GEST مكارم cist الْعْرَمَاء كيف
o Ai 9.) Who % 2 ممه aS aT اوعدي eo ف ١ بت
a Jl cir فقال كانت الاسفار Gre dt مع
xin كبا استحسنتث من أخلاتهم QUT De oul
gOS عَكَ Gobel jas * aah GOT وَمَا
Shes! GS see Cos AS WET بَعْضن
oe الخليقة كأكلة SIU ie فى أكله 2d
2
46* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
ie ie sae a
3 كَثَالَ abs 1 3
ot EL - 9 #7 <
يهو G oT ie: oe
تشفق عليه كان أمه J
-o- 2 oF
أرة ناك x
ge tl SG Fy ee. 5 وا 5 sone
de 0 AG الأكبر ta pb إِذَا مَاتَ desi
Be ae EB Bos
35 د امف اودحتي لم يكن
7 OS eo xe i = meee =e
له
fete 5 Sore) out Gas من eee On
xh رجله de فَوَضَعَقَهَا ag: id k كا جَارية xsle? الصَلاة
= dé joes Jo of Gils مَذْعُورًا eel
عامل J3 & عَكَ 1 الآحرة rei GG الدنيًا
وواماه
jt بن الخطاب وى Me AT مَوَجَدَه مُسْعَلتِيَا
على yl Bales aye على IS OU sobs
--
عليه فقال J عير كيف eat مع أهلك 1st dle
J Be ان ل ترد abel ملت eles
9 MS sal, ene wate) aS dual; dowd
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. AT®
قال shy uaa IT oder ف ohh يِحْنَتَهُ مَا
حَيْر ما B58 آلْعَبْدُ us die JE يه DB JG
Buc قن Jee Oot يو قال نان Gos كان
اج
\
\
wo صصَاعِقَة JE kus OG JG sing JUS
5
a OST, منة الْعِبَاد a
ase 37000 »9 انس مسد
نؤزل 0 بصومعة pods eh ليه Jah أربعة
BF I oz - a? a ee - of اا ع و عو :عي تاد
wee . {
أ KAS وذهب yess إليه ا ديل وجاء
o- او -<- Los -~-F of g-L موي
Os فوجلة past قاد بر PAS pat Ast فوجل5 قل
دو 3 dee
whys phe ws ERO chscee Guoall ita فسالة
Igbo co oe
JE لِمَا ذا dE نّ ool Gt WG مَقَصِدْهُ o Lali
“70
ae 0 MUI UE yb بها at ae
sls 2 كليل الشهوة لِلطْعَامٍ dla لَه ادذَاهِب
Saas قال إِذَا Ge ley حَاجَةَ قال “Sh 4 =
* Ge Jes} doo قلا doe adel,
*K
48 EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
II.
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
رَعَمُوا Si مَلِكَا يُقَالُ 3 sede حرج Orel
9930 عن Fat ge of on me
sorb» 7 sis من هل مه وخاصتة kee في
vals ie لَيْسَ لِلْعَوَالٍ Gas آضَاقهُ ِل Os; 58
عَنٍ الْعَوَالٍ 55k & حَتَى LSM de ola Le
xis chet, ae yl laa kin الْعَرَالَ uals;
عَطِيبَة tos J إِذْ طَهَرتْ Mee US KIS
JSUT, من الشاء والنعم ace IS من Lex
Us Like دوتها GH asthall a والزرع
ol Radel تلك sl يحل من al ِنْ a wae
SUH tel 8 3 nay de به OS) Acs derek
37 & فهو معد “ia َصَاحِتُ ne GI; i
eae Se. eal oF 2 or
الكلام ot مرت er) Les لم بر الا راون ere
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS, 49*
ed A وات لقم 2 .الاو لم و رق ee
ولا اظهر منها ils iw List ولا ay in
wile Deus 8 BRO es Beeler So) as BIE Bo وق es
9 اطيب راتحة فافئتتن يها اله دهاد Ys صياحة
a.-- 57 rey 71 - OF y RE ge Se 8 ae #2 8 امم
the الجن aif قل هويهًا وشغف بها فقال إن كنت
A جر een 8 Be رفك AO BOAR gf in ae on Saree 3
قل هويتها فهى ابننى فاذا أزوجكها تجا زاة الهدهاد
oe ne Ce HPO ge wwe ye عو et SB
خيرًا فقال لك itt! هل غرفتها قال الهدهاد ما
dw pc a2 a ill ve cor - 208 = ات 2 Gro
SH قبل يَوْمِى هذا قال GAP عي الْعَوَالُ alt
a 75 he ak eh ey Ba wo L wo GL
خلصتها من coll ولا Hs على Wiss dase
oe e-= م ن ا oF هورم 5 a, 8 o ghee
ae ee ee & ie of Bot, oe ee هر طلا ay ati, epee
ols gale قل زوجتكها بشهادة al} تعالى وشهادة
rae onl د آي دعروه moe o - ره oF
بيتك وملوك hogs ليشهدوا ملاكها Iasi وَلييتها
وَمِيعَادُكَ Je oladgii Sues dit Seal
ممه 5 -< = Bu Wo ع of ae ee - و5 ع ا عد
الييعاد wok, المدينة xis فاذا اككابكد حولة
S = = aaa te
2oy - ve pore 2 9% LD 2ه ee aan ل ١ عدا
له سل سه سل رصن مه وه ل نه G Ped Ia 1
JEL إلا Gla هذه ye Ga HY وَلَمْ UG
3 ع
Socin, Arabic Grammar.” D
5
50* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
عن eee اد ها عون انف ge حو عم شويع م موعن ف 76
مَوَجَدُوا slG has لَه الجن في Ge DG الْأرضٍ GAs
Fs GO 95 عكار عاو Were بين ضناة سن بو 3 عت سفن ع
Care 5 ae 2 Zoe OP ee 8 2 عو 9 وض
pene وراوا ملكا عطيبا فنولوا & xen pall على
فرش لم يروا Lelie وقربت لهم Lele dale من
ero awe 2 9 بز كتوعد 3< aoe o- Gm - 0
tab الماكول Laity الْيَى لم Sabi Lise
i mae <= pepe. 17? م د GR 7 5 او
5 €<
o- 5 بن 8ه ا
مَا لَمْ tag قط MI ولا GET من Kas NAS
BY يام Egil في ذلك ;65 إل الْهَْمَادٍ
we 5 اما شرنو a 2 ف ان ا ورك a و٠ و Bia
Bee gt SLOdQ Gals الجن We rig أمراته
phos وَعَشِيرده يالإنصِرَافٍ إلى مَوَاضِعِهِم stele,
| = صهد ده و 5 حورن a
go Gls, مَكَتَ SI دَرَعَيُوا axle ذَارَ padi’ ذَلِكَ
# uml, BATS ail
- oF 2 is bow و of gee os? 0) ato
eels Wb 3h Sle 08) ses OS) rs
> co. عبج -? - - wg 98- GE.
كل قبيلةٍ يغلام نهد فيكتيعوا Cpe أن يأتوا le
> 9 0
َلَيْهِ مَيَضْرِيُوهُ يَأسْيَانِهمْ صَوْبَةَ G veh Jo) يَكُونَ
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS, 51*
5 = + د os? bs سس ماش gL شا مما بل
البنى هاشم قوة soles جييع قريش alas رسول الله
ف مره قم ert اع “قم .عر 9 oGe LD 3 SF odes Sar
ذلك LU, اختلط الظلام خرج xz, أبو بكر وخلف
“he 717 (© سس كيك ديم الوك ه و ا
عليا على فراشع لرد الوداتع cal كانت sodis وصار
ع مده 9 of = نا ونج 57
5 5
Oe ST das يكنث “فيه OF cdl Let J
اهمه و of Pee Bt ig Per Foe So? » عم
wy! فوجلوا عليا فقالوا اين sails قريش wt, BAS
ye7-7-
فطلبوا
م اشام قهدن سو مه ون ا Ge
C58 Us Cosh pal JU Ke عنكم
قرو عدت eee. ere | ger ope اص الاو عض او ogee
الاثر فلم يقعوا عليد واعمى الله عليهم المواضع
قوقفوا UIT OG SE وَقَلْ BUS ale Cake
عي 2 8 | yD eee i223, f& F “or eo 2
فقالوا ا فى هذا الغار d=] وأنصرفوا oma رسول
obi Jt; JG aL UG Bh. RST Oe إل
ee قَصَاحَ aus whys GELS سراقة Last الله
wes حَيْر قلا che et OD فَلَعَمْرى co
» 5pdG AT RR KG رَجَعَ إل UG 5a متى
a 5 شرص أ 2 Eu Zee SGP ok eee a ae
de) جنانا مى cust, رجلا اربط جاشا cul) ما
D*
52* EXERCISES AND TEXTS-
7 2 "اجر و مود خا Bo pe at > dee - a s
eid واموالا elo, sodic المنصور أن J! ب a
200 1 2-0 -2 وا نوو a= ee om دو موره
امية فامرنى بإحضارة wast إليه فقال x} المنصور
7 رضع إلينا ne الوداتع il See M5 عندك git
s ie, Be ان e9TF ey vee. ne OES we
~ فقال يا أميو La فاخرجها لنا ولا تكتم مِنهَا kal
cep قال ل قال A ot وارث esl Gus
Le ee ew ele ae 2 oF عو بن نوات
لهم 8 أموالهم ورباعهم قال لا Ge JG مسالنك
كان كيف ين ذلك كن كلق الج eee
- REO ee cok - (iG ieee وار ذا “عدوت
سا ثم رفع aul, وقالإن cio امية ظلموا المسليين
1
etn x
wi (eee 5 د von 06 ?2 اف رغ 9 Ee
2 تو ear. مال 382 واو شرو Om م 3
ما ظليوا البسليين فيه /وفاجعله فى we اموالهم
5 - ewe ape < -or- LT Boe~m, EF Le ee
gale ie اليومنيى فكتال ال اقامة (G فقال
2 = ears a de لمومنين yo 2
31 oo 2 5 بن هدي a oes to
yobs ere HE geen 9 neat دوست ae ان wate
55 Dh es or G - ههة Ue 3 #2 5 aie
- Ge age oF 3 Bish عن oe Ge = os > -
6% 9 OL
G sls pa JG تمل لَك مِنْ حَاجة SG xe
i
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS, 53*
8 وبين من سعى ight بيذى oo a oe yal
هُوَ مَا في يَدِى لِبَنِى MW لا call ali Ath
CLG و 207
est ay يَا eer as أمية مال 35 رويعة
ae oe - 0err 979" يا و WES \uexse 7ك
oes A من et بده كم عستا Ad ان
ل مم ملم
ole (dn JU احْتَلسَ 4 SIT BI دِيمَارٍ من
مَاني BE; oie BG مِنْ طَلْبِى لَهُ ee oo عبد
آمير الْمومِنِينَ IE مَسَذَّدَ المنصور LE الغلام وَحَوفَةٌ
تأت Sh خلال وَل لحن OT الى 555 65
به os U5 wale Gas أ ol 3 ٍ يَدِهِ JUS لَه
«oe 5# اس سه
الْمُنُصور ae yas a es alt it dh فقال قل
عه و ددهو gues, 2907 0F_
عفوت ol SIT YG mee send KAS أَحَنَّهًا
ot SIT 85) أَذْمعها إِلَيْهِ ae xi JUS
مَا jel GBS dls aye vt codes dE المومنيى
Be ol كك كليل فى xo Lie كلامك لى وَعَفْوِكَ
=
2 BD w-- 9 20-9 سم mone 9ه
على ثم أنصرف aa Alcs ey 3 JG يتعحب
Ste 6 0ن
Ji 3553 UlsS ic ما (Sse ie Jah الشيخ
ou) >
54* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
وام oro aot وو عه اين اير وابن - (GO و 5 = و5
مود ون Ee @s Parad در fee Rx مده Co 37
القرنين ملك بعل CS, saz! معليه أرسطاطاليس
الحكيم jos See الإسكندر pass ملكة Oidty
EL 9% ey 90-7 ممع هرو را مهمو ده و عياف قر وو Bibs eee Bee
ve 5 gt Sy e
5 = of 2 ole Catia S 9
إلى Sar دعتة إلى أن SUE key وباس sos
Sy asl متسقيفة إل GOUT WEST طق
phe UN coh GaBU AT Ue Ge MLE OF
Cia ولك Wd Be uw عق LG سس
aon
AS Gb eS وصغر الْمَمَالِكِ في leas pbs;
عَلَيْهِ مَسَارَ Ghd wal ids WE de I
£ dette CEO 4 ساد OR ve - of -= Go 9 يواعد فاع Ov
ines ولك الفرس db أرض ol o> الإسكندر
دارا GS حَنّى ME وَحَوَى Cops Se SHE
Ome He ope of 2 wy es 25 pers - -
أبنته ثم صار إلى أرض فارس ha, من بها من
لمعنه لع a oe ا وا ا كي
المرازية والروساء exes اليلاد تم J! ye أرض
digll فزحف GIS vigll due xl حتى قتله
ae ان ds) bb رجع ِل رض re deh Jel
3 0 2 eo ممه
digll ملكا من xdas من
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS. 55*
een) MGs Shall oll صَارَ في UE SST
وغل fuss ga يكس CO: tle كاشتدث GT
aja Gls ah Uy به كَمَبَ G58 آلمَوتَ SI
eels طعامًا gruel آخره & i Ju; ع كفس
لجا كل بين Saat يناك eae تن تاه
Gleb قط تقيلت: gael acl تن wulib
228 82 6 vee ع
55 2 ocr = 2 -, a ~ Bx os
من أصيب ITE أمودهم الا pS الناس weiss
ا deen ee - 8 He Seb 82, gow ع ته 8
بمصيبه قط فلم ياكل احل فذعليت ما اراد ومَات
99, - %F Ll-g we 3 مره 4 9°04 عرق مه 4 ا عل
أككابة eels Kin GILT الإسكندر ف مَوضْعه الذى
4 v0 سس تت ام ساد يجو و العا Ree
8 ىق - Soe Pa -- 2 7 cgem ee GC. v4
هذا يوم عظيم Jl عليه عظيم من الفلاسفة
07 - هع
So Se dai مَا OF مُذْيرًا وَأَدْبَرَ ih Ge ما
Hee 08 -
2-0
aT Ge fas مَنْ De ISI BL كان
S55 ie Sit dy did GT يَا مَعْسَرَ Jw
dal; Kc “Lis lbely مُعَريًا وَلِلْعَامّة aol يكون
elt عَلَ she Gd أَسْطَاطَالِيسَ sh من
3 oro Ze 2 io 77 9 2 2 صووه -¢gf& سام a?
العزير La المنطبق ما أخرسك Lah قال ps
56* EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
Y 8220م GA wore BF ron (gf .اع كل اه بن ف
Just Ls ايها aa أنى وقعت dma ter’ & شرك
Be ge 070- 02
all القوى the JLas قاد م آخر re Khasi الذى
WS الوق أَصْبَحَ الي err Lined pyall ee
JS, Gas لا ik. C56 Ob JUG ST ie
poe DB ع a
J وكأنث عَطَايَاكَ WG لا MBs لا تومن وكانت
oe 4 of - 0 e- eek © a“ A417. - سو
قل 0 00 an y ae 00 cm
--0o = O wee.
= y Hist ave sass ie y pene وأصجكحت
م مس 6 24
ee os iui abit os ce sl on WE
فقال حركتا امار يسكوية وَأَنْطَقَنَا AT وقام
التابوث abt MS; pet hee peli, Bas
a -%40
SKK MEWS P dt وحيل
2
IT.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC.
Note. The order of the words in the following sentences
has been adapted, so far as possible, to that required by the
Arabic translation. In addition, however, the student must bear
especially in mind the difference of order (§§ 135, 189—142)
which marks the cardinal distinction between verbal and nominal
sentences (§ 139 note). The square brackets enclose words
which in translation should be omitted, while those in curved
brackets give the form of the sentence required by the Arabic
idiom. — Past and perfect tenses are generally to be rendered
by the Arabic perfect, present and future tenses by the Arabic
imperf. The extensive use of the (generic) article in Arabic is
to be noted. All nouns not in the construct state should have
the (definite) article prefixed unless qualified in English by an
indefinite article. — So far as lexical the footnotes to the exer-
cises are only supplementary to the Glossary. It is, for example,
only in special or exceptional cases that “oh” is to be rendered
by wei instead of by WU, and the notes draw attention to such
cases. — The apology for violence done to the Queen’s English,
in the interests of the learner, may be repeated from the first
edition, from which the following is in the main reprinted.
58* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, A.
A. Nominal Sentences. !
1. The glory of the man [is] his sons, and the
solicitude of the man [is] his dwelling and his neigh-
bour.—2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his tongue,
and the elegance of the woman in her understanding.—
3. The liberal [man is] related to God.—4. The worst
(of) repentance [is] at the day? of resurrection.—5. The
love of the world [is] the beginning of every sin.—6. The
promise of the king [is] a security——7. The learned
[men are] the heirs of the prophets.—8. Wisdom [lis]
for the character 3 like medicine for the body.3—9. The
world [is] the prison of the believer and the paradise
of the unbeliever—10. Contentment [is a part] of!
the nature’ of the domestic animals—11. The malady
of covetousness has no (not 15 5 for it a) cure; and the
disease of ignorance has no (not is for it a) physician —
12. The nutriment of the body? [is] (the) beverages
and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under-
158 139 86 ° 8 113 4. 3 plu. 4 Gye 5 § 50.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, B. 59*
standing [is] wisdom and learning.—13. Money has
(to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit. —
14. Verily 1 God [is] forgiving and? compassionate—
15. Verily ye? [are] in a manifest error.—16. The
nobles 014 Pharaoh’s folk said 5, “Verily this [is] surely 6
a learned enchanter”.—17. Verily in that? [lies] surely
an example for the unbelievers.—18. Flight in its
[proper] time [is] better than endurance in its wrong
time (in another than its [proper] time)—19. There
is no (not$ [is there]) strength and no (not8) power
except with® God, the High and! Mighty [One].—
20. The best of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst
of misfortunes [is] ignorance.—
B. The Strong Verb.
21. Jonah went out from the whale’s belly.—
22. Zaid killed Muhammed.— 23. They gave'5 (beat)
Omar a violent beating 114-24. The direction of prayer
was shifted12 from Jerusalem to Mecca.—25. God
knoweth (knowing) what 13 ye are doing—26. Verily’
God provides for every one his sufficiency —27. Learning
and money [they] cover up 14 every fault, and poverty
185 147 a. 2 8 149. 3 suffix. 4 oo. 5 perf. sing. § 136.
6 8 147 3. 78147 a. 35111. " .ب 105 122 141 5 109. 128 1360.
13 ريما 8 56 note a. 4ذ dual. 8 136 0. 15 § 137 D.
8
60* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, 5.
and ignorance [they] uncover! every fault.—28. They
took him away and put him in the bottom of the
well—29. The brothers of Joseph returned? to their
father —30. Why hast thou’ 2054 washed thy shirt?
—31. The most® of mankind are not® grateful?.—
32. They? believe 2015 in® the future life—33. We
made heaven [to be] a [well-preserved roof—34. Do
not do good out of 19 hypocrisy, and do not leave off
[doing] it out of 1° modesty.—
35. Why do ye render waste the cultivated coun-
tries 2-36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother
Aaron with our signs to Pharaoh and his nobles; then
they declared the two of them 11 to be liars.—37. The
angels said 12, “O Mary! be obedient to thy Lord and
“prostrate thyself; verily!3 God giveth thee glad
“tidings of a word from 15 him; and he 14 [is one] of 15
‘those16 who are placed near [to God], and he shall
“talk to mankind in the cradle!”—8. It is not seemly
to hurry (not is good the hurrying), except in the
marrying of a17 daughter, and the burying of 217 4
[man], and the entertaining of a 18 guest—39. Glorify 19
God in the early morning 2° and [late] in the evening 2°,
of
_ i dual. 8 136d. 2 plur. 3 fem. 4 لم 5 101 ©. 5 sing. 5
6 .لا 7 pronoun. 9 part. 9 ينب 10 5 113 0. 11 suffix in the
dual. 12 8 1367. 13 § 147@ 14 pronoun. 15 .من 16 part.
178 1182. 18 § 118¢, 19 “سام 20 indeterm. accus. 5 1134.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. B, 61*
40. Verily the hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong])
three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart,
and his speech his action, and his exterior his in-
terior—41. The men of his people used to sit with
him! on account of his learning.—42. Verily the
holy war [is] incumbent? on 7011-43. The vehemence
of a (the) man? [is what] causes him to perish!.—
44. The head of al-Husain the son of Ali was brought
into the city’ of Damascus® and was placed before
Yazid.—45. Verily 767 have become Muslims, so8
become Muslims 769 [also]!—46. Do not talk to one
another with disgraceful talk!—47. Every thing has
(to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the in-
dication of understanding [is] reflection, and the in-
dication of reflection [is] being silent—48. We started
off towards Bagdad to bring an action against one
another 10 before 11 its12 governor.—49. The most ex-
cellent [kind] of praise [is], “[there is] 20 15 god ex-
cept God!” and the most excellent of [good] works
fare] the five14 prayers; and the most excellent [kind]
of character [is] (the) being humble—50. They fought
with one another four days‘5, then the Byzantines
i كان sing., then subject, then the verb inthe plur. cf. §§ 89 notee;
136 d. ? part. 2258. 4 nominal sent. § 139 da. 5 § 107. 6 8 128.
78 96d. 8 <3. 9% pronoun. 10 part. § 1138, 1 .إلى 12-8 72,
13 5 111. 14 masc. determ. after the noun, 5 92a. 15 § 113
62* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. 1
were routed!—51. What is disliked in? the king [is]
the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and the hearing
of (the) songs and the spending of (the) time therewith
(with that).—52. They said, “O our father! verily we3
“went away, running races‘, and left Joseph with®
“our baggage; then the wolf ate him”.—53. Observe
what [is] in the heart of thy brother by means of his
eye, for® the eye [is] the title-page of the heart!—
/54, In the fourth year from the birth of Muhammed
the [two] angels? cut open$ his belly and extracted 9
his heart; then they cut 169 [his heart] open and
extracted® from it a black clot of blood; thereupon
they washed? his heart and his belly with snow.—
55. They conversed 1° about the case of the Apostle.—
56. Verily God hath (to God [are]) 1! servants
whom 12 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them)
with his favours.—57. Restrain thyself from meat 13
which 14 causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [from]
an action which 14 occasions thee regret 18558. Thou
hast fallen in love 16 with a girl, a possessor of beauty 15
and elegance 1°.—59. Muhammed said, “Help thy brother,
“(whether he be} doing wrong 17 or wronged 17!” They
'fem.sing. 2 .ل 3§ 96 d. 4imperf. merely, $157 0.5 Ses with gen.
6 C3, Tdual. Ssing.§186a. %dualg136d. 105 187 ين 115 1474.
2 without relative particle 5 155. 13 indeterm. 14 without rela-
tive particle 5 155. 15 indet. 16 5 98e. 17 § 113d,
5
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, ©. 63*
asked, “O Apostle of God! how shall we help him,
“Gif he be] doing wrong1?” He said, “By restraining
“him from doing wrong!”—60. Do not turn away? a
beggar!—61. A man (servant) does not believe, until
he love for his neighbour (brother) what3 he loves for
himself.—
C. The Weak Verb.
62. A poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him
[two] pieces of money 4—63. Be mindful of death, for
he takes hold of your forelocks; if® ye fly from him,
he overtakes you, and if ye stay, he seizes youu—
64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like the
body; then through their? coming together is born
joy—65. The Apostle used 505 preach to his com-
panions and to exhort them and to teach them the
beauties of character °—66. Verily‘° our [true] friends
will 11 entrust to us their secrets.“67. The lust 12 of the
world entails care and sorrow, and abstinence with
regard to it restores the heart and the body.—“68. Moses
said, “I have brought'’ you an evidence from your
“Lord; so let go!4 along with me the Sons of Israel!”
7-69. Depend on the Living [one], who does not die!
18 113 3, 2 contracted § 36, 3 ke § 156 andnotea. 4 dual.
5 pronoun with foll. part. 6 § 159. 7 dual-suffix. 8 see .م 61*
note 1. 9 pl. determ. 108 147a, 112 § 99a, 123. 13 5 98e. 14sing.
64* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. C.
/
270. He pleases me, who makes poetry to 1 show his
education, not tot make gain, and applies himself to
singing to1 enjoy himself, not to1 seek for himself [reward].
“71, Demand help of the good (people? of the good),
and of those that act well (and of the acting well)—
‘72. Choose? whichever of the pages thou wilt!—
73. Supplicate much (make much the supplicating),
for thou4 dost not know when® answer ® will be given
thee!—74. Restrain your tongues and lower your
glances and guard your continence!—
75. A (the) kingdom is made flourishing through
justice and is protected by courage and is ruled
through [good] government.—76. [Good] government
fis], that7 the gate of the chief be guarded 8 in the
[proper] time of being guarded 9, and opened in the
[proper] time of being open®, and the gatekeeper
friendly. —77. Jalal-al-din used not to go to sleep 10
except drunk 11, nor (and not) to arise in the morning
except seedy and tipsy 11,78. It is not seemly for
the wise [man], that!? he address the fool, like as
it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address
the drunken [man].—79. People? of the world
[are] like folk in a ship, who 14 are carried onwards
tint 8 113 4. 2 § 198. + fem. 4 § 96d. 5 سكي 6 impf
pass. impers. 7§ 1480. 8 كان with part. 5 110. 9 .م61 1 see
p. 61* note 1. 115 113%. 12 § 148d. 13 8 133, 14 55 155, 156.
يي
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. 0 65*
whilst they are sleeping 1,60, The evil-doer [he]
does not consider? mankind except [as] evil, because
he® sees them with‘ the eye of his nature—81. God
elected Abraham [as] an [intimate] friend.1—%2, Every
affair in the world [is] transitory—83. Wickedness
[is] to be feared®, and no one (not) fears it except
the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped for,
and every one 6 seeks it—84. [To] a man (servant) shall
not® be given [anything] more ample than endu-
rance.—85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the
most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor; and I looked
into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants
[to be] (the) women.—86. He® whose counsel is
asked [is] one19 in whom one confides; and he!° who
asks counsel [is] one!9 who is to be aided.—87. Do
not put off1! the work of to-day till to-morrow 12,
88. Thou dost not!3 find (see) in the creation of God any 14
imperfection—89. Little which‘ continues [is] better
than much which!° is interrupted—90. Pharaoh said,
“We will 15 kill 16 their sons and spare their women.”—
91. A Bedouin looked at a gold-piece; then he said,
“How small 17 is thy size and how great17 thy value!”—
“1g 157.0 2§139da 2ouf. 40. 5§60c. 6 XSI.
7 Ww, 8 ee § 100 end. 9 part. * 40 part, 1185 1010.
12 indeterm. 13 من 14 ,صا as used 8 141. 15 44, § 994.
16 § 19, 17 § 52.
1 : 2
Socin, Arabic Grammar. E
66* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with thee},
until thou diest!—93. Be [the] tail and be not [the]
head! for? the tail escapes whilst? the head perishes.
D. Various subordinate Sentences,
94. Muhammed said, “Do not anticipate (begin) 4
Jews and Christians by the greeting, but when ye
meet one of them, (then)® force him towards the
narrowest place (his narrowest)”.—95. When comes to
thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil,
then seek for him excuse; but if thou dost not? find
fone], then say, “Perhaps he has an excuse.”’—96. If8
thou eat little, thou shalt live long—97. If8 ye talk
in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye shall
enter Paradise—98. Ali said,—may® God be well
pleased with him 10—“O 11 mankind! do not hope except
for your Lord, and do not dread [anything] except your
transgressions; and be not he ashamed, who 12 doth not
know, to 13 learn, and be not he ashamed, who!2 knoweth,
to 13 teach!”—99. The subsistence which thou seekest
is like the shadow (the likeness of the subsistence...
[is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves on along
1 veri, Sentence. 2 Se. 3 5 157 nomin. sent.
+ “تنام 5 AS! with gen. § 133 end. 5 § 161¢. 7 85 159, 1
35 § 1600. 9 § 98d. 10 after the subject, 1! LEST g 85. 12 من
13 أن with subj.
TRANSLATION 1NTO ARABIC, ٠ ‘ 67*
with thee; thou! dost not overtake it in pursuing 2 [it],
then when thou turnest3 away from it, it follows
thee!4—100. A man said to the Apostle of God:
“QO Muhammed, give me thy cloak!”; then he threw
it down to5 him; then he said: “I do not® want it”;
then he [Muh.] said, “May? God combat thee! thou
didst wish to8 declare me to be niggardly, but
(and) God has not made? me [to be] niggardly!”—
101. Whoso 15 longs for Paradise, he is unmindful of
lusts 1!.—102. That a man2? give in alms in his life-
time a drachma (the alms-giving'? of a man—a
drachma) fis] better for him than that13 he give in
alms a hundred drachme at his death.
103. The Prophet—may God bless ١4 him and save
him—said, “Whoso 1١ drinketh wine in this world, [and]
thereupon do not! repent, he shall be forbidden 6
in the future life.”—104. If anyone light a lamp in a
mosque, then verily !7 the angels [they] will beg for-
giveness for him as long as!8 that lamp continues 9
kindled 2°,.—105. The reed-pen [is] a tree, whose?!
fruit [is] the ideas, and thought [is] a sea, whose?!
1 pronoun. ? part. 1136. 3 5 158a. 4 perf. 5 Jl. 6 Lé
ع ع
with imperf§ 7 § 98 0. 8 Ol, with subj. 9% 8 101 ¢.
10 8 159, 11 determ. 1 inf. 1 من أن § 148 5 with subj.
11 8 11 .قصه 1 2) 85 160.4, 1016. 14 8 108. 17 8 1614. 15 § 1580.
19 8 110, 20 part. pass. 5 110. 215 155. 22 eee a
68* TRANSLATION INTO ~ARABIC. ٠
pearls [are] wisdom.—106. Verily the dead [man] and
he who! has no religion (he who no? religion to
him) [are] 6011813: and there is no? trust in (to)
him whot has no? piety.—107. Every woman
that‘ has مم modesty [is] like a dish that has no5
salt.—108. If anyone’s® [whoso, his] tattle is much,
his erring is much [also].—109. The anger of the
noble [man], although his fire flare up’, [is] like
smoke of wood’ in which [there is] no® blackness,
—110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven 19 seventy 11
transgressions, ere to the knowing [man] is forgiven one.
111. Be not12 like the needle, which! clothes
mankind whilst 14 it [is] naked, nor (and) like the wick,
which 14 gives light to mankind whilst it is consumed 15,
—112. The believer does not escape from the chas-
tisement of God, until he leave off four things, lying,
and pride, and niggardliness, and evil thinking (evil
of the thinking)—113. It is seemly for the younger
[ones] to 16 precede the elders in three places; when !7
they travel by night 15, or wade through a stream, or
encounter horsemen.—114. Do not drink (the) poison
out of reliance’? on the antidote which thou hast
a7
1 .من 285 111. 3 sing, 4 §§ 155, 156. 2 part.pass. § 110.
6 § 156. 7§ 159. Sindeterm. § 155. 9 5 111. 10§136a. 11§ 920,
12 لا with energ. I. 5 1018. 198155. 1485 157 ©. 15 8 157 0, pron.
with imperf. 15 8 148. 17 5 1584. 15 8 113 4. 19§ 113d.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 69*
(that which [is] with! thee of2 the antidote).—
115, Paradise is desirous$ of four [kinds of] folk; the
first¢ of them®5 [are] those who have fed® a hungry
[man], and the second [are] those who have clothed 7
a naked [man], and the third [are] those who fast?
in8§ the month of Ramadan, and the fourth [are]
those who read 19 the Koran—116. Socrates was asked,
“Why hast thou not 11 mentioned in thy law-code the
“punishment of him who kills 12 his brother?” He said,
“T know not that this [is] a thing which exists.”—
117. Every thing [it] begins small 13, thereupon it be-
comes great, except misfortune 14: for it begins great,
thereupon it becomes small ; and every thing [it] becomes
cheap, when15it becomes abundant, excepting education;
for 16 when it becomes abundant, it rises in value.
118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of
Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the
Thora), they refused to 17 accept it and to do according
to what [was] in it—119. God commanded Moses to 18
fast thirty 15 days and’ to purify himself and to purify
his garments, and to come 5019 the mountain, that he
might talk to him and give him the book—120. After
2
خم 5 :
rows, 2 or. 3 part. ¢ masc. 5 suffix in fem. sing.
a 2
6 perf. sing. 7 imperf. sing. 5 5 1134. 9 5 128. 10 imperf.
sing. 115 1010. 12 8 159. 13 § 1135. 14 accus.§ 151. 15 § 158 0.
=
16 with suff. § 96d. 17 أن with subj. 18 § .ه113 19 AL
0
70* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
Damascus was taken‘, much folk? of? its inhabitants
joined Heraclius, whilst4 he was in 5 Antioch.—121. A
certain one of the wise men said, Nothing (not) repels
the onslaught of the conquering enemy like® being
submissive and giving way, like 35 7 green plants are
safe from the vehement wind through their pliancy, be-
cause theyS’ turn along with it, as (how)® it turns—
122. They disagree 19 concerning Waraka; and of 1! them
[there are] those who assert 15 that 12 he dieda Christian 13
and did not 14 reach the appearance of the Prophet;
and of 11 them [there are] those who are of opinion 15
that 12 he died a Muslim.—123. O [ye two] companions
of the prison! as to the one of 720015, he shall serve
to his lord wine17, and as to the other, he shall be
crucified, then shall 18 the birds eat of 12 his head; the
affair is decreed19 concerning which ye inquire!—
124. The Apostle wrote to chieftains 17 of 11 the tribes,
inviting20 them to become Muslims2!—125. A wise
[man] was asked, “What [is] the thing, which [it] is
not good that it be said, although it be22 right?” He
said, “A man’s eulogizing himself 23”—126. Woe to
1 fem. § 136 b. 25-55 coll. 7 es 4§157a. 5. ieee
subject, § 145 0. 1 IGS 8 147 a. 8 sing. suff, 9§ 159. “10 § 980 with
33, 82870. 1 .سن 128 1474. 13 8 113 79. 148 1016. 15 § 98.
16 SS 9p, Quel suff, § 133. ‘7indeterm, 18 fem. sing. § 136 ¢, 2.
19§ 98 3. 20 8 99 5. 21 infin. determ. 22 كان § 159, 238 131 w. Ace,
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E. 71*
[him] who converses with lying, that he may make the
people laugh by it!—127. This (the) world and the
future life [are] as the East and the West; when thou
approachest one of them!, thou dost recede from the
other—128. Fear ye God in secret? and do not enter
into what is not lawful for you!—129. The devotee without
learning [is] like the ass of the mill3, who‘ goes around
and does not 5 get through (cut) the distance——130. The
eye of hate [it] draws forth every fault, and the eye
of love [it] does not find the faults.
E. Anecdotes.
131. An astrologer was being crucified; then he was
asked ,؟ “Hast thou? seen this in thy star?” Then he
said, “I saw a raising up§, however I did 2059 know
that it [was to be] upon a piece of wood.”
132. A man knocked at the door of 10 ‘Amr the son
of ‘Ubaid;so he said “Who [is] this?” He said, “I.” He
[Amr] said, “I do not know (I am not 1 know 1!) among
our friends (brothers) 12 [any] one 13, whose name [is] I.”
133. (The) thieves came 14 in upon Abt Bekr al-
Rabbani, seeking 15 something (a thing), and he saw
1 dual suffix. 2determ. 3 § 123, note. 4§ 155 note. 5 8 06
Yow. impf, 5 187 .م 7 with interrog. part. .هل 8 736 end.
9§ 1018. 10 كَل 11 pel § 50 and impf. 12 order § 1310.
OS 14 8 1364. '5 § 1576 imperf. alone.
toe TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E.
them going around! in the house. Then he said, “O
young men! This which ye are seeking? in the night
we have‘ already sought? in the day-time, but have
not® found it!” So they laughed and went out.
134. It is related®, that? a certain one of the
polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes;
so he commanded [that] to him an [ass’s] saddle and
saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took them’ on?
his shoulder and went out from his presence 19, Then
‘a certain one of his companions saw him, then said,
“What [is] this?” He said, “I eulogized the prince
with the most beautiful of my poems, then he invested
me with [something] of 11 the most glorious of his dresses”.
135. Al-Mugira, the son of Su‘ba said: No one
(not) 12 has deceived me except (another than) a youth
of 13 the sons of al-Harit. For I mentioned a woman
of theirs (of 1! them), that 13 I should marry her; then
he said, “O14 Prince! [There is] no good! for thee
in her.” So I said, “And why [not]?”. He said, ل“
saw a man kissing 15 her.” So 1 turned from her; then
the young man married her. So I reproached him
and said, “Didst thou not !7 inform me that 5101115
Timperf. ? with suffix, 3 5 118 4. 4 8 986. 5 Ls § 1504.
6 8 988. 7 Syl. 8 dual suffix. 9 cs. 10 Bs on. 11 ce.
+ gt ae
2 1016. 13 .ل Ww ق 15 .أيها 111. 15 imperf. 17 II 8 101
<8 9
18 أن with suff.
سس
TRANSLATION 1NTO ARABIC. E. 73*
‘seen a man kissing her?” He said, “Yes, 1 saw her
father kissing her.”
136. Al-Dahhak the son of Muzahim said to a
Christian, “[How would it be] if! thou wert to become
a Muslim?” He said, “I have not? ceased loving?
Islam 4, except that 5 my love for wine 6 prevents me from
it.” So he said, “Become a Muslim and drink it!” So
after he had become a Muslim, he said to him, “hou
hast7 become a Muslim, so if thou drink it8, we shall
chastise thee; and if thou apostatize, we shall have thee
killed, so choose for thyself”. Then he chose Islim and
his Islam was good. So he had taken‘? him by stratagem.
137. A Bedouin stole a purse in which (it) [were]
pieces of money '!, thereupon he entered the mosque
to pray12; and his name was'3 Moses. Then the
leader of prayer recited, “And what is that 1+ in 15 thy
right hand, Oh Moses 152” 80 he said, “By God, verily
thou [art] an enchanter!” Thereupon he threw away
the purse and went out.
138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy in
the days 17 of al-Ragid. So after he had appeared
1 ل § 102, 2 Le with perf. £5 110 with indeterm. part.
4 8 139 end, 5 §§ 147 © 148 إلا اند with 2011. verbal sentence. '
6§ 131. 7 § م98 with .قت 5 8 159. 9 8 17, note 6. 10 perf.
11 indeterm. 12 5 99 8, 13%. 14 fem. 15 .نب 15 Surah 20, 18.
118 1134. 4
1714 TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
before him [the Caliph], he asked him, “What [is
that] which is said of thee?” He said, “that I! am
a noble prophet.” He asked, “But what? indicates
the truth of thy claim?” He said, “Demand what
thou wilt”4. He said, “I wish that® thou make 65
beardless slaves, [who are] standing’ [there] this
moment 5 [to be furnished] with beards®’ Then he
looked down for a while1°, thereupon he raised his
head and said, “How is it lawful that I make these 11
beardless [ones to be furnished] with beards? and
alter these® beautiful 12 forms? but 13 I will make the
bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one
twinkling.” So al-Rasid laughed at him and pardoned
him and commanded a present [to be given] to him.
139. A person pretended to prophecy 14; then they
besought of him in‘5 the presence of al-Ma’min a
miracle. So he said, “I will cast for you a pebble into
the water, then it will dissolve“ He [al-Ma’mtim] said,
“We arelé content.” So he brought out a pebble
(which he had] along with him 17, then cast it into the
water; then it dissolved. So they said, “This 15 is a
4 8
3
1896 0. 2 aoe esl. 3 8 5, note b. 4 perf. § 159. 5 24,
6 § 120d; the dem, in sing., the adj. in broken pl. ‘ determ.
5 1200. 8§ 118 a. 9 indeterm. 1" 8 113 به 11 plur. 12 8 120
fem. sing. 13 Lal. 14 § 22. 15 سعد 17 .م98 168 بب 8 121
15 8 143, 7
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E. 75*
trick; however, we will give! thee a pebble of our
own?, and let? it dissolve! Then he said, “Ye are
not‘ more illustrious5 than Pharao and I am not (and
not I6) mightier in wisdom? than Moses, and Pharao
did 2055 say to Moses, ‘I am not? content with what
thou doest 10 with thy staff, so that!! I will give thee
a staff of my own 12, which 13 thou shalt make [into] a
serpent.” So al-Ma’miin laughed and let him pass on.
140. It is said 14 that Aba Dulama 15 the poet was
standing 15 before al-Saffah on17 a certain day (a
certain one of the days). Then he said to him, “Ask
of me what thou dost want (thy want)!” So Aba
Dulima said to him, “I want a hunting-dog”. So he
said, “Give ye it 18 to him!” Then he said, “And I want
a horse, on!9 which I may go forth to hunt.” He said,
“Give ye it to him!” He said, “And a page20, who?!
will lead the dog and hunt with him.” He said, “And
give ye him a page!” He said, “And a slave-girl 22,
who 28 will prepare the game and give us to eat of it.”
He said, “Give ye him a slave-girl!” He said, “These,
1 imperf. 2 Bris ce. 3 imper. of. وذع w. suff.; then impf.
4 dS 8 0 0 18 1136. 8 85 1016. 9 2
10 § 156. 11 حنى with subj. 12 apts ce. 13 88 155-56.
148 كان 16 ,151474 ,مهو with part. 8 110. 17 G. 15 with
Gl, which stands last, § 545. 19 05 (after the verb) § 155.
20 accus. 2! § 155. 22 accus. 23 § 155.
76* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
O Prince of the Believers! have need of ([there is]
no! escape for them from) a dwelling, which? they
may inhabit.” So he said, “Give ye him a dwelling,
which2 will contain them!” He said, “And if they have
not (and if not is? to them) an estate, then wherefrom
shall they live 2” He said, “I grant4 thee ten cultivated 5
estates and ten waste estates5.” He said, “And what
[are] the waste [ones] O Prince of the Believers?”
He said, “In which® [there are] no plants’.” He
said, “14 grant thee, O Prince of the Believers, a
hundred8 waste estates of? the deserts of the Sons
of Asad.” Then he laughed at him and said, “Make
them 1° all of them 1° cultivated! 19”
141. It is related 11, that Harfin al-Rasid had (that
to H. was '2) a black slave-girl, of ugly mien 1%. Now
he scattered one day gold-pieces 14 among (between)
the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about! gather-
ing 16 up the gold-pieces, whilst 17 that slave-girl stood
still, looking 18 at the face of al-Rasid. Some one
asked (it was asked), “Dost thou! not pick up the
18 111.2 35 88 .وقةة1 5 OS كذ هنم مؤو 48 لم
585 87a. 6 and prep. with pronoun at the end of the sentence.
T§ 111. 8 § O26, 9 .من 10 fem. sing. 118 أنه كَانَ ل 12 .م98
5 147 سن 13 determ. 5 134. 14 indeterm. 15 5 136 a. 16 55 152
note 6, 136 2 (impf, pl. fem.) 17 5 157 a@ with part. 18 § 1575
impf. alone. 19 ألا w. impf. fem.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E, 717T*
gold-pieces?” Then she said, “Verily what1 they
seek [is] the gold-pieces, but (and) what! I seek
[is] the owner of the gold-pieces.” Then her speech
pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and
brought good upon her. Then the report got to the
grandees, that? Harfn al-Ratid was enamoured3 of
a black slave-girl. So after that’ had come to his
knowledge, he sent for the whole of the grandees,
until he had assembled‘ them in his presence ® Then
after he had commanded the bringing in® of the.
slave-girls, he gave every one of? them a goblet of7
chrysoliteS and commanded it to be thrown down‘.
But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a 016 9(.
Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly
slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke
it. So they said, “Look 19 at this girl, her name [is]
ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is]
ugly”. Then said to her the Caliph, “Why then didst
thou break 11 it”? Then she said, “Thou didst 12 command
me to break 1613: so I was of opinion that 14 in 15 its
being broken [lay] a detriment 15 with regard to the
af :
5 1 part. pass. with suffix, 2? Gy. 3 imperf. 4 5 152, notec.
5 .عند 6 Wo with infinitive § 181. 7 20 § 119 4.
7 3
8 determ. 9 $113 b. 10 plur. 11 2nd. pers. fem. perf. w. suff.
ع
.247 8 15 .فى 15 .أن 1 with inf نب 15 .م 98 8 18 53a. 8
78* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E.
treasure of the Caliph, and in its not being broken
(in the lack of its being broken) a detriment? with re-
gard to his command; and the detriment with regard
to the first is fitter to keep intact? the inviolability
of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion
that in its being broken [lay] my being called (qualifi-
ed? as‘) the crazy [one], and in keeping it intact my
called being (qualified? as+) the disobedient [one]; and
the first [is] more agreeable to me than the second.”
Then the grandees found® that ® to be beautiful of? her
and praised her for$ it and excused the Caliph for?
loving her. And God knows best ({is] most knowing 1°),
1§ 147 a. 2 5 113d, indeterm. inf. with following ل § 131.
38 61 6. 4 .نب 5 § 136 a. 6 at the end. 7 .صين 8 de.
9 .فى 0 elative.
GLOSSARY A.
pl.= plural, see §§ 88—90. The numbers within parentheses after
the broken plurals refer to the forms as numbered in these sections.
Aaron xy after prep. حلت
00
Abraham meyih agreeable to elat. ol
abstinence 35. a .إلى
Aba Bekr al-Rabbani أي 214 (to) عان med. و 7
with acc. هك
shy 1S. a ‘Ali ae
Abi Dulama .ابو دلامة =
abundant see much. all كل with determ. noun
accept (to) dos impf. a. or suffix § 119d.
acquire (to cause t0) كسب alms (to give in) صدق
IV with two accus. V with Y of the gift.
act well (t0) حسن IV. along with prep. oe
action dha. Seealso bring, already. QS § 98
address (to) .bs 7 alter (to) غار med. s II.
Sot ‘
affair yh although ¢y14 § 159.
after, after that conj. (jj 8 &
§ 8 ample eels elat. § 63 b.
Giossary A.
arise (to, in the morning)
wo IT.
as sée like.
Ee
as to Lot with nom. and ف
in the apodosis.
Asad et
ashamed (to be) لك حى
§ 49 ©.
ask (to) J mea. و mith
J. — to ask something
ae
-Ee
of سال imps. a, with two
ace. § 38d.
ass je.
assemble (to) جبع impf. a.
assert (to) rey impf. u.
astrologer .متاكم
at (one’s house) prep. His.
Bagdad يَغْدَانٌ
baggage ماع
be, exist (to) كان med. 5
— not to be jus! § 50.
beard Bad pl 15 (3); of.
§ 71d.
80*
‘Amr Bers § 902.
and a 5
angel ملاك pl. مَقَاعِلة (28).
anger ees
animal (domestic) Rags
pl. مَعَاِجَلُ Ce.
another than pers with fol-
lowing gen.
answer (to give) to جاب
X med. 0 mith J. 1
antidote bye.
Antioch عا f.
any ee: (prep.), ef. 5
apostatize >) VIII.
apostle يل
appear (to) hits.
appearance pais
apply oneself to (to) Lhe
VI with acc.
approach (to) ee impf.
u, with .من
81*
beseech of (to) Ab 7
with acc. of person and
w of thing.
best elat. of good.
better elat. of good.
between oe
beverage مَشَرَبٌ pl. jolie
(23).
birds coll. pe.
birth Wy.
black ee fem. § TAD.
blackness Olja.
bless (to) صلا 77 with Ac.
body nets pl. أَمعال (17).
GS --
(no. 67). بذن
book GUS.
born (to be) a, 7
bottom ile.
break (to) pore impf. i.
med. جاء ب bring (to)
to wing an action —
against one another
F
Gtossary A.
beardless yal 1 re (1).
beat (to) Cys impf. i, inf.
3
beauty سن — beauties
els. Ss Ss
beautiful حسن fem. &3
elat. 5 63 b. — to find
to be beautiful حسن Xx.
Ss
because oy § 1474.
2 oF
Bedouin أعرابى
before (of place) — be-
tween the two hands
of (dual stat. constr.).
-=&
beg of (to) سال imps. a,
with ace.
Ee
beggar part. act. of .سال
ee
“begin, begin with (to) JO
impf. a, with acc.
sh,
beginning راس (lit. head).
believe (to) امن IV; —
believer id. part. act.
belly .بطن
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
01055458 A.
cease (to) Jt; med. (for
زول 5 42 0, 5 5
certain one (a) تفن with
pl. of follow. noun.
character gh pl. Ae
(17).
characteristic poke.
chastise (to) cee impf. u.
chastisement ibe:
cheap (to become) vad,
impf. 7
chief ac pl. 2X23 (20).
choose (to) خار med. ى
VII.
chrysolite قوت
Christian ole د pl. Ales
(29); S) las.
claim (to) دعا VIII § 25,
note.
claim e585:
cloak 2)5,.
clot of blood ile.
82*
VI. — to bring in
حضر IV. — to bring
into d&o IV. — to
bring out eo 5 لد
to bring upon ol IV
with As.
brother 36 90 a, © : pl.
§ 88, 5; pl. when =
“friends” § 88, 21.
bury (to) دكن impf. 1, inf.
is
but whe
by, by means of وب in
oaths وح w. the gen.
§ 95%.
Byzantines (the) coll. روم
Caliph elk.
care es
carry onwards (to) سار
med. 5, with .ب
اسه
6856 yas.
cast (to) ye impf. a.
5
83*
— to command any
thing to be done, id.
with y and infin.
command ol
companion 0 pl.
JS Gn.
compassionate ree:
concerning .ىق
confide in (to) أمن VII,
conquering part. act. of
vor
consider as (to) ظنى imp/f.
u, with ace.
consumed (to be) حرق
VIII.
contain (to) ee impf. a.
content (to be) 6) impf.
a.— to be content with,
id. with \.
* GL Le
contentment xelis.
continence or (pl. of
S o-
oo
FF
Guossary A,
clothe (to) Las imp/. u.
ل
city .«ملينة
cognizant of Y حلي
combat (to) Aas 7
come (to) wil impf. i. —
to come to one’s know-
ledge (concerning) بلغ
impf. u, with ace. (and
es) — to come in
upon د خل impf/. u, with
As. — to come out
rd
from rs > impf. u, with
من
VIII. جبع come together
command (to) at impf. u.
— to command anyone
to do a thing, id. with
ace. and eh with the
subj. — to command
anything to be given
to anyone, id. with J
of pers. and ب of thing.
Gtuossary A.
ad-Dahhak .الفكاك
Beh gs
Damascus oe
00 بت § 903,
day me pl. Ae §§ 88, 17;
90s. — one day Logs.
-O-
to-day «الهوم
day-time .تهار
dead ميت
death Sys.
deceive (to) coe impf. a.
decline (to) ee VIII.
decree (to) م 017 قضى
demand (to) a thing يساك
impf. a, 0 عن § 38D.
depend on (to) وكل V, with
de
desert قيقاء pl. Jlas (26);
desirous of (to be) شاق
d. و VILL, with ل or
--
detriment , aks 3,
84*
continue (to) pl med. و
§ 110.
contradict (to) حلف 777
converse (to) sda V.—
to converse about, id.
with .ب
counsel (to ask) شار med.
7 = S. 9
country JUL pl. فعال (9).
courage goles.
cover up (40) ستر Sane u.
covetousness .خرص
on
cradle ge.
crazy part pass. of o>
fem. K&.
creation ole,
crucify (to) صلب impf. i.
of
cultivated part. act.
SL
عر fem. Ks
cure .شفاء
cut (to) قطّع impf. a. —
to cut open Saimpfiu.
85*
dog ols; hunting-dog
domestic see animal.
door 5
drachma رهم
draw forth (to) جوز IV.
dread (to) eit impf. a.
dress pada Be مَعَالِلُ (23).
drink (to) Gye impf. a.
drunk, drunken سكوان A
dwelling Is (fem.).
early see morning.
مه
eat (to) AST impf. u; imp.
b. — to give to 38 §
IV with acc. طعم eat of
pers. and eer
عه
to show -.أت ب education
V. أدب one’s education
sot ? =
elder اكير pl. أفاعل (23).
Guossary A.
devoted to (to be) هيك
VIII with 3,
devotee part. act. of dus
V.
die (to) مات med. ».
difficult swe.
disagree (to) Wala VIII.
disease 2{o.
disgraceful ous
© Ee
dish .طعام
dislike (to) كرة impf. a.
disobedient part. act. of
.عصى
dissolve (to) ذَابَ med. .و
G- e+
distance .مسافة
distinguish (to) Qa
impf. Us
do (to) duc impf. a; das
impf. a (no. 139). — to
do according to Aves
with الك
Guossary A,
escape (to) iS impf. U.
escape nes
estate ead pl. dlas (9).
eulogize (to) cu impf.
a.; id. 7 no. 134).
evening. (late) oi
every ita with indeterm.
noun. 8 119d.
evidence Xi.
evil (to be) Fine med. 4.
— to do evil id. 7V.—
evil-doer part act. of
id. JV.
evil Ayu
example eee
excellent uals elat. § 63D.
except VI (= م لا cof) § 151.
— except that at إلا
§ 147 .
excepting VA ما with ace.
excuse (to) jae impf. i.
g¢
excuse ads.
86*
elect (to) صفى VU.
elegance ges
enamoured of (to be)
impf. a, with ace. عشق
ساجر enchanter
I. لقى encounter (to)
endurance 42
S
5
wee
enemy علو
enjoy oneself (to) طرب 7
entail (to) ورث IV.
enter (to) A&S impf,. u.
see § 107 note.
entertain (to) sy impf. i.
inf. 20, >
entrance de Se.
entrust (to) anyone with
ودع X with two accus.
envious part. act. of dans.
equal سواه
ere, conj. cyt Jas § 100.
err (to) bbe inf. ie,
Go a
error ضلال
87*
Go
five خمس §§ 91, 92a.
flare up (to) Pal 4
Ss
GS-e
flight .قرب
flourishing (to make) y4s
impf. u.
fly (to) from 3 impf. 4,
with .من
folk eg? Bl. § 88, 17; بشر
coll. (no. 120).
follow (to) es impf. a.
fool part act of Jgm.
for prep. ل 5 95h; conj.
cobs § 96 ©
forbid (to) a thing to any-
one حرم impf. i, with
two accus.
force (to) ye VIII. § 25
note.
forelock Zils pl. قَوَاعِلُ
(24).
forgive (to) ye impf. i.
S37
forgiving pret:
Gtuossary A.
exhort (to) Ls} imp/. 3,
§ 40a.
exist (to) كان mea. >
00 oe
exterior Kase.
paws (to) خرج Xx,
eye عين fem. § 72.
face .وجة
fast (to) ple med. 4.
gs =
father اب § 904.
exit
fault Ss pl. Syne (10).
favour Kees pl. ACh (3).
fear (to) حاف med. 0 impf.
a, § 42d.
feed (to) طعم IV.
fight (to) with one another
das 7
find (to) d=, imp/.i, § 40a.
fire ae
first Jal.
5 = of
fit ولي elat. ىلوأ٠
Guossary A.
gift Lye pl. delie (23).
see also prophecy.
-
girl ale.
give (to) عطا IV with two
acc. — to give way inf.
iS 3
>.
glad see tidings.
2 95 نر
a> pl. Slesf (17).
glorify (to) paw JJ.
8
glance
glorious pene elat. § 63b.
glory Sy
go round (to) sho med. ”
— to go away 2.85
impf. a — to go on
impf. i. — to go مَشى
- ee
out
impf. u. — خرج
to let go “ IV.
goblet * ag
god all God alll, by God
shits.
gold-piece jLizo pl. § 90k.
good noun and adj. wen
88*
eo (to اه Xx.
form صورة pl. has (4).
four el §§ 91, 92a.
fourth “رايع
friend ماح (see p.85*).
— of God = Abraham
— intimate صويق pl.
mee gt
افعلاء (18).
friendly isla).
from Prep. oe
fruit a
future life see life.
gain (to make) كسب V.
game duo.
garment O35 pl. فعال (9).
gate Sb.
gate-keeper Sip.
gather up (to) لقط 7
get to (to) فهى VII with
dt — to get through
es impf. a.
89*
585
وه 52
hate Yass.
have (to), is expressed by
the subject in the dative
(with J) followed by the
object in the nom. (as
ne x} he has money);
occasionally a form of
5 GS to be stands aa
the subject (as xd go
he had money). — ال
not to have either as in
the last example, but
with لبس (§ 50) instead
of GIS مَال) xb yaad)
or ل with following ob-
ject (§ 111) and dative
of subject (x) dle إلا
he فر § 12a. — he who
من 0 147.
head nae |
hear (to) ee impf. a, inf.
glen 1
ee Ree pl. فعول (10).
Guossary A.
elat. id. — to be good
Sas Hp .را — to
make good طاب med.
ws IP.
xls, or ا
Bal.
governor 9
grandee كلك pl. 5 88, 10.
grant (to) قطع IV with
two accus.
grateful (to be), [Ki impf.u.
great yes — a be, be-
كبر impf. u.
green (fresh) wb.
greeting paki
come great
guard (to) Glo med. ذو
hand dg § 90r.
al-Harit ey (Sf.
Hawi ar-Rasbid ضارون
«الوشيد
010854855 A.
hunt (to) dLe med. رى —
to go forth to huntid. V.
hunt, chase uae
hurry (to) have I.
al-Husain pecore Uf
hypocrisy (religious) al.
hypocrite part. act. of
نفق 7
TG.
ignorance igo
ignorant part. act. of he>.
idea ine pl. jelis (23).
if ol § 159; in hypothe-
tical clauses pal with the
perf. — if anyone ee
§ 159.
illustrious Looe elat.
§ 630.
imperfection inf. of فات
med. 4 VI.
in prep. &.
- -e
incumbent on (to be) جب 5
impf. i, with على § 40a.
90*
Gye +
ae Ball
heaven سماء pi. سموات
30007
heir part. act. of ورث pl.
83), (6).
hell-fire .الثار
help (to) — impf. u. —
to demand help of عان
med. 9 X with .ب
Heraclius dss.
high (As.
holy see war.
hope for (to) رجا impf. u,
with ace.
horse x5t0.
horsemen coll. dee
8 o-
house .بيت
how كن
however oo with follg.
-
verb.
humble (to be) وضع 27
hungry part. act. of جاع
med. 3
hundred مانغ 55 91, 92c.
591
Israel oo
Jalal ad-din edt جَلال
سهة5 ه
Jerusalem .القدس
Jews (the) coll. ليهو
join (to) Gd impf. a, with
=
Jonah (2553.
Joseph .يوسف
joy و
justice ee
keep from (to) ع oa impf.
a, with acc. and من
keep intact (to) بقى IP.
kill (to) Aas imp/f. u.
kindle (to) os, impf. i.
king ae.
kingdom aK.
kiss (to) قبل 7.
knock (to) at the door of
Guossary A.
indicate (to) Js impf. u,
with de.
indication duds 3.
indigestion foie
inform (to) خبر IV.
inhabit (to) {Xa impf. u.
inhabitants aa
inquire concerning (to)
ie? X with 5
intelligent part. act. of
hic.
interior .سريرة
interrupted (to be) 3
VI. om
intimate see friend.
into prep. 3
invest (to) anyone with
oe impf. a, with de
of pers.and acc. of thing.
inviolability apd.
invite to (to) LeS impf.
u, with J.
A. تاقه061055
leave, leave off (to) d,5
impf. u.
let (to) Ed, impf.a § 40a.
liar (to declare anyone to
be as كلب If
liberal
lie, tell a lie (to) Was
impf. 1; inf. OAS.
life (the future, next world)
م 5
Sul
life-time “eee
light (to) سرج IV. — to
give light to ضاء med.
و IV, with ال
like (like as) prep. J; 00+
الي of 2
US (with vb.sent.), كبا أى
(nom. sent. ).
likeness i.
little dud.
live (to) vile med. 6.
living Ren
long dag.
92*
impf. u, with Ae دَق
of pers. and acc. of door.
know (to) ple imp. a;
Ss imp. i (no. 132),
(5% impf. i (no. 73).
knowing part. act. of
elat. § 63 b.
مده5نس و
Koran أن yl.
SeEe-
lack pos:
1 en
amp سوّاج
laugh (to) Ass impf. a. —
to laugh at id. with من
— to make laugh id.
IV with ~ of means.
law-code = 9
lawful (to be) Albee impf. t.
lead (to) قات med.
leader see prayer.
learn (to) phe Vi
learned عليم pl. فعلاء
(20).
. Se
learning .علم
>
93*
antith. to woman (nos.
2, 43, 102), § 90 ©,
manifest part. act. بان
med. 6 IV.
mankind coil. celal.
manner oy:
marry (to) hy med. V.
2-0,
Mary ee
Sop
meat الحم
530
we و
Mecca XX».
.طب medicine
meet (to) oe impf. a.
mention (to) 3 impf. u.
mighty mse elat. § 630.
Sa 9 4%
mindful of (to be) ye
impf. u, with acc.
mill
Se 6
miracle .مكجوة
misfortune مصيبة pl.
فعائل (25).
Guossary A.
long for (to) شاق med.
7111, with de.
look at (to) bs impf. u,
mith 4}.—to look down
طرق IV.— to look into
VITL, with & § 25, طلع
note.
و
lord رب
love, fall in love with (to)
حب IV, with ace.
woo
love .حب
loving inf. iss.
lower (to) yas impf. u.
lust عب — lusts oles.
make, make to be(to) das
impf.a, (with two accus.).
— to make (poetry) JG
med. >
malady .سقام
هطو
al-Ma’mtn - .المامو
man JS; pl. Las (9); 858
0105548 A,
Muzahim 0 pay
naked aye fem. Br
name راشم
narrow he (= Gans)
elat. Sil
nature erb pi. § 88, 9.
near {to place) قرب II.
needle ep 7
neighbour ا ر
niggardly das — to de-
clare anyone to be n.
ds 7
niggardliness A.
night dats
noble — nobles coll.
ما
not see § 150.
now con). S.
nutriment .قوت
5 ta
011 5 85; also .ايها
obedient to (to be) كَنَتَ
impf. u, with J.
94*
modesty .حياء
moment (this) Keli.
money حجان — piece of
money درهم pl. Ales
(23).
So <
month re
morning (early) 5.
morrow, to-morrow he
Moses oy
Soo
mosque dso.
=
most elat. of much.
mountain jus.
much كثير elat. § 63b. —
to be much, abundant
iS impf. u. — to make
much كف IV.
al-Mugira المغيوة
Muhammed oe,
music glow.
Muslim (to become a)
IV. — Muslim id, part.
act.
95*
pardon (to) las impf. u,
with .على
part (= some) yas;
(§ 133).
pass on (to let) je med.
9 IV. 1
2
pearls coll.
pebble iLas.
people at.
perhaps لعل § 1474.
perish (to) هلك impf. i;
— to cause to .م id. IV.
person (man) ejlaadl:
Pharao فرعو
physician Saab.
pick up (to) Le impf. u.
piece, see 5 73c.
piety xo.
place (occasion) eye pl.
deli (28).
place (to) و impf. 4.
8 404.
Guossary A,
observe (to) عبر 21
occasion (as @ conse-
quence) (to) عقي IV,
with two accus.
Omar ees
on acount of prep. J.
one as means or adj.
del; fem. — with
pron. suffix Sl.
only USI.
onslaught 38
open (to) Vem impf. a;
inf. و9 on.
رع
opinion (to be of) sl)
impf. a, § 49d.
of
or أو 0
other .آخر
overtake (to) رك oT 4
owner rele fe Slat
(17).
page boy ak.
Paradise sii.
0105845 A.
direction of
(§ 83).
prayer U3. —leader of
prayer alal.
preach to (to) obs impf.
u, with acc.
precede (to) poe 1.
prepare (to) c IV.
presence .حشر
present (gift) ie (inf. of
heey)
preserve (to) as imp/f. a.
pride 00
prince vel pl. 2083 3 (20).
Ss”
prison ere
Sof
promise AL».
prophecy (gift of) By. _—
to pretend to prophecy
فيا
prophet ae pl. ell.
(18).
prostrate oneself (to) os
impf. u.
96*
plants coll. ele (masc.).
please (to) علكب IV. —
to be well pleased with
a. with ee عدن رْضى
pleasure ad pl. § 76.
pliancy al 5
أَفْعَال pi. شعر poem, poetry
.)17(
poet ye.
poison oe
pl. ظريف polite scholar
.)20( فعلاء
.)20( تعلاء 2 poor pas
possessor ,, fem. tS
§ 907,
poverty ر
power 855.
praise (to) Qa impf. a.
praise (God) 3:
pray (to) Ne 7.
prayer go (= صلوة
8 43 note) pl. صلوات
97*
reflection inf. of فكر 8
refuse (to) el impf. a. —
to r. to do, id. with أن
and subj.
regard, with r. to الى
regret woh 1
relate (to) حكى impf. i.
related to قريب with 65
reliance inf. VIII, see rely.
religion ers
rely on (to) وكل VILL, 7
As § 404.
repel (to) 8) impf. u.
repent (to) ob med. 9.
repentance «كََامَة
S--
report n>:
reproach (to) لام med. و
restore (t0) I, med. 4 IV.
restrain from (to) كأ
u, with acc. and pe: _
to r. one’s self from id.
with oe
G
GuLossary A.
protect (to) حرس impf. u, i.
provide for (to) Sy mor.
u, with two accus.
S- 55
punishment ks
purify (to) yok 7 — to
oneself id V.
8a >»
purse §
pursue (to)
put (to) جعل impf. a. —
to put off till آخر Il.
with J.
3 VII.
oe
qualify (to) inf. Ges.
raise, raise np Ata) رقع
impf. a; inf. ey:
Ramadan -رمَضان
ar-Rashid dues.
reach (ta): J, o IV.
read (to) fe one a.
recede from (to) xo impf.
a, with ue
recite (to) ‘3
reed-pen a.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
impf. a.
Guossary A.
Bye
sea >
second .مان 35
سر dual (17).
security .ضمان
secret
Ee
see (to) رأى 7 a, 5 49 b.
seedy part. pass. of yee
seek (to) طَلَبَ impf.u. —
toseek for one’sself,id.V.
seemly (to be) بغى 7.
seize (to) ja) impf. u.
self ns § 12e.
send (to) رسل IV; for
wits; with .ب
serpent الشبان
servant (i. e. of God) dae
pil. dls (9).
serve wine to (to) iw
impf. i, with two acc.
set about (to) je med. رى
with impf. § 99 note a.
doe
seventy .سبعوني
shadow Ab.
98*
Ss
resurrection Kola’.
return to (to) & \ impf. Zt,
with ae
right (due) حق a5
right, right hand cose
risein value(to) Ke impf.u.
roof حك
routed (to be) هزم VII.
rule (to) nee med. ».
run races (to) سبق VIZ.
saddle (of an ass) Bas:
— saddle-girth ne
safe (to be) سلم impf. a.
ee «السفاح
salt م
save (to) سلم TI.
say (to) قال mea. .و — to
say of anyone, id. with
oe
to s. to anyone, .عن
id. with J.
scatter (to) قشر impf. u, 7.
99*
sober pore act. of ls.
358 7
Socrates سقراط
solicitude iso.
son ol § 907 (pluralis
sanus with names of
tribes).
S- ot -E و -&
songkasel اغان .7م (delet).
Gos
ذن 8011077
spare (to) = X, § 49.
speech Ap.
spend 2) (of time) inf.
spirit Oo
staff Las.
stand (to) au med. و :
act. pl. 5 88, 9. — to
stand still Wai, imp/. 7.
star د 7
start off (to) a>, 7 ا"
stay (to) و :7160 انام
steal (to) re ee i.
stratagem .حيلة
G*
Guossary A,
shift (to) Se impf. i.
S- °
ship سغينة
shirt يدن
shoulder ,كتف
sign SGI pl. § 76.
silent (to be) inf. oo
sin Sebi.
singing (art of) .غناك
sit with (to) جلس 7
nith acc.
size Xa.
slave JA pl. مَفَاعِيلُ
(27).— slave-girl Eaves
pl. dels (24).
sleep, go to sleep (to) eG
med. دو impf.a; part. act.
pl. § 88, 9.
small pe: — to become
8. Da impf. a.
smoke ed.
GY -
snow a.
80 conj. .ف
0612055485 A.
ten ye 55 91, 92a.
than yo § 630.
يبن 57
that pron. ذلك 5 13 ©.
that (in order that) J with
subj. § 100.
that conj. ol (before a
=e
verb) § 1485: أن (before
a noun) § 1474.
that which .ما
then 2
thereupon م
thief yal pl. مُغول (10).
55 8 عور
thing 8 شى pl. افعال (17)
but without the nuna-
~~ عه
tion zal.
think (to) oe impf. 4 mith
two aceus.; 3 inf. ام
third ene § 93a.
thirty تلانون 55 91, 92B.
this هدًا § 13d.
Thora (the) التوراة
100*
Gye
stream سيل
meena em
Surba شعْبَة
submissive (to be) Jo V.
subsistence Sy
sufficiency LAS.
supplication gles.
surely J (after al)
tail Res
take (to) Kea impf. u. —
(of a city) Ax impf. a.
to t. away ذهب impf.a.
with .ب — to t. hold of
-
5 عن عم
dal impf. u, with =D
talk to (to) كلم If, with
acc. — to t. to one an-
other, id. V.
talk os.
tattle hg
teach (to) pte IT, with two
accus.
101*
transitory part. act.of ist?
travel (to) ساو med. ى٠
جضن عاكة
treasure Kise.
2
G-- -
tree Ssh.
tribe SLs pl. alas (25).
trick Uys.
trust lal.
truth .صق
turn (to) Sle med. —
to turn from عرض Vi,
with 586 — to t. away
(act.) 5) impf. u. — to
t. away from (neut.) Jy
IL, with “من
twinkling Sb
Ubaid dase.
ugly 56 fem. $2.
unbeliever part. act. of y's
pl. § 76.
uncover (to) BES impf. i.
9 ow
understanding (las.
Guossary A.
those who (0 § 14).
- oF من ١
thou .انث
thought ye
three تلات §§ 91,99 4. °
through (by means of)
Prep. ب٠
throw away (to) is”) impf.
i. — to throw down لقى
IV.
tidings, to give glad tid-
ings to anyone of a
thing .ti. 77, with ace.
of pers. and .ب
time (bsj.— (proper) time
G o-
.وشت
tipsy olga.
title-page be ees :
irection) prep. :الى
7 Abe of 0 ae -
tongue #لسان i Lesh (16).
towards prep. dts
Sog
transgression 430 pl.
.)10( مُعُولٌ
A. لاظد1055
waste es fem. oan
render waste خرب I.
water ale 5 90 .
well ee
well-pleased see please. .
West مَغْربٌ
whale Wye.
what rel. interr. .ما
when rel. interr. :متى con).
.158 8 إِذَا
where? ook .— from
where, whence ee eer
which relat. .الى
whichever sl § 14.
while (a) سَاعَةٌ
whilst cf. 5
who rei, ess 7 interr. .من
whoever, whoso ee §§148,
159.
whole ee:
why? J; why then? لِمَا ذا
102*
unmindful of (to be) سلا
V, with عن
until 6077. ae generally
with subj. (cf. 5 152¢).
upon prep. .قوق
used to oe med. with
follg. impf. § 99 © subj.
gen. betw, كان and impf.
value Kad.
vehemence Sm.
vehement ole.
verily إن §§ 147, 96 4
viand pales مَفَاعِلَة.1م )28(.
violent Sys.
wade through (to) (sla
med. » with acc.
want (to) راد med. 4 IV.
want .حاجة
war (holy) inf. Jlis of
dem HL
Waraka رق >
wash (to) (Gd impf, i.
Giossary A. 103*
wick RLS. word RAS.
: ae So 8 oF
meee noes yi work كيل hk بن أككال
will 0 شاع med. .ى world (the, this) “Sout.
wind fe fem. § 72. worst 5 § 63 note.
wine yee: write to (to) iS imp/. وه
wisdom :شالب with bf
wise حَكيم pl. فعلاء )20(. wrong (to, to do) pb
5و
med. 4 IV. impf. 03 inf. pAb. راد wish (to)
يِل 04 :(.7 (in company مع with
all وو . .
(in union w., by ye past. اب
means of). year BLS pl. § 90m.
ithout ik» (with gen.). os
gen.) yes rs 7 يقير withou
elat. § 63b. صغيمر YOUng .ويل woe to! J
عر هق fx 9
wolf 50. pl. dell (23).
Oo ل 22 SE o- 0 1ه
فعلان youngman <A pil. — .مراة woman sal
plur. sling § 907. (21).
9 » 8 Sy ?
wood dys. — piece of youth pds
ل > ساق
eae
٠.
wood Kise Zaid .زيد
Giossary 8.
104*
GLOSSARY B.
SLE
dal fem. sos] one,some
one.
SE S-o
1 (§ 90c) إخوة.1م brother,
neighbour.
bet impf. u to take, to
sfeze, catch hold of.
VIITto make; w. 2 Acc.
to adopt, regard (as).
yall to put off, postpone.
Ss
2
end.
af the last, secpnd,
3a Ni the next world.
4 2
at fem. eel other.
Pa
ادب 7 to conduct one’s
self with propriety.
Sol good breeding,
politeness, education,
polite reproof.
{ part. interr. often before
the first half of an
alternative question.
5 = Ee
WI st. c. yal (§ 90a) father.
me .
dol imp/. ito stay, remain.
adv. always, for ابلا
ever; with neg. never.
al impf. é to run away.
il impf. t; ¢. acc, come,
come to. ¢.acc. p. et
to bring, to give .م
somethg. to some one.
‘ مد
yl impf. u to make an im-
pression.
Soe Shee 5
yl pl. I trace, sign,
mark.
Go
Ee
ye! wages, hire, reward.
105*
Guossary 2.
Sie 9-8-0 oe
إداوة vessel for holding الاسكندر (the Arabs have
treated the first two
letters of the name as
the article) Alexander.
> “عم Ong OH
Oia IT Alexandria. ريّة
v. (Gare أسم
6 yt
the root, the chief اصل
thing.
Sot 8 بعد 1
eat pl. افاق region, di-
strict.
(مم005 أقاليم «م إقليم
region, country.
dst 6 gather strength,
become confirmed.
-- =
أكل impf. u to eat; to get
to eat.
III to eat with some
one.
AS أ inf. T eating.
عو ه
مَاكول various kinds
of food.
ae oF
الا part. composed of أن
and 5.
water, made of skins.
go! 27 to pay (tribute),
St lo! see! when lo!
tot conj. when, if; adv.
lo! see!
- .f
أذنى impr. a; ©. J pers. et
ب rei to allow, permit.
X to ask permission.
هو 8,07
Ol pl أذان ear.
3-5 3
أذن 7 I permission.
- 2 . .
اذى 7710 injure, molest.
br oboe
الاردن Jordan, the Jor-
dan district.
ae
أرسطاطاليس Aristotle.
SE
ارض fem. earth, land, coun-
try, ground.
s, -= 8
أساس
ae . .
caf impf. i to tie, bind,
take captive.
s 26 5
أسير a captive.
010554285 B.
el part. interr, or.
al impf. u, to direct one’s
courte by pomeunng:
el pl. اميك mother.
Sat
kof the people of a
(particular) religion,
nation, people.
wee
Jimpf. u, ©. ace. p. eto
.م to order; command.
6 oF
yl command, power;
5 -
صاحب
Boro
yl { commander.
affair, matter.
ual commander,
prince.
5 وصمهوط F 5
ولط امير المومنين prince
of the (true) believers,
commander of the faith-
ful = the Caliph.
2 3
امن imps. a, c. ace. to be
safe from .
IV to believe.
ial gs slat female slave.
eo Umeyyatma’ sname).
(= ¥
(§ 151).
sil fem. ast (§ 14a) he
that; whoso, who,which.
-5
الف impf. a to become
familiar with .
VIIT to be on intimate
terms, familiarly ac-
ob) except
quainted (with).
كن و5 Shines G o%
wast ol. of or الوف
thousand.
GS of
U,Jlintimate, familiar.
ail impf. a to feel, suffer
مقلم
sal painful.
xt pi. all a god.
الله cx Ji et xl (the
true) God, Allah. dus
الله name of a man.
welll 0 Goa!
إلى prep. (§ 960) towards,
in the direction of, to,
till, as far as.
107*
IGE eo &
Syl fem. أولى first (determ.
also beginning.)
at 2 0
aad and acc. اولي V. 9d.
el oa where? whither?
Gil Jf whither? من
= (from) whence?
where?
Si~
x3) sign, revelation.
gst (§ 85) particle of ex-
clamation.
prap. in, on, at; with, by ب
~ means of; for (of price),
by (in oaths). ب ~ 151
lo! there was .
dsl Babylon, Babylonia.
-3-
دوس impf. u to be brave,
courageous.
رعو
courage,strength, باس
power.
59
8S ال - 2
بعر sea, great river.
Be a .
{do impf. a to begin.
Guiossary B.
ot (§ 100, 148) that.
ay (§§ 147, 148) that.
wl (§§ 159, 160) if.
lo! truly, verily )147 §( إن
(often untranslatable).
-EB
It pron. (§ 12) I.
of of
asl pron. ; fem. wl, thou.
Pe
impf. a to have fami- أنس
liar intercourse. with.
coll. wala man, سان
Soe
انف nose. .
ee part.
mal and Le) only (refers
in this sense usually to
last word of sentence),
but.
(composed of
Ee
gl part. whence? how?
أهب Ve. J rei to equip
one’s self, to be prepar-
ed (for any thing).
9 ١
wt coll. one’s kinsfolk,
family, people (cf.§133),
inhabitants.
Guossary 8.
OBL pl وطن the
lowest part; the heart
or secret thoughts of
a person,
impf. a to arouse, يعت
awaken; to send.
Axe impf.u or jes impf.
ato be distant, far off.
VI to be far distant
from each other.
chxs prep. after, after
the departure, death
01 ... das من after
the death of,
one (§ 133), part, تعفن
portion; some (of).
-
dss impf. a to hate.
hatred. يغض
id., بغضة
being hated.
state of
lass hatred.
impf.i to seek, strive. بغى
108*
Jods 77 acc. to exchange,
alter, change.
Xc. ace. et ب to take
something in exchange
for (something else).
> ب impf.ato go away
cr pf. 8 v?
cease.
ye IT. ¢ ace. pers. eto
to tell .م
something as a piece of
some one
good news.
ae يسم
yer or ye to glance,
perceive; to understand
something thoroughly.
S--
was pil. أَبْصَارِ glance,
intelligence.
287
> to come too late.
IV to delay.
2 to find that sthg.
comes too late.
ees belly; bottom (of a
valley).
Geo
يطنة
109*
ws) impf. i to build.
بناء inf.
al ($ 908, 1 بن 501
- ب Cel son.
يدت ابئة (§ 902) daughter.
Rags pl. pales animal, a
brute beast.
غوسم 9 ا 9
hus, door. أبواب pi. ياب
house, د Sys ترافِيات ليت
family. JUST ads
treasury.
eb impf. 3 to sell, buy.
on inf. I selling, sale.
med. s IV to be evi- بان
dent.
oes
(§ 114) prep.
oe
prop. bet. the hands a
before, in presence of.
ins conj. with a nom.
sentence: while, whilst.
S-
evidence, proof. بينة
Guossary B.
VII to be necessary,
meet, behoove.
bs Hippocrates.
بقى impf. a to remain, re-
main over, continue in
life.
las inf.
pl Aba Bekr, name بكر
of the first Caliph.
impf. i to weep. بكى
AG pl. ow country, vil-
lage(plur.coll.country).
imp/.u, c.acc.to reach, جا
attain to; to come to
one’s ears.
Bilkis, بلقيس
Sheba.
%G impf. u to try, afflict.
Ag part. certainly; “nay,
“on the contrary.
(ex 4s) wherewith? by بم
what means?
queen of
Guossary 2.
impf. i to be finished. تم
es perfect.
5
nom. unit. a date. ثمرة
d note.) the 2 §( التورية
Torah (five books of
Moses).
x to ask help in se-
curing (blood) revenge.
impf. uto be or stand كنت
firm, to be fixed.
IV to fix, establish,
CF و < Ss
con- !43 .8744 قابت
stant, fixed, firm.
AS impf.a, to lose a child
(acc.) by death (said of
a mother),
wos FoR x05 three.
thirteen. قلات عشرة
adv. thereupon, then. 3
ee impf.i to bend.
X to make an ex-
ception of.
110*
masc. coffin. كابوت
[5 Xto be well arranged,
be in good order.
essimor. a,c.acc.to follow.
IV c. 2 ace. to make
sthg. follow, to attach
sthg. to, some one.
VII to follow, en-
deavour to aquire.
as prep. under. من
كدت id.
earth, morsel of ترات
earth.
Js impf. u to aban-
don, leave, give up,
omit.
fem. (or. (وقى (of تقوى
sp msc.) piety.
ds fem. (§ 13 c) that
(woman).
pl. PRUNE pupil, كليية
disciple.
111*
las impf. u to be rude.
جفاء inf. tyranny.
je. impf. i to be great,
powerful, exalted.
sae great, illustrious,
sound (in judgment).
Nes might, majesty.
meee impf.i to sit down;
c. ل to give an audience.
LIT c. ace. to sit down
by some one, sit with.
ke inf. sitting.
لسن pl. خلا
companion 026 sits
with.
oe 5 ا
a live coal. جبرة
<> impf. a to bring to-
gether, gather, collect.
nith 2 ad to bring
about a meeting of two
parties, to have them
both come into one’s
presence.
Guossary B.
Sos
garment. شوب
ae.
yslestrength of character.
9
new. ليل
Gas kid,
Shs VIII to draw to
oneself.
a impf. u to drag, pull.
oF impf. i to run, flow.
جارية pl. he (§ 89)
female slave, ,young girl.
ae island; sedi {Meso-
potamia.
Sy impf. i to reward,
requite.
LITto pray God to re-
quite some one for sthg.
the body. حَسَل
hac to place; make, pre-
pare; ©. 2 acc. to make
to be sthg.; to begin
(§ 99 note a).
impf.ito become dry. حت
GLossary B,
ae belonging to the
demons, a demon.
Lis 7777 to avoid.
6 ¢L
. oe 5
جد side. جدب &
in comparison with.
جنازة pl. جنائز corpse,
funeral bier.
gS impf. ato take trouble
about sthg., exert one’s
self.
ITT to fight, do battle,
esp. w. unbelievers 1. e.
non-Moslems.
Aur impf. a to be igno-
rant. sige a
pl. pens igno- من
rant.
ede the state of
ignorance, i. ©. (pre-
islamic) heathenism.
aes hell
جاب med و Ic ace
112*
وم
ae without os and
mith
a es to do sthg.
VIII to come together,
to assemble.
a) to decide upon,
cue the whole, all
as ace. of con- جَيِيعًا)
dition: all together).
aoe
party (of people).
thes to be beautiful.
es beautiful,hand-
some, elegant, kind.
a number,
impf. u to cover over, جن
conceal.
Kis pl. ise garden
of trees, Paradise.
: دك ره
interior, heart, جنان
soul, character.
coll. demons,Jinn. جن
113*
.© أحَب (6h حبيب
Jt pro dativ. pers.) pl.
ع الم
dear to some أحياء
one, beloved, friend.
ع هه و5
kase love, friendship.
qtuas Abyssinian.
Us impf. uc. acc. pers. et
rei to present some ابا
one with sthg.
3
o> until; so that; for
the purpose of; (some-
times = finally).
, = impf. u to make the
~ pilgrimage to Mecca.
a
pl. es the جكة
pilgrimage to M.
5
?- 2 وات 9
oe 5
good جع pl. حكة
reason or excuse.
Osis impf. a to prevent,
exclude.
G,- 5 x
las curtain, veil.
H
Guossary B.
pers. et St r, to give or
grant an answer, an
audience to some one,
listen to, promise, con-
cedesthg.to one, comply
with his request.
Xto hear, in the sense
of answer (a petition).
ols med. و to be generous.
yl med. و 6. acc. to pass
by.
III c. acc. to pass
beyond, exceed, trans-
gress.
ele med. و to be hungry.
REGS (nom. unit. §
73 c) hunger.
جاء med. رى ©. 060.50
c. ب to bring.
2 gee inf.
ae army.
ae IV to love.
‘a
eo
rs love.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
0610554255 B.
imp/. i to strive eager- حبق
ly after.
oss eagerness, zeal,
anger.
He. ge nm to سرض
incite (to), stir up (to).
mee
IV to burn, singe. حرق
4-
Js 77 605 move, to stir
up, agitate.
حرم impf. u, ©. على to be
forbidden to one, to be
legally prohibited one.
JI to pronounce un-
lawful, declare to be for-
bidden, to prohibit.
to be troubled, sad. حزن
IV to trouble, make
sad.
Comms impf. u to reckon.
lias reckoning.
ins impf. u to envy.
pores impf.u to be beauti-
ful, good.
IV to do good.
114*
ae porter, gate-
keeper, chamberlain.
impf. u to be new. حلاثت
IT ©. acc. pers. to in-
form, relate.
X to newly adopt, get
sthg. new.
و
a story, nar- حل يث
rative (applied esp. to
the traditions respect-
ing Muhammed).
poe impf. a, .ع acc. vel من
to be on one’s guard
against...
jos inf.
d= impf.a to be clever,
skilled.
)impf.atobe free. = رشاخر
5
GS
we
ply Hai free,noble. حر
to make war 7717 حوب
upon, fight with some
one.
VI to carry on war
with each other.
115*
VII 60 ب 7. to take
care, give heed.
ee impf.i to be right.
cs truth, certainty;
right, claim.
{aa impf.uto be despised.
X to despise.
yes despised.
Ks imp/.uto decide, give
judgement.
9-0
x X= wisdom.
ne pl. حكماء wise,
learned.
& oa &, D>
go- حكام pl. حاكم
vernor, ruler, judge.
impf. i to relate. حكى
a
impf. u to loosen, حل
untie; impf. i to be al-
lowed.
IV or X to pronounce
sthg. allowed, declare
lawful, to allow.
A= V to adorn one’s self.
H*
Guossary B.
X to find to be good.
beauty , good- حسن
ness.
Biss 2a
=> elat. pan!
beautiful, good.
5
. لني
coll. suite, servants, حشم
escort.
ve
yee impf. u, C. acc. pers.
vel As to be present
with or at.
IV to bring forward,
esp. to bring before a
sovereign or ruler.
VIII c. acc. to come
upon one (said of death).
Pass.
death.
to be near to
i impf. u to surround.
Vis imp/. 1 to dig.
VIII to dig for one’s
self.
han impf. ato take care
of,to guard, to be atten-
tive.
Guossary 2.
VII .ع Bi to require,
be in need of.
ee 6. ب need, want;
C. dt request.
حول prep. round, round
about.
tee state, condition,
situation.
حوى impf. i, to gather
together, take posses-
sion (of everything).
impr. § 49 ¢. to live. حى
=
S tribe, clan.
1
OG 5
life. حيوة
Gade impf. u to be bad,
wicked.
Ss -
bad, vile, كحبيت
vicious, profligate.
حب 77 ©. 2 ace. to relate,
tell some one sthg.
FIT to test,
prove.
try,
116*
wes (1. pers. Cased) impf. a.
to be hot.
we fem. fever.
ديام pigeon.
das impf. i to praise.
Ree: Muhammed (the
praised one).
Bes imp/. u to be foolish.
Bix foolish, stupid.
eee impf.ito load, carry;
bring; transport. c. على
to attack; 6. acc. pers.
et على r. to make s. 0.
sit upon sthg.; to in-
cite to some action.
Bas to commit sin.
F to purify one’s self
from sin.
bis II to embalm.
eee ودرا (a man’s
name).
حا med. 511 2 4 (S44
note b) ©. إلى to compel.
خب -
6
117%
forward, to produce, to
X bring out, draw out.
.& tribute,
expel.
2
حرس impf. a to be dumb.
--e
impf. i to make a خرق
hole in, to pierce.
VIT to have a hole put
through, be pierced.
VIII to break through,
flow through.
o> impf. u to store up.
كاين ./مهواقة treas-
ure, treasure-house.
acc. rT. كك ,@ impf. حخشى
to fear sthg.
re impf. u to be some
one’s special property.
eles coll. we an
intimate friend; persons
of distinction.
was impf. i to dye (esp.
the hair).
Guossary B.
Gee S,-0F
خبر pl. اخبار infor-
mation, news, affair.
Ss 5 5
as well informed,
wise.
oes impf.i to make bread,
to bake.
وه 9
ye a cake of bread,
bread.
oes impf. i to seal up, put
one’s seal to.
RSAS Hadiga (Muham-
med’s first wife).
pas impf. u to serve.
85
Rodin inf.
aes coll. (the staff
of) servants.
a servant. حادم
ac
impf. i to prostrate
one’s self, to fall down.
-
aes impf. u to go out,
come out, go out from,
depart from.
IV to bring forth or
Guossary B.
impf. uto be behind, كلف
to succeed.
II to leave behind.
pl. slate Ca- حليفة
liph.
ees impf. u to create,
form.
So
one’s out- )1 خلق
ward form; 2) coll.
people.
9
23 5 واج
gle pl. aks I one’s
(natural) disposition,
character, mental and
moral traits,
MS impf. u to go out (of
fire and light).
cia ferment.
a> fem. fermented
drink, wine.
SE med. و (§ 42a; 44)
impf. a to fear.
a
JI to put in fear.
ه90
> fear.
هار med. «5 to be good.
118*
otra dyed.
“as IX to be or become
iS
green.
bs impf. a to sin.
SlLbL jf al-Hattab (a man’s
name).
Ge
impf. i to be light خف
(opp. of heavy).
eb LES! light, كقيف
- we
ds impf. u to be ever-
lasting, to remain.
VIII to appropriate خلس
to oneself secretly.
oe
ace. pers. et .6 77 خلص
to rescue, to free. من
pals escape, way of
escape.
LIS FUT prop. to become
commingled; to come
on (said of the darkness
in which objects can
no longer be disting-
ished).
119*
& Sao
coll,, nom. unit. Bos د
pearl.
IV to attain, reach, درك
comprehend.
GS-0
pl. pets a dirhem, درهم
a silver coin.
impf. i to know. )6
IV caus.
impf. u to call, to call دعا
to ب .© upon, invoke,
pray to God for some-
thing, to call to one’s
aid, to name; ©. ace. et
Jt to induce s. 0. to do
sthg., invite, summon.
VI to call to one an-
other, c. ب to bring a
complaint against .
Geos
prayer. دعو
impf. a to push; hand 235
over, deliver up.
impf. u, ¢. ee to come 35(
near.
Guossary 2.
PIII to choose, select
for one’s self.
es (also as edat.) good
(adj. and noun), pro-
sperity.
JA med. ws 7 to imagine
something.
No Darius.
es impf. i to walk slowly.
Bald pl. O55 beast of
burden and for riding.
pe IV to turn one’s back,
go away.
we =
So 6. acc. to enter, to
come; c. As to come to
see one, to consummate
marriage with (core);
بين to interfere.
IV to bring into, in-
troduce.
inf. I. دخول
dats entering,future,
next.
Gtossary B.
ligion.
jase denar, a gold coin.
ذا pron. (§ 13) this.
5 Le (§ 15) what (then)?
6B.
2d wolf.
2d impf. a, ©. ace. to
frighten.
yo impf.u, c. acc. to think
of, mention, ame,
speak of. Inf. 3%.
Js impf. i to be insignifi-
cant, feeble.
S$
ذليل miserable,
feeble.
2.1 Sa
ن ليك fem. SA pron. (§ 13 ¢)
that.
- 7s
2d impf.ato 50,50 away.
IV to cause to disap-
pear.
2.25 gold.
120*
S
elat. re دنى
humble, trivial, near;
عه سه
sof low,
-=&
pl. اداني the nearest
parts.
U36 fem. world.
els med. 4 II to subdue.
Id med. »C. J to surround.
pl. 543 dwelling- كار
place, house, abode,
court.
to remain, con- و med. دام
tinue, be durable.
cg Prep. on this side of,
below, beneath; other
than, exclusively of, be-
sides, before. من دون id.
(S90 impf. a to be indis-
‘posed.
ZV to treat medically.
21,6 medicine.
wld med. «5 to be in sub-
jection.
121*
GSoeL
house, p/. real رباع pl. زجع
estate.
ar-Rabi, (a الربيغ
man’s name).
عور و
fem. i335! four. اربع
as, : turn back
impf. i to ; )>
مدع
رجو
dé, fem. pl. dey foot,
leg.
dS} pl. Jls, a man.
r=) imp. u to stone.
8
رجيم stoned, accursed.
acc. to hope .ع impf.u, رَجا
for sthg.
وي to be wide, broad.
IT c. ب to bid anyone
ee ver
welcome .(مرحبا)
impf. a, €. acc. pers. رَحم
to have pity on, com-
passion for, some one.
Guossary B.
so the (man) of, possessor
of cf. §$ 907, 133.
ald med. ى to become
known, spread abroad.
IV to make public,
publish.
uly pl. رووس head, the
chief thing.
S se.
Udy, Dl. thangs leader,
general.
1
imps. Sp (§ 49 6) راى
to see, be of opinion,
think, believe, consider
advisable, 6. 2 acc. to
regard or esteem a per-
son or thing as, hold
to be.
WSIe. 2acc.to show.
ar insight, counsel,
advice.
S lord, God.
bs, ؛ impf. v. to سحي
وبيط elat. ربط | se-
curely fastened, 0
01085425 B.
IT to set (of jewels), رصع
inlay.
رضع impf. a to suck (at
the breast).
IV to give suck.
impf. a, ©. acc. to be رضى
content with, acquiesce
in, take pleasure in.
ic xf رضى God be
gracious unto him!
IV to satisfy, render
content.
ws) inf. I pleasure,
delight (in sthg.).
راجت امد
ds, 7777 to shake, tremble.
s*) impf. ato watch, tend.
راع pl. sé, herdsman,
shepherd.
وعم pl. Gls subjects
(also sing. coll.).
pasture- مراع pl. موعاة
ground. 7ت
122*
VI to take compassion
on each other.
سوه
loving kindness وحية
(esp. of God), deed of
kindness.
ise) fem. will.
4 vel وخى to be flaccid,
soft.
3 impf. u to bring back,
give back.
77777 to turn back.
2 inf. I giving back.
By impf. u, ¢. 2 ace. to
present, grant, furnish,
bless with, give food.
Sy food(esp.as given
by Allah), sustenence.
a Marzuk, (man’s
name).
رسل IV to send.
S ف
mes- رسل pl. رسول
senger, apostle (esp. of
God).
123*
inf. stepping وكرت
into, aboard (a ship).
lary name of a month.
is") impf. i, 6. .اب to
a pelt with.
, impf. a, c. ace. rei
anes be afraid of sthg.
اهِب monk.
ch IV med. 4, 6. acc. et
من to rid .
رو (for 0 fem.,
pl. oy wind.
سل حوس و»
smell, scent. راعة
of, med.. IV c. acc, to will,
wish, intend, endeavour
to.
to seek, desire, و med. آل
attack.
-
impf. 3 to relate. روى
Lis; impf. a to advance
slowly.
impf. a to sow. زرع
GuossarRy B,
ws) impf. a to have a
strong craving for; e.
oe
ype to give up the
craving for sthg., to
shun, ica
ind} pl أعقة (fiat) ج5528 -
رقع impf. a to raisé, lift
up (the voice); ©. Jt to
bring sthg. before the
judge.
feo) high, noble.
53) IVc. ب to be kind,
gentle with .
GS -o
Bs yepl. ais elbow.
5 impf.i to be or become
thin, abject, mean.
Sy bondage, slavery.
رقع impf.ato mend, patch.
wb, patch.
LS impf. a, c. acc. to
mount on horse-, camel-
back &c., to ride.
GLossaRy 8.
med. 4 II 3 2 ace. زاج
vel J صن acc. et .م vel
to marry some one to,
join in wedlock; c. ace.
to take in marriage.
V c. ace. reflex.
Shy med.
22 ie os
impf. u to visit.
MN med. , inpf. a to cease.
7 ae
Jt inf. cessation. Noon
or afternoon.
S33 impr ito remove, clear
away.
زأوية pl. زوايا corner.
Ol, med. .< impf.i,c. 2ace.
4 Ss
to give more, to add to.
dupe inf.; increase,
addition.
w part. § 95d; 99a.
poe impf. ato be or remain
over.
124*
£)) coll. seed, green
corn, green crop, differ-
ent sorts of grain.
to shake violently. رعرع
IT (reflexive).
pe) impf. u to assert, re-
late.
55 impf. u to conduct a
bride to her husband’s
house.
6, ult. 5 to increase, to
be good, pure.
ع وم
es) elat. iss}! pure,
delicate, dainty.
مع
ل سام
77 .(.قطوطة) to shake زلول
to shake (int.), tremble.
eyimpfu to fasten securely.
pls bridle (nose-rein).
hss time, space of time.
Loy impf.u to shoot up, to
flourish, prosper.
Sor
125*
S vp
pl. ore saddle. سرج
s. IV to be in haste, ©.
to make haste with... 3
Sh elat. Bul بع
quick, swift, speedy.
Surika, (a man’s ساقة
name),
eb impf.a to spread out.
GS oe
zh. the flat roof of
١
eastern houses.
Belin pl. سَوَاعِلُ the fore-
arm.
now impf. i, Cc. ب vel في
pers. to lodge informa-
tion against, denounce.
6,708
as pl. اسفار journey.
ship. سفينة
impf. u to become سكت
or be silent.
G--
you impf. a to he or be-
come drunk.
GuLossary B.
ple remaining, the
rest, all.
EL
سال impf. a, 6. 2 ace. to
ask one for sthg. c. ace.
pers. et عَن to enquire
for, ask respecting.
1 beggar.
GE ده
مسالة the asking, a
question.
سبيل masc. or fem. way,
right way, road.
8 ied
wa fem. Raw Six.
impf. u ori to hide, ساف
shield (e. g. from the
gossip of the people).
impf. u, ec. J, to سكل
prostrate one’s self
uae
Syst i
ewes mosque.
7 IVe. dt pers. to tell
- 0. sthe. as a secret.
Souk
one pl. اسرار secret.
61055485 B.
elas laddex:
hy immunity from
ills, prosperity, wel-
fare. hdl sale
peace be with him!
(parenthetically placed
after the names of high
religious personalities).
عن ات عو و4
ow peace and pro-
sperity.
ee (inf. IV) Islam.
سم impf. u to put poison
into anything, to poison.
on poison.
impf. a to hear. سيع
5
fish. لي pi. سيك
lw 77 . 2 ace. vel c. ace.
to call by name, ب et
to pine a name to.
rer (§ 56 a) name.
سَماء
7 47
impf. u to dwell, in- سكين
habit,rest, be quiescent.
S 99
wp X~rest, quiescence,
S a»
in- سكان pl. ساكن
habitant.
ere to put in chains.
(se impf. u to be or be-
come powerful.
JI to make, install as
ruler.
otis c. Ae autho-
rity over, rule; ruler,
sultan.
phew impf. a to be whole,
intact.
II to bestow health
and prosperity; ©. على
to greet, salute.
IV ec. للع to declare
one’s self resigned to
to God; to become a
Moslem.
127
hour, short space سَاعَة
of time, moment.
part. 5 95 0: 99a. سوق
med. 9 to drive. ساق
pl. teal mar- حون
ket, orcad lane.
beequal,alike, 7711750 سوى
simultaneous with.
(quite) على c. سواء
the same, indifferent to.
imp/.i to jour ى lew med.
3 أ ney, go along, go.
to follow one’s aa
wore distance travel-
led.
8 وو 8 ه98
saan: seine,
AG VI to find a bad omen.
ay a bad omen.
impf.ato be satiated. شيع
IV to satiate, satisfy.
to compare. 17 شبه
Guossary B.
impf. u 1) to sharpen, بي
2) ordain, institute.
tooth, age. بسن
Sao Geo»
Kaw 21. سنن regula-
‘tion, institution, tradi-
tion (of the Moslems).
din IV to support.
kin pl. nom. one (§ 760;
90 m) year.
ye impf. a to keep awake.
ا
re inf.
sLumed.,to bebad,wicked.
IV to spoil, corrupt,
to do ill.
Uy med. و
the ground.
oly med. و
come lord, ruler, over...
to sink into
c. ace. to be-
de oe “oe
أسود felts سرة ا pl.
سود ,سودان black.
Dae pl. Solus lord,
idler chief.
B, ع2هدة01205
noble, أشواف pl شرِيف
aristocratic, respected,
u to rise (of رهز شورق
the sun).
S oF
place of the مشرق
sun’s rising = the East.
impf. ac. ace. to be شرك
one’s companion.
G- عن
J net.
و
- ف
companion,ally. شريك
impf. i to buy, sell. شرى
VIIT to buy, negotiate.
Wied impf. a,c. pers.
be deeply struck with.
oes pl. 17 lip.
aa Ve. على to be ten-
derly solicitous for...
- =e
impf. u to thank, be شكر
thankful.
LCs impf. u, to complain.
VHT to complain.
IT 0. acc. to say “God شعت
128*
ya impf. u to be intri-
cate, intertwined.
Ss
SUS nom. unit. ews
tree, shrub.
Bes impf. u to bind, tie.
IT e. Ac to press hard
on one.
1-7170 becomestrong,
powerful, heavy.
a -E
dg déelat.dalstrong,
powerful; vehement.
(1. pers. yy) impf.
a to become bad.
2 (elat. id.) pl. shal
bad, wicked. Mischief,
woe, war.
Sy impf. a to drink.
Cha wine, strong
drink.
Sik impf. u to be high.
IV to be high, lofty.
nobility.
height, fame,
129*
impf. 1 to roast. شوى
impf.a to will, ى med. شاء
wish.
a matter, thing, شي
something.
SLs med. ى to become
gray-haired.
شيب gray hairs.
شا med. ى to become
an old man.
0 or
نت old man.
aise pl. شياطين devil,
Satan.
to spread a- ى med. شاع
broad, become public.
JI to accompany, to
follow.
Ge,
صن impf. u to pour, pour
out.
ereiner u to be attrac-
tive, good-looking.
IV to enter the time of
I
Guossary B.
bless you” to a person
(e. g. sneezing).
Gore
شيس fem. sun.
lia left (hand or side).
ges impf. a c. ace. to be
present at sthg., to wit-
ness, to give evidence.
III c. ace. to see, be
an eye-witness.
axl pl. ded wit-
ness.
folga testimony,
guarantee, security, a
a testimony.
So -
ot
ree pl. أشف month.
ee VIII to desire, wish.
55g sensual desire,
‘ appetite.
als coll. nom. unit. sl
small cattle, sheep and
goats; nom. unit.a single
head of these.
to إلى .© med. 5 IV شار
point to.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
6108554585 B.
0 pl. Sls}
associate; friend, com-
panion; owner, inhabi-
tant of (cf. § 133).
Kaas? pl. ze leaf.
G i
impf, u to turn away صل
from, alienate.
goes impf. u to speak
the truth, be truthful,
sincere.
IT to consider sthg. to
be true, right, to believe
one.
Vic. على pers. et sre
to give one sthg. as
alms.
5 يتم 3 Tyee
صديق pl. اصدقاء
friend.
Spe impf. i to turn from.
VII to turn, go, away,
return (home).
KeLS thunderbolt,
صغم impf. u, to be small,
little.
130*
early morning. c.acc.be-
come sthg. early, soon.
صباحة beauty, love-
liness.
sje impf. i, ©. AE to have
patience with, to put
up with, endure.
ae
impf. u or a to dye. صبغ
Lice imp/. u to be foolish;
ان
ee pl. : pve little
boy.
e* impf.i to be in good
health, sound.
cls elat.
ef pl
pal right, correct.
ws? impf. a, ©. ace. to
keep company with,
have to do with.
117 to take for com-
panion.
X to take with one
as an associate.
131*
S 99 .
صهوت silence.
impf. a to make,
prepare, to do.
ee pl. jleot relation
(by marriage).
ole med. 3 IV to befall,
fall to one’s share.
misfortune. ع
ه 95
<a voice.
re figure, shape, ضور
form.
- ساق
cell. صومعة
med. «5 to cry out. صا
VI to shout at each
other.
OLe med. ys to bunt.
one inf. hunting, what
is caught, game.
jle med. وى ©. acc. to be-
come or be sthg.; to
repair to.
1110 cause to become;
to appoint, to place.
y*
Guossary B.
©
inf. littleness. ف
Pe 5
imp/.u to place in a صف
row, draw up.
VIITto arrange (them-
selves),to stand in arow.
ا ب IX to صفر
el pl. ضفر yellow.
ie VII] to choose.
ero
man’s name.
ete impf. a to be good,
be in order.
IV to put in order,
set right.
s = . .
x=JLo a pious action,
good deed.
صلا 77 to pray, perform
divine service, to wor-
ship. xls UT le
pes, contracted to
re § 11.
Mo, Bh divine
service, worship,prayer.
impf. u to be quiet. صيت
GLossary B.
Gis med. 5 IV to press
hard, hem in.
straits, distress. ضيق
رعرع
LbLb to sink (trans.).
ane impf. u or i to treat
medically.
physician, doc- طَبيبٌ
tor. 1
jab IV to cover with a
lid.
VII to be covered up.
impf. a to grind. طحن
flour. طحين
impf. u to chase away, طرد
drive away, pursue.
IV to cast down one’s طرق
eyes.
impf. a to eat. طَعم
IV to feed (trans.).
S ee
inf. 7 eating, طعام
taste, a meal, food, a
(particular) dish.
132*
- =
sus 1777 to lie on one’s
side.
eas forenoon.
Cys impf.i to strike, beat.
Vill refl. to beat
against each other.
صرب inf. I striking,
beating.
§-o -
a single blow, ضربة
a beating.
ete impf. u to be weak.
S
weak. ضشعيف
G -
ضل impf. é to err.
GEL -
«JM erring, error.
pe impf. u to put close
to, press against, to
gather.
شاع med. و to be clear,
bright, shining.
29d light, brightness.
ب اط و ضياء
Soe -v FE
pi. eve) guest. ضيف
133*
alb med. و to obey, be
compliant.
IV id.
Se ع
طاعة inf., obedience.
subjection.
GLb med. و to go round.
flood. طوفان
IV to lengthen, و med. طال
protract; to be long
over sthg.
طويل long, lasting
long.
sy impf. i to fold, fold
up or together.
lb med. 5 to be good,
pleasant, excellent.
9 جين » VE
ado Elat. alo} good,
excellent, nice to the
taste, sweet (scent).
GS ewe
something good, طيبة
a dainty.
je med. .s to fly.
Guossary B.
Ab impf-u to seek, search
after; wish for.
le inf. I seeking,
a search.
a fe
طالب gol Abu Talib
(Muhammed’s uncle).
-e7e-
impf. u to stand up, طلع
get up, rise (of the sun).
7111 c. Aé to look
at, see.
lb IT 2. acc. to set free,
give divorce to.
IV to sét free.
VII to go
depart.
eek impf. a to strive to
obtain, to covet, sthg.
Sec
طبع inf. covetousness,
greed,
2.
ore
impf. u to be clean, طهر
pure.
away,
17 to cleanse, purify.
Guossary B.
adoration, wor- عباتة
ship.
cis impf. u to cross, to
pass along (a certain
road).
we an example(from 3
which to take warning).
impf.i to look stern, عنس
black-browed,},
al“ Abbas, الْعَبَاس
(man’s name).
wee
ce mantle, cloak.
jae impf. i to be or be-
come free.
IV to free, liberate.
(Gis nobility, high
rank.
cause free, noble, old.
> -0o9
wis
name).
“Utman, (man’s
os Fc. من to wonder
at sthg.
134*
med. «5 I to plaster طان
with clay ormud (cpade).
impf.i to treat unfair- ظَلم
ly, injure, do wrong to.
IV to grow dark.
GS-0?
darkness. ظلممة
darkness, dusk. ظَلام
one that acts in- ظلام
juriously, oppressor.
vee
eb imps. ato appear, to
come in sight.
iV to bring to sight.
eb the back, upper
part, surface.
yale elat. ‘abi pro-
minent, striking.
dus impf. u to worship.
ac coll. dune slave,
servant; pi. عبات man
(as the servant of God).
الله dus ‘Abdallah (a
man’s name).
135*
oF, coll. ia Arabs.
elel a Bedouin.
Less impf. i to interfere
with, thwart, offer.
V to come in one’s way.
impf. i to perceive, عرف
know, recognize.
Ge oe -
knowledge. معرنة
a favour, kind مَعْرُوفُ
deed.
hall name of the count-
ry known to the an-
cients as Babylonia.
impf. i to be strong, ع
powerful (often paren-
: الله thetically after
ne is powerful).
oe
poe elat. aa strong,
2
powerful.
Sse impf. i to depose.
VIII to take one’s
leave, be deposed.
Guossary B.
9 < س8
Kener pl. عكائب
@ wonder, miracle,
ise JT to expedite.
ce impf. u, c. 2 ace. to
count, reckon as...
os lentils.
Jos impf. i to be just.
Jolé just, impartial.
poe impf. a, ©. acc. to be
without sthg.
علا 7 c.acc.to cross over,
go beyond.
II 6. acc. to treat
as an enemy, attack,
Pie pl. Tos! enemy.
Eanes enmity.
Gdé ITto torture, punish.
Olde torture,punish-
ment.
joe VIII to excuse one’s
self,
S23 7
عل excuse (in the
sense of a refusal).
Guossary B.
pl. Glbs gift, عطيَةٌ
present.
-?3
impf. u to be or be- عظم
come great, large; cde
to appear to be great,
insolent,
Ge
inf. greatness. عظم
elat. Lei great, عَظيم
of great account,august.
عِفْرِيت pl. عَعَارِيت a
wicked, clever demon.
las impf. u, c. ort to
pardon (a person), be
gracious to.
Ss -g-
scor- عََاربٌ pl. عقرب
pion, a bitter enemy.
Pad
impf.i. or duis impf.a عقل
to be intelligent.
Ss
his intellectual abi-
lity, intelligence; pru-
dence.
che 7777 to fall ill.
136*
sy c. acc. et ot rei IT
to console, comfort.
ع ها 5
a body عشساكر pl. عسكر
of troops, army.
ye 77 to build a nest
(fi).
IIT to associate with.
tribe, tribesmen.
S- oF
assembly, the
whole; those present.
impf. i, 6. ace. to عصى
resist, not obey some
one.
Ge oF -
معصية pl. معاص re-
sistance, revolt, sin.
Gove
عضو member.
--
impf. i or عطس
sneeze,
u to
IV c. acc. pers. et rei عطا
to give sthg. to some
one.
Guossary B. 137*
upon, at; with verbs of
entering: chez ; against,
in the direction of, to-
3 oo He nam: 9
wards.e 0و على شى be
in a state of, to be ac-
customed to sthg.
8 4 oF 1,
As elat. اعلى high;
also man’s name ‘Ali.
- if oF
Ji elat. اعلى high,
prominent, excellent.
pe impf.u to be or become
common; to increase.
ا 8
side) ; pet op cousin.
the common عامة
people (plebs), large
crowd.
2 II to furnish, provide
handsomely.
Ses
life; in the oath عي
eyes by my life.
9-9
‘Omar (man’s
name).
Sa
علة illness, sickness.
et LIT to treat,
impf. a perceive, عَم
ب .© know, learn (that).
to know something.
IV c.2acc.to acquaint,
inform one of sthg.
we pl. eats know-
ledge, science.
SL 2
mark, sign. علامة
pl. أعلم elat. عَالِم
mee 7
possessing know- علماء
ledge, a learned man,
savant.
pike very knowing.
Suro
teacher. معلم
impf. u to be high. علا
VI to be highly exal-
ted, esp. parenthetically
after Allah: He is exalted
(§ 28).
b) over, 96 5 على
on the ground of, on,
06105854585 B.
ae pl. غنات vine,
grape.
dis prep. by the side of,
near, with, by (one).
1X to be bent, و med. عا
crooked.
Sle med. و to return, ¢.
acc. to visit.
Sle med. و C- & to take
refuge in...
X to ask for protec-
tion; to say: أَعود باللع
(Surah 114) “I take
refuge in God”, ec. من
from.
med. عان
to help, support.
IV ¢. ace. و
X to help one’s self,
to help on, succour.
Kylee Mu‘awiya, the first
“Omayyad Caliph (661
—679).
Jesus. عيسى
138*
د هه
(§ 907 ©
‘Amrun) Amr (a man’s
name).
impf.ato do, make, عَيِلَ
construct.
A to employ one for
for some purpose, to
apoint governor.
SLL S 208
dus pl. Jus! work,
act, deeds of piety,
province.
8 = S وت
pl. Jus a func- عامل
tionary, vicegerent,
prefect.
impf. a to be or be- عيى
come blind.
IV to disfigure, make
unrecognisable.
-of Sos 5
أعمى pl. عبى blind.
عن Prep. away from, from
(hinderance); about,
concerning; according
to, on the authority of,
139*
ye impf. ic. لي pers. to
pardon, forgive.
G- oF 5
مغفرة pardon, forgive-
ness.
add
has imp/. u to neglect.
inattention, neg- غغلة
ligence.
oe
impf. i to be all- غلب
powerful, victorious.
IT et IV to bolt, bar, غلق
shut.
we pl. ان a young
man, lad, slave.
Rec impf. a, c. oy to be
rich.
oF رسيس
ee pl. اغنياء rich.
wert JT to sing.
ies med. و to penetrate
far into, go down.
غَار
3
ر
yolé med. 0 to dive.
Guossary B.
ple med. «5 to live,
عيشة life, way of liy-
ing, (§ 64 c).
Idd ult, و to come early.
V to breakfast, to
refresh oneself early.
ye impf. u to set (of
the sun).
anes place where the
sun sets, the West.
sé IV to make to sink,
drown.
) و gazelle.
impf. i to wash. غسل
she impf. a to cover.
cle pl jl iN ésaddle-
cover, horse-cloth.,
as impf.i 6. 066. rei et
p. to take sthg. من
from one unlawfully.
wa impf.ato get angry,
4
be angry with.
GuossaRy 5.
1 Like 7 : 6 slave key.
C م ‘ei
Bet) 7717 ec. Y to be
struck with emotion,
bewitched, by.
Ft ١ a young man.
كَنَاة a young woman,
girl.
--
3 impf. u to transgress,
act viciously.
pene pl. ae evil-
doer.
كت impf. a to boast of,
glory in.
III to give oneself
airs towards some one.
= inf. 1.
Ge
y impf. i to flee.
the Persians. الْفرس
Persia. قارس
ده
a horse, esp. of a فوس
good breed.
“7-7
impf. u to spread out. فرش
140*
GLE med. «5 to be absent,
9 ee to disappear.
So, Si 3 8
عيب pl. غيوب a
secret.
B20
Rus absence, stay
among strangers.
rakes inf. sunset.
es med. ى II to alter,
change.
(§ 133 with gen.)
another,somethg differ-
Sor
ent from, no(with neg.),
except; before substs.,
adjs. and parts. it ren-
ders the converse, like
0
our prefix wn- or in-; من
on 1
aé without.
conj. (§§ 95e; 152; 161) ف
and so, then, and.
“wer
ee impf. a to open.
VII to open (intr.).
VIL to conquer, ac-
quire for one’s self.
5
es inf. I.
141*
ع هد 5
bounty, kind- فضل
ness, favour.
impf. a to be clever. قطن
Seo
kibs intelligence.
see
impf. a to do. فعل
sks pl. Slash deed,
act, mode of action.
is 7 to miss, enquire
for, some one.
9 سس سيم
i pl. فقراغ poor.
es VII to free oneself,
to become disattached.
ag V to reflect.
pl. 35,5 fruit. فاكهة
IV to become happy, فلم
successful, to prosper.
Ju a large) ship. ,فلك
ES so and so, Mr. Such-
and- Such.
desert. قلوات pl. قلاة
mouth (§ 90 0). كم
ace. to pass & و med. قات
Guossary B,
athe pl. فرش carpet,
cushion, bed.
كرض imp. i, 6. على pers.
to impose sthg. on one
as a duty.
aad
imp. u, ¢c. ue to be شرغ
empty, disengaged,
finished with ‘sthg.
impf. u, to separate, شرق
part.
ITI to leave.
VIII to become sepa-
rated, to disperse.
ey imp/. a to get a fright,
“be afraid.
-
dws impf. u to become
bad, wicked.
فسات inf. the doing
of mischief, evil, wrong.
ins IV to divulge, publish,
betray.
ewe
impf. u to be or فضل
remain over, to be ex-
cellent.
GLossary B.
X to be opposite.
dos adv. vel doe من
before.
Jus prep. before.
has prep. 12 the
presence of, in the
sphere of ... xlas من
9
on his side, of his party.
بول inf. I acceptance.
tribe, family (in قبيلة
wide sense).
Gee >
comparison,re- مقابلخ
lation.
sor
his impf. u to kill, make
away with.
JIT c. acc., to fight
with, fight.
Ate inf. I killing, exe-
cution.
das pl. فتك killed.
Glas أبو 403 Kuhata,
the father of Abi Bekr.
142*
by, to expire (of the
time for some one to
do sthg.).
to excel, be و med. عاق
excellent.
prep. above, لوق
higher than.
فوة (§ 900 pl. sly!) mouth.
فى prep. in, into, at, on,
accompanied
by, by; with (before a
quality), in relation to,
among,
with regard to.
واج و G
pl. ae phi- فيلسوف
losopher.
7 7 X to find detestable.
pl. ye grave. كبر
aa impf.i to take hold
of, take into one’s hand.
dis impf. a to accept.
IV to approach, come
nearer; be susceptible
to.
I to receive.
143*
X to stand fast, hold
good.
قبا continuance, rest.
BEL
impf. a to read. قرا
S09
: Kur’an or a
passage therefrom.
- 9s
oe ; impf.u to be near at
hand.
II to place near, to
take as intimate friend,
to offer, set before one.
VIto beclosetogether.
ext pl. أقرباء : elat.
a ae :
pl. wy LI (subst.). 6. وى
near, close(to) ; related.
the tribe of the فريُش
Kuraish, the Kurai-
shites.
2 ee
2s nom, rela Ku-
raishite.
مم نر نا 2 0
ne horn; القرنيني 5 the
two horned (Alexander
bicornis).
01088485
d) particle. 99 ,986 §( قل
impf. i to be able to, قل
can, could (also with
folg. impf.). ©. Ac to
have power over.
Ve. ds to make one
more powerful than.
05 worth, value, due,
power. بقدر in rela-
tion to, in proportion
to..
aos impf. a, to advance,
approach.
II to place before,
set sthg. before 8. 0
IV to approach.
V to go before, pre-
cede.
wee?
pads pl. zlod3 an-
cient, old, of a past time.
Ge. u
simpf.ito stay, persevere.
IV to render stable, ©
ب rei to confess to sthg.
-
Guossary B.
impf. a to cut off. قطع
VII ec. ort to become
parted from; to cease.
oe
imp/. u to seat one’s قعل
self, sit down.
Goo Ss
has pl. JUST lock, pad-
lock.
قَلَّ i to be small, few.
IV to make small, take
little of.
X to deem small, think
little of, despise.
small, few, scant. كليل
ds impf. i to turn round,
"to change.
VII to alter (intr.), to
change one’s mind.
Sor 9 وخ
AS pi. قلوب heart.
5 7777 to tear away,
take away.
yaisimp/.i to hunt, catch.
Lis 7777 to procure, pur-
chase.
144*
ده 2ه
pl. sp place, village. قرية
to be hard. و Lan wit.
pod IV to swear.
impf. i, to make for, قصل
repair to, some one.
uae the end of a
journey.
25 to be short.
VI to shorten one’s
self, to shrink.
-
5
yo pl. jee castle,
fortress.
wed VII to let one’s self
down, dart down (of a
bird).
قضى imp/.i to decide judi-
cially; to accomplish,
finish; to discharge a
claim.
VII to be finished,
brought to an end.
slas inf. T payment.
قط adv. ever, with negat.
never.
145*
ar) the means to do
ا
ssi 02 As) strong,
powerful.
J (§§95/; 145 b prop. subj.)
as, like as.
GE-
كان (it is) as if...
عن 31 هم
pimp uto begreat, large.
V to vaunt oneself,
be proud.
pS inf. Ito be advanc-
ed in years.
es elat. pel great,
old.
ree
iS impf. u to write.
III ¢. ace. to corre-
spond with.
S,7- © دع 5
LS pl. كتب a writ-
ing, scripture (= writ-
ten revelation), letter,
book.
2-4
imp/. u to conceal. كتم
K
Guossary B.
to lead, guide. و med. قَانَ
VII to let one’s self
be guided.
JUS med. و to say, tell;
often = ask. c. ل to
name.
Jes pl. Sgt speech,
utterance, apothegm.
6 +e
speech. مقال
و als med.
proceed (to).
IV to fix, setup, estab-
lish; halt, stop, stay.
X to be upright, faith-
ful.
to stand up,
Soe
5 coll. pe 1
شوم people, one’s
dependants, nation,
subjects.
B-)- :
xolas resurrection.
G-S,-
.21 قادية
ale place, occasion.
foot. كوايم
impf. a to be strong. قوىى
Sa2 “
strength, force; شو
Socin, Arabic Grammar.”
Guossary 2.
impf. u to be noble, وم
generous
pays 7 sles noble,
high- souled, highly
esteemed.
S-9e-
anoble مَكَارم pl. مكرمة
quality, generous ac-
tion.
impf. a to dislike. كر
VIII to acquire, to كسر
attain to sthg.
-- -
impf. i to eclipse. كسف
LELS imp. i, c. oF to
uncover.
VII to be uncovered,
be carried off.
es ankle-bone, a die
(pl. dice).
Ere se
كفا IT c. ace. pers. et على
rei to requite, recom-
pense one for sthg.
s impf.u to be unthank-
ful, to deny, .
146*
ee np concealing,
keeping close.
aoe
to be much or many.
IV to make many,
take much of.
X to consider much
or many.
ys elat. كثر { much,
many (often rather as
a subst. in apposition).
GdSimpf. ito lie, tell lies.
Il 6. ace. pers. 061 ب
rei to charge one with
falsehood, discredit.
I, lying, a كلب
lie, falsehood.
vara?
WS impf. u, to cause one
trouble, pain.
G09
grief, distress, كربة
anxiety.
5 .»0%
divi- كرديس pl. كبرت وس
sion (of cavalry), squad-
ron.
147*
out impf. a to hide one’s
self,
Soe
u to wrap in a pS pl. 3piS treasure, 7 كفن
us impf. u to give one a
Se
surname contg. .أب
oS med. 3 to be, exist.
(Sometimes the perf. of
this verb is to be trans-
lated by our present).
c. ace. (§§ 110, 149) to
be something. ©. J to
be translated by “to
have”.
hs pl. أمكنة place.
“UF
37 كيف
J(88 95g; 147d) acorrobo-
rative particle.
J prep. (§§ 95h; 1175
130; 131; 132) for; is
sign of the dative; on
account of, for... sake
(giving purpose, mo-
tive); at (the time of).
J conj. c. subj. (§ 100)
K*
Guossary B.
8 pl. كقار unbeliey-
ing.
aad
shroud.
--
impf. 1, 6. acc. pers. et
r. to do sthg. in some
one’s place; to protect
s. o. from sthg.
JS (§ 1195) totality; عوط
fore determ. subst., all;
before indeterm., every.
as often as.. كلبًا
II c. acc. pers. to
speak with, address one.
V to speak, talk, make
speeches. ©. ب to pro-
nounce, utter.
See
A word.
كلام speech, talk, con-
versation.
how much? )15 5) كم
Le) as. + ك) كبا
huss perfect.
Guossary B.
59 - o-=
dod eat. الل tasty,
delicious, sweet.
ry! impf. a, ¢. acc. to
remain in...
8, - S و 2
لسان pl. السن 8.
ja} VIIT to cling to.
impf. u to be fine, لَطف
slender, kind.
Sos
\G kindness, .6 لطف
ا
Gaba} kind.
ato play, sport. :7 لعب
may be, perhaps. (147 )لعل
- --7
impf. a to curse. لعن
Seo
kis) a curse.
لقب 37 ©. ace. pers. 64 ب
to surname, give a nick-
name to.
- =
impf. a to swallow, لقم
gulp down.
Seo
x2) a morsel,
148*
in order that; c. mod.
apoc. §101a. (§ 147)
because.
150c) ;111 ;1010 68 ل
not, no. MG prep. c.gen,
without. By means of
a preceding negation لا
is very frequently re-
sumed,
(often at) لحن بالأكن
nevertheless, but.
JG (also ملك pl. لاك
angel,
- =
ig
delay.
impf. a to put on. لبس
IV ¢.2 ace. to clothe.
شن
3 ve
rad 2. ans Noo cloth-
ing, dress.
gdimpfa €.W 01-0
overtake.
Ge > ° eee ry
ad, 1. pers. ,لييذت impf. a
to be tasty, sweet.
impf. a to tarry,
149*
Le not (cf. 5 150).
و BL
رطكو11 مارب a town in
“South Arabia.
io resemblance, like-
ness ; the like, same; one
(pers. or thing) like, cf.
§ 1450.
See
resemblance, na- مثل
ture, quality(of a thing).
impf. a to put to the كن
test.
Seo
Rass inf.
pl. ero valde due مَلِينَة
town. Risduall - مدينة
cat Medina.
impf.uc. to pass by. م
ire once.
pl. iy often.
EAS » bitterness.
yl (§ 90e) man.
SE-o
03 أمرا woman, wife.
pe ait ”
oo ime.
Guossary B.
pe impf. a to meet, meet
with.
IV c. ace. to throw.
X to throw one’s self,
to lie.
not. )¢ 101 §( لم
se 60117. after, when.
8 part. if, introduces a
condition, which is not
likely to be fulfilled.
med. : to blame. لام
sort, ههه لون pl. =
kind.
gual (§§ 50: 110; 144) not
be, to be non-exis- 40 '
tent. é
Sor G-o-
du, BLT pl. JUS (§ 907)
night.
ما 18 رما pron.(§ 15) what?
(§ 14) that which, what,
somethg. that.
ما conj. (§ 158 b) so
long as.
Guossary B.
e) inf I. 71 §( مضى
shower ,له أَمُطَارٍ rae
of rain.
see
impf. u to defer (a مطل
payment).
Sass inf.
prep. with; besides; م
alongside of.
Bey stomach.
Ero impf. u to hate.
Se hatred.
Ke Mecca.
@ Sox
impf. u to tarry, ne مكث
Bre
من impf. a, c. ace. et ملا
to fill sthg. with . .
VIII to become filled.
impf. i, ¢. acc. to ملك
rule, govern, possess.
JT to appoint as king.
وه 9
1s dominion, sover-
eignty, reign, riches.
ملك possessions,
riches.
150*
9 29. * .
Bey manliness, vir-
tus, manly virtue.
oye pl. She mar-
grave, prefect.
Ley impf. ato be or be-
come sick.
Uday sick,
مرغ V to roll (in the dust).
مريم Miriam, Mary.
impf. ac. YS to wipe,
wipe off, away.
well Christ, the
Messiah.
مسك I to take hold of,
sieze.
V to hold on by sthg.
IV to enter on the مسا
eventide; to do some-
thing late,
impf. i to go, walk; مشى
inf. مشى
impf. ito go, betake مضى
one’s self to.
151*
209 2 03 1
dio (from ذو uy) since.
impf. a, c.2 acc. to ملع
debar onefromsthg., re-
fuse, prevent one doing
sthg.; c. ace. et من 10
defend one from or
against sthg.
VIII to protect one’s
self.
eo
re impf. a, 6. ب to be
skilled, clever, expert,
wellversed.
So
0 wedding-present,
price of the bride (paid
to her father).
to die. و med. مات
IT to put to death.
inf. death, موث
Swe
san dead.
nis Moses.
9 وعم 8 م
مال pi. Slo goods and
chattels, property,
flocks.
Guossary B.,
king. ملوك pl. ملك
ceremony of ملاك
marriage.
pl. aus king- ماو
dom, sovereignty.
ile for Jie ». under
J.
ot - من + G8 5
note d).
he who, ;)15 §( 9 من
they that; one that,
whoso, whoever.(§§ 14,
.)159 ,154
prep. of (= some of, من
in partitive sense § 114),
belonging to; with the
negation it has astreng-
thening effect, § 141;
consisting of; away
from, from (separation,
point of departure);
hence in comparison =
than; through(passage).
Guossary B.
IV causative.
os oF
Gye pron. we.
(S rto turn aside, to draw
back, retire.
Sor S vor
hs coll., nom. unit. 1S
palm.
re impf. a, ¢. nes to re-
pent of sthg., feel sorry.
pos IIT to be one’s boon
companion.
تَديم pl. 2043 boon
companion, mess-mate.
{3 777 call out, c. ace.
to call to some one.
rT IV to warn.
ey impf. i to remove.
71717 to strip off, dis-
place.
ead
impf. i to descend, نال
alight, stop, lodge,
to alight على .© encamp.
at, lodge, stay with...
IV to send down (in
152*
se (§ 904) pl. slo
water.
Bdale pl. dolye table,
tray.
ja med. 5 Wc. بين to
distinguish.
نيا IT 6. acc. pers. et با
rei to give one informa-
tion regarding.
V to give one’s self out
for a prophet.
عت رين تق
xad VII to awake up.
& - ~ oF - &@e
eth Ble أنبياء vel نبيون
prophet.
Sass
Sy the office, rank,
of prophet.
eae
= imp. u to be brave,
courageous.
ل
courage, magna- كل ذا
2117
+ S
r= pl. ie constellation.
(3 impf. u to become free,
to save one’s self.
153*
a Christian, to live as
a Christian,
Bie ou - 5
تصرانى pl. تَصارى
a Christian.
ره دن 2 5
al-Mansur, المنصور
the second Abbaside
Caliph 754—775.
L43 7777 to draw (the
sword).
3 impf. a to butt with
the horns.
--
ee impf. i to talk.
IV to make, compel
to talk.
veer
5 impf. u to see, look
at, examine, reflect.
نعم impf. a to be soft, well
off, affluent.
eas coll. a herd of
camels,
59
3
نعمة affluence,welfare,
ae part. yes, yes in-
deed.
Guossary B.
particular, a revela-
tion).
pl. Jslin dwell- مَنولٌ
ing-place, abode, halt-
ing-place.
en impf. a to copy.
و © و هه 9
KSAS pl. a copy.
ies imps. a —
gins inf. forgetting.
gland (§ 907) women.
نشل TIT c. 2 acc. to ad-
jure by God.
نشط impf. a to be lively,
in good spirits.
a3 imp. u to set up.
oe share, portion.
S25 impf.a to be a true
friend,
- ee
impf. u, ¢. acc, to
help, 811660111.
V (denom.) to become
Guossary B.
Kaas an act of revenge.
نكت impf. u to afflict,
hurt, injure.
34% affliction, trouble.
نكم impf. 1 to marry.
III id.
XA id.,to wish to marry.
orgrao 3 عد
with one’s stepmother.
OSG V to be hard, strait,
troublesome.
3 marriage
ee IV to deny. 6. ace. r.
et على to find strange,
to take offence at sthg.
es impf.u to be fat, large.
S oF oe
فهل large, aspiring,
generous.
GS مه
6, - oF
نهر pl. انهار stream.
ae impf. a to forbid.
VIIT to arrive at, come
to an end.
o> Noah.
154*
-
2
Be ss a 9
as impf.u 061 1 ©. من to
flee from, avoid.
IT to cheer, relieve. نفس
G x0
canis fem., pl. واففس
soul (anima ap- فوس
petens), self (§ 12e);
dus كفيس life. yada
the taking of a نفيس
life not for a life, i. e.
without a murder hay-
ing been committed.
aay impf. a to be of use.
VIII ©. ب make use
of, profit by an ey
ge use,
useful qualities, benefit.
S- ده
Kahin pl.
($83 IIT to play the hypo-
crite.
-
pis impf. i, ¢. من pers.
to reproach one with
sthe.
VIIT to avenge one’s
self.
155*
<! 2
,( 13 §( هذه fem. ,هذا
this, here.
wy impf. u to flee.
ry? impf.ito put to flight.
VIT to turn and flee.
a hts tala
هاشم Hasim, man’s name;
pale Re Muhammed’s
clan.
part. interrog. هل
as لهم pron. 3. pers. plur.
msc. they (§ 12a).
pe impf. u to intend to do
sthg.
Fae) energy.
diglf India, the Hindus.
~ pron. he.
ys med. و to collapse.
(yl med. و to be easy,
X c. ب to despise.
ae
هوان insignificance.
هوى impf. a, 6. ace. to
‘fall in love with.
Guiossary B.
8 Shas
yb fem. pl. فيران fire, hell-
fire.
: شور light.
ده 9
kind, species, أَنْواع pl. فوع
different (sort of).
S LoL
a man’s name. نوفل
BG ples 553 3 female camel.
eG med. 4, impf. a to lie
down, sleep.
we
impf. u to part from
some one.
عن 7 o سه
a, الكجرة the re-
moval of Muhammed
from Mecca to Medina.
Hadhad, name الْمَِذْهَانُ
of a king.
sos impf. i to lead by
the right way, to guide
aright.
al-Mahdi, الْمَهُدِىٌ
name of the third Abba-
side Caliph, 775—785.
GuossaRy B.
--
df pores Me © 77 وحى
reveal to one, inspire.
35 impf. a to love.
VI to love mutually.
Sa--
BO مو love, inclination.
to set, place, يَدَء 1208 ودع
leave, let.
II to deposit.
الى IV c. acc. rei et
52
pers. to intrust sthg.
to some one.
33205 pl. وَذَاتْعَ pro-
perty given in trust, a
deposit (of money or
its equivalent).
to inherit. يرث impf. ورت
VI to receive as one’s
portion.
Shy heir.
dys impf. i to go down,
arrive.
oo--
Waraka, man’s name. ورقة
156*
air, sky. هوا
is pron. III fem. she.
conj. and, also, even. و
Asseverative particle
w. the genit.: st, by
God (be it sworn).
acc. with (§ 112).
sor an idol.
hs Bh
وجب impf.i to be neces-
sary; to be legally in-
cumbent on one.
IV to necessitate.
opt 0 Rags
(part. act. IV) pl.
2
which
brings about sthg.,occa-
sion, cause.
dS, impf. i to find.
x>, V to take the direc-
tion of . . ., set out.
Sov, GS 39
xy pl. وجوة face,
countenance.
9
dol one, single.
157*
to appear humbly be-
fore...
VIII to be humbled,
powerless.
/
low, ignoble, وَضِيع
mean.
place, م ضع ph مَوْضِعْ
position, dwelling-
place.
As, impf. i to make an
agreement, promise.
VIII to accept a pro-
mise, to promise one
another.
appointed time.
bs, impf. ito warn, ex-
hort.
VIII to suffer oneself
to be corrected.
rendezvous, -
me ره oF
Ble, pi. وعية | vessel,recep-
tacle.
O35 impf. i to go forth
Guossary B.
339 pl. وزراء vizier, mi-
“nister.
eu impf. a to be dirty.
4 37 inf.
fee impf. on to be pos-
sible, be open (to one).
IV to bring one into
a comfortable position;
to get riches for 8. .ه
wpawy impr. a to be sleepy.
-
Wie, imp/. i to describe.
Se 3%
Xa.0 description.
ee
impf. i to connect, وصل
arrive at. eo
VI to be mutually
attached to each other.
IV to bequeath by وَصَى
will.
Ss
executor (of a وصى
will).
وضع impf. ee to lay.
VIc. ل to be humble,
Guossary B.
VIII to be afraid.
IT to appoint as over- وكل
seer. V to trust (in).
ف
representative, وكيل
vice-gerent, agent.
i, impf.i to bring forth.
IV c. ace, to beget.
X c. acc. to beget (a
son) by 8
Gee S 2ه
J, pl. أولاد child,
son, lad. (In the sing.
also collect.).
S_-
feast, marriage feast. ولبية
wo impf. i, c. ace. to be
near.
IT to turn one’s back,
to turn round; ©. ot
to turn away from.
مم of
oe pl. اولياء sear:
esp. ‘near to God’ =
saint, helper.
dye pl. صوالٍ client,
slave.
158*
to a prince.
c. As to
come to.
(G5, 3171 c. acc. to agree
with, correspond to.
59 impf. ito be complete.
IIT c. acc. to come to,
arrive at.
Ge- 9
9 Gee
V توفاة الله «قونى God
has taken him (the Mos-
lem) to himself, has
brought him to a bless-
ed end. Pass. to die a
blessed death.
aU, dying; a blessed
end.
GS oF
uns, time.
5
& impf. يَقَعْ to fall, fall
upon, light upon; ec. على
to find some one.
IV to excite.
Wis, impf.i to stop, stand;
Cc. ee to go up to one.
5 Vc. acc. to beware,
be afraid, of sthg.
159*
bi, impf. a to be awake.
IV to wake.
X to have one’s self
waked, to awake.
err)
right side, right hand.
َلْيْهُوِدُ coll. the Jews.
بوسف Joseph.
Gur 9 GE
day, )908 §( ايام .77 يوم
يوم pl. length of reign.
that...(§129). 037 قطة on
2 ره 7 8
Logs one day; with suff.
a 7 joer
e. g. يومسك thy day
(§ 125). ألْيُومَ )8 118.)
a اند
on 2 (= جوم
ol) in that day, then.
to-day.
ere a Greek.
GLossary B.
ae Rg 5 عياض
يهب :17007 وكاب 0. 2 ace.
to present some _one
with sthg.).
part. of exclam. (§ 85) يا
!0
to من impf. a, c. يبس
despair of...
pares pl. aust orphan.
يَُثَربُ Yatrib, name of Me-
dina before Islam.
OS fem., pl. ost (§ 90r)
hand,power, possession.
oe impf. i to play (either
with arrows, by wh. lots
were cast, or with dice).
yee play, game,game
of chance.
CORRIGENDA.
pp. 56, 57 for headings as printed read: 5 65 Nomina Relativa;
§ 66 Nomina Deminutiva.
p. 68 heading read: § 78 Nom. Diptota.
p. 93 1. 4, for ‘you’ read ‘them’,
vo?
p. 40* 4, read .ومنذربن
3
p. 42*, 7 read .باج
ام
p. 42*, 15 read .صرت
5 لفاس -
1
.ارسطاطاليس p. 545, 2 read
سس دام
p. 55*, 7 read .امرتهم
PRINTED BY W. DRUGULIN, LEIPZIG.
لكي PO عه كي يدعس RELA at
ا
pares
ere
eed
ردي
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11